Compuprint | X03 | User`s guide | Compuprint X03 User`s guide

Compuprint X03 User`s guide
Compuprint 4247 Serial Matrix Printers
Compuprint 4247 Model X03/Z03 Printers: Programmer Manual
MAN10299.00.00
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page 357.
First edition (October 2011)
This edition applies to the Compuprint 4247 X03-Z03 printers and to all subsequent releases and modifications
until otherwise indicated in new edition.
Internet
Visit our home page: http://www.compuprint.com
You can send comments by e-mail to : support@compuprint.com or by mail to:
Compuprint s.r.l.
Via Lombardore 282
10040 Leinì (Turin)
ITALY
ii
Programmer Manual
Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 Serial Matrix Printers
Printer description . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper paths . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print qualities . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer interfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer datastream emulations . . . . . .
How to Use This Manual. . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) . . . .
Print Job Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Printing Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphic and Control Character Sequences . . . . . . .
PPDS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Byte Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Null (NUL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bell (BEL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backspace (BS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Tab (HT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Feed (LF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Tab (VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form Feed (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carriage Return (CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print . . . . . . . . .
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select . . . . . . . . . .
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Select . . . . . . . . . .
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Select . . . . . . . . . .
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Select . . . . . . . . . .
Cancel (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Escape (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Escape Sequence Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Null (ESC NUL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bell (ESC BEL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backspace (ESC BS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Tab (ESC HT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Feed (ESC LF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Tab (ESC VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form Feed (ESC FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carriage Return (ESC CR) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Doube-Wide Print . . . . . . .
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print . . . . . . . . .
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1 / Select) . . . . . . . .
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Select 10 CPI . . . . .
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect . . . . . . .
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .
Cancel (ESC CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. xvii
. xvii
. xvii
. xvii
. xviii
. xviii
. xviii
. xix
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1
. 1
. 1
. 1
. 3
. 4
. 4
. 4
. 4
. 5
. 5
. 5
. 5
. 5
. 5
. 6
. 6
. 6
. 6
. 6
. 7
. 7
. 7
. 7
. 7
. 9
. 9
. 9
. 9
. 9
. 10
. 10
. 10
. 10
. 10
. 11
. 11
. 11
. 11
. 11
iii
Auto Underscore (ESC -) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0) . . . . . . . . .
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1) . . . . . . . .
Invoke Text Line Spacing (ESC 2) . . . . . . . . .
Set Graphics Line Spacing (ESC 3) . . . . . . . . .
Set Top of Form (ESC 4). . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5) . . . . . . . . . . .
Select PC Character Set 2 (ESC 6) . . . . . . . . .
Select PC Character Set 1 (ESC 7) . . . . . . . . .
Set 12 CPI (ESC :) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unidirectional Printing (ESC <) . . . . . . . . . .
Character Font Image Download (ESC =) . . . . . .
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A) . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Page Length (ESC C) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D) . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E). . . . . . . . . .
End Emphasized Print (ESC F) . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G) . . . . . . . . .
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H) . . . . . . . . . .
Change Font (ESC I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relative Move Baseline (ESC J) . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC K) . . . . .
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1 (ESC L). . . .
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N) . . . . . . . . . .
End Skip Perforation (ESC O) . . . . . . . . . . .
Proportional Space Mode (ESC P) . . . . . . . . .
Deselect on Positive Query Reply (ESC Q) . . . . . .
Set Default Tabs (ESC R) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Subscript/Superscript (ESC S) . . . . . . . .
End Subscript/Superscript (ESC T) . . . . . . . . .
Set Print Direction (ESC U) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W) . . . . . . .
Set Horizontal Margins (ESC X) . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y) . . .
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z) . . . . . .
Print All Characters (ESC \) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverse Line Feed (ESC ]) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Single Character (ESC ^) . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous Overscore (ESC _) . . . . . . . . . .
Relative Move Right (ESC d) . . . . . . . . . . .
Relative Move Left (ESC e) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Line Scoring (ESC [ -) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Presentation Highlight (SPH) (ESC [ @) . . . . .
Set Font Global (SFG) (ESC [ I) . . . . . . . . . .
Set Initial Conditions (SIC) (ESC [ K) . . . . . . . .
Select Code Page (SCP) (ESC [ T) . . . . . . . . .
Set Print Quality (SPQ) (ESC [ d) . . . . . . . . .
4247 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select EAN-8 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 1 PP EM) .
Select EAN-13 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 2 PP EM)
Select UPC-A Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 3 PP EM) .
Select MSI Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 4 PP EM) . .
Select UPC-E Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 5 PP EM) .
Select UPC 2-Digit Bar Code (Magazine) (DC4 DC4 ESC !
Select UPC 5-Digit Bar Code (Magazine) (DC4 DC4 ESC !
iv
Programmer Manual
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
NN 6 PP EM)
NN 7 PP EM)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
24
26
27
28
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
Select 2 of 5 INTERLEAVED Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 17 PP EM) . . . . .
Select 2 of 5 INDUSTRIAL Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 18 PP EM). . . . . .
Select 2 of 5 MATRIX Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 19 PP EM) . . . . . . .
Select CODE 3 of 9 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 20 PP EM) . . . . . . . .
Select CODABAR Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 22 PP EM) . . . . . . . . .
Select CODE 128 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 23 PP EM) . . . . . . . . .
Select POSTNET Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 24 PP EM) . . . . . . . . .
Print Bar Code Selection (DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS {N1} {DATA1} GS {N2} {DATA2} EM).
Reinitialize Printer (DC4 DC4 ESC @). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing n/144 Inch (DC4 DC4 ESC 1 NN) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 12 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1) . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 3 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 4 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 6 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 8 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8) . . . . . . . . . . .
Eject Single Sheet or Form Feed (DC4 DC4 ESC 5) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set 15, 17.1, 20 CPI (DC4 DC4 ESC A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load or Park Fanfold from a Rear Path (DC4 DC4 ESC N) . . . . . . . . . .
Load or Park Fanfold from a Front Path (DC4 DC4 ESC T) . . . . . . . . . .
Select Emulation (DC4 DC4 ESC Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select AFTA in Column (DC4 DC4 ESC Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Resident Font (DC4 DC4 ESC g) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request to Read Configuration (DC4 DC4 ESC h) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Configuration Response (DC4 DC4 ESC h) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Configuration Response (DC4 DC4 ESC i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Configuration Acknowledgement (DC4 DC4 ESC i) . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Print Quality (DC4 DC4 ESC p). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer Terminating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
31
32
32
32
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream . . . . .
Print Job Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Printing Concept . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Byte Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Null (NUL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bell (BEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backspace (BS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Tab (HT). . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Feed (LF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Tab (VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form Feed (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carriage Return (CR) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print . . . . . . .
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print . . . . . . . . .
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select . . . . . . . .
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print .
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Deselect . . . . . . .
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .
Cancel (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Space (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Character (DEL) . . . . . . . . . . .
Escape Sequence Controls . . . . . . . . . . .
Escape (ESC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Null (ESC NUL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bell (ESC BEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backspace (ESC BS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39
39
39
39
41
41
41
42
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
44
44
44
44
44
46
46
46
47
Contents
v
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Horizontal Tab (ESC HT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Feed (ESC LF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Tab (ESC VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form Feed (ESC FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carriage Return (ESC CR) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Double-Wide Print . . . . . . .
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print . . . . . . . . .
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1) / Select . . . . . . . .
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print .
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect . . . . . . .
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print .
Cancel (ESC CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Intercharacter Spacing (ESC SP) . . . . . . . .
Master Select (ESC !) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancel MSB Control (ESC #) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Absolute Print Position (ESC $) . . . . . . . . .
Select User-Defined Set (ESC %) . . . . . . . . .
Define User-Defined Characters (ESC &). . . . . . .
Select Graphics Mode (ESC *) . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Underscore (ESC –) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /). . . . . . . . .
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0) . . . . . . . . .
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1) . . . . . . . .
Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 2) . . . . . . . . .
Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 3) . . . . . . . .
Select Italic Mode (ESC 4) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancel Italic Mode (ESC 5) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 6) . . . . . . .
Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 7) . . . .
Copy ROM into Ram (ESC : NUL) . . . . . . . . .
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line only) (ESC <) . . .
Set MSB to 0 (ESC =). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set MSB to 1 (ESC >). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?) . . . . . . . . .
Initialize Printer (ESC @) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A) . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Page Length (ESC C) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D) . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E). . . . . . . . . .
End Emphasized Print (ESC F) . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G) . . . . . . . . .
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H) . . . . . . . . . .
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC I) . . . . . . .
Perform n/216 Inch Line Feed (ESC J) . . . . . . .
Select Single Density Graphics Mode (ESC K). . . . .
Select Double Density Graphics Mode (ESC L) . . . .
Select 12 CPI (ESC M) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N) . . . . . . . . . .
End Skip Perforation (ESC O) . . . . . . . . . . .
Select 10 CPI (ESC P) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Right Margin (ESC Q) . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Character Set (ESC R) . . . . . . . . . . .
Begin Subscript/Superscript (ESC S) . . . . . . . .
End Subscript/Superscript (ESC T) . . . . . . . . .
Set Print Direction (ESC U) . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
Programmer Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
52
52
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
54
54
54
55
55
55
55
55
56
56
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Relative Position (ESC \) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Letter Quality Justification (ESC a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relative Move Right n/120 (ESC d) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relative Move Left n/120 (ESC e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set 15 CPI (ESC g) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed Paper n/216 Reverse (ESC j) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select NLQ Font (ESC k) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Left Margin (ESC l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Proportional Mode On/Off (ESC p) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quiet Printing (ESC s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Character Table (ESC t) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double High Printing (ESC w) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select NLQ or DP Print Quality (ESC x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4247 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select EAN-8 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 1 PP EM) . . . . . . . . . . .
Select EAN-13 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 2 PP EM) . . . . . . . . . .
Select UPC-A Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 3 PP EM) . . . . . . . . . . .
Select MSI Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 4 PP EM) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select UPC-E Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 5 PP EM) . . . . . . . . . . .
Select UPC 2-Digit Bar Code (Magazine) (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 6 PP EM) . . . .
Select UPC 5-Digit Bar Code (Magazine) (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 7 PP EM) . . . .
Select 2 of 5 INTERLEAVED Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 17 PP EM) . . . . .
Select 2 of 5 INDUSTRIAL Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 18 PP EM). . . . . .
Select 2 of 5 MATRIX Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 19 PP EM) . . . . . . .
Select CODE 3 of 9 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 20 PP EM) . . . . . . . .
Select CODABAR Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 22 PP EM) . . . . . . . . .
Select CODE 128 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 23 PP EM) . . . . . . . . .
Select POSTNET Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 24 PP EM) . . . . . . . . .
Print Bar Code Selection (DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS {N1} {DATA1} GS {N2} {DATA2} EM).
Reinitialize Printer (DC4 DC4 ESC @). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing n/144 Inch (DC4 DC4 ESC 1 NN) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 12 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1) . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 3 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 4 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 6 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6) . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Vertical Spacing 8 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8) . . . . . . . . . . .
Eject Single Sheet or Form Feed (DC4 DC4 ESC 5) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set 15, 17.1, 20 CPI (DC4 DC4 ESC A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load or Park Fanfold from a Rear Path (DC4 DC4 ESC N) . . . . . . . . . .
Load or Park Fanfold from a Front Path (DC4 DC4 ESC T) . . . . . . . . . .
Select Emulation (DC4 DC4 ESC Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select AFTA in Column (DC4 DC4 ESC Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Resident Font (DC4 DC4 ESC g) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request to Read Configuration (DC4 DC4 ESC h) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Configuration Response (DC4 DC4 ESC h) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Configuration Response (DC4 DC4 ESC i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Configuration Acknowledgement (DC4 DC4 ESC i) . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer Terminating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unsupported Command Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
59
59
59
60
60
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
61
61
62
62
62
62
63
64
64
64
65
65
65
66
66
66
67
67
67
68
68
69
69
69
69
69
69
70
70
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
71
72
72
72
72
73
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Contents
vii
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Medium. . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPDS Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . .
X and Y Medium Coordinate System . . . .
Logical Page Layout . . . . . . . . . .
I and B Coordinate System . . . . . . . .
Processing IPDS Commands . . . . . . . .
IPDS Command Format . . . . . . . . . .
Acknowledge Requests and Replies . . . . .
Acknowledge Reply (ACK) . . . . . . . .
Host Acknowledgment Requests . . . . . .
Printer Acknowledgment Replies . . . . . .
IPDS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPDS Operating States . . . . . . . . . .
Home State . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page State . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overlay State . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Segment State . . . . . . . . . .
A Summary of the IPDS States and Commands .
A Typical IPDS Command Sequence . . . . .
Printer Initialization and Preparation Sequence.
Page Segment Sequence . . . . . . . .
Overlay Sequence . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information . . . .
IPDS Initialization Defaults . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported IPDS Command Codes for the 4247 Printer
Command Function Sets . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Control Function Set Commands . . . . .
No Operation (NOP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sense Type and Model (STM) . . . . . . . .
Set Home State (SHS) . . . . . . . . . . .
Acknowledge Reply (ACK). . . . . . . . . .
Load Font Equivalence (LFE) . . . . . . . .
Code Page ID Values . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Copy Control (LCC) . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Page Descriptor (LPD) . . . . . . . .
Logical Page Position (LPP) . . . . . . . . .
Deactivate Font (DF) . . . . . . . . . . . .
End Page (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End (END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Execute Order Home State (XOH) . . . . . . .
Execute Order Any State (XOA). . . . . . . .
Text Function Set Commands . . . . . . . . .
Load Equivalence (LE) . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Text (WT). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Function Set Commands. . . . . . . . .
Write Image Control (WIC) . . . . . . . . .
Write Image (WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End (END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphics Function Set Commands. . . . . . . .
viii
Programmer Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
75
75
76
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
83
84
85
86
86
86
87
88
89
91
93
94
95
96
97
. . . 99
. . . 99
. . . 100
. . . 100
. . . 101
. . . 102
. . . 102
. . . 103
. . . 103
. . . 106
. . . 106
. . . 107
. . . 109
. . . 110
. . . 111
. . . 113
. . . 114
. . . 114
. . . 114
. . . 114
. . . 124
. . . 133
. . . 133
. . . 134
. . . 142
. . . 142
. . . 144
. . . 144
. . . 144
Drawing Order Coordinate System. .
Graphic Medium Presentation Space .
Graphic Window . . . . . . . .
Graphic Block Area . . . . . . .
Positioning the Graphic Window in the
Write Graphics Control (WGC) . . .
Write Graphics (WG) . . . . . . .
Related Drawing Orders . . . . . .
Bar Code Function Set Commands . .
Write Bar Code Control (WBCC) . .
Write Bar Code (WBC) . . . . . .
Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC) . .
Overlay Function Set Commands . . .
Begin Overlay (BO) . . . . . . .
Delete Overlay (DO) . . . . . . .
Include Overlay (IO) . . . . . . .
Page Segment Function Set Commands
Begin Page Segment (BPS) . . . .
Include Page Segment (IPS) . . . .
Deactivate Page Segment (DPS) . .
Loaded Font Function Set Commands .
Load Symbol Set (LSS). . . . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Graphic
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
Command Reject - X'80' . . . . . . . .
Intervention Required - X'40' . . . . . . .
Equipment Check - X'10' . . . . . . . .
Data Check - X'08' . . . . . . . . . .
Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04'. . . .
Specification Check-Graphics - X'03' . . . .
Specification Check-General - X'02' . . . .
Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01' .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
144
145
146
146
147
148
159
177
180
181
190
192
193
194
194
194
195
195
195
196
196
196
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
199
199
199
200
200
200
202
204
213
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example .
Text Print Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphics Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphics Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPDS Coding Example . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
215
215
216
217
218
223
Appendix A. Code Pages . . .
EBCDIC Code Pages . . . . .
USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual
Canadian French . . . . . .
Austrian/German . . . . . .
Belgian Old . . . . . . . .
Brazilian . . . . . . . . .
Danish/Norwegian . . . . . .
Finnish/Swedish . . . . . .
Italian . . . . . . . . . .
Japanese English . . . . . .
Portuguese . . . . . . . .
Spanish/Spanish Speaking . .
English (UK)/Ireland . . . . .
Japanese Katakana . . . . .
French/French Azerty . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
231
231
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
Contents
ix
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Block Area .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Arabic . . . . . . . . . . .
Greek (Old) . . . . . . . . .
Hebrew Bulletin. . . . . . . .
International 5/Swiss/Belgian . . .
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro .
Korean . . . . . . . . . . .
Thai . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latin 2/ROECE . . . . . . . .
Icelandic . . . . . . . . . .
Greek New + euro . . . . . .
Cyrillic . . . . . . . . . . .
Yugoslav (Old) . . . . . . . .
OCR-A . . . . . . . . . . .
OCR-B . . . . . . . . . . .
Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro . . . .
Cyrillic Multilingual. . . . . . .
Latin-5 Turkey . . . . . . . .
Farsi. . . . . . . . . . . .
Baltic Multilingual . . . . . . .
Estonian . . . . . . . . . .
USA/Canada + euro . . . . . .
Austrian/German + euro . . . .
Danish/Norwegian + euro . . . .
Finnish/Swedish + euro . . . . .
Italian + euro . . . . . . . .
Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro .
English/UK + euro . . . . . . .
French + euro . . . . . . . .
International 5/Belgian New + euro
Icelandic + euro . . . . . . .
ASCII Code Pages . . . . . . .
USA (Personal Computer) A-54 . .
Greek (MS DOS) . . . . . . .
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) . . . .
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1) . . . . . .
PC Multilingual . . . . . . . .
Old Greek. . . . . . . . . .
Latin 2/ROECE . . . . . . . .
Latin 3 (PC) . . . . . . . . .
Cyrillic (PC) . . . . . . . . .
Latin 5-Turkey + euro . . . . .
PC Multilingual + euro . . . . .
Portuguese . . . . . . . . .
Icelandic . . . . . . . . . .
Hebrew. . . . . . . . . . .
Canadian French . . . . . . .
Arabic . . . . . . . . . . .
Danish/Norwegian . . . . . . .
PC Data, Cyrillic, Russian . . . .
Greek New + euro . . . . . .
Thai . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCR-A . . . . . . . . . . .
OCR-B . . . . . . . . . . .
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2) . . . . . .
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3) . . . . . .
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4) . . . . . .
x
Programmer Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5) . . . . . . .
Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8) . . . . . . .
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9) . . . . . . .
Baltic Multilingual . . . . . . . .
Estonian . . . . . . . . . . .
Latin 9 (ISO 8859-15) + euro. . . .
Urdu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arabic Extended . . . . . . . .
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6) . . . . . . .
Farsi (Personal Computer). . . . .
Estonian (Personal Computer) . . .
Latvian (Personal Computer) . . . .
Lithuanian (Personal Computer). . .
Central Europe Latin 2 . . . . . .
Cyrillic Windows + euro . . . . . .
Epson FX-series Code Pages . . . .
Extended Graphics Character Table .
Italic Character Table. . . . . . .
Epson Extended Character Variables .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
318
319
320
Appendix B. Application Paper Source Selection
Application-controlled paper-source selection . . .
PSF usage - z/OS and System i . . . . . .
System i media selection (other than FORMDEF)
Use of 'FORMS' parameters - z/OS and System i
Using 4247 with System i Host Print Transform .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
321
321
321
321
322
322
Options .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
323
323
325
325
326
Appendix C. 4247 Bar Code and OCR Printing
Bar Code Printing Options Charts . . . . . .
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Printing .
OCR Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCR Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix D. Configuration Menu Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Appendix E. Interfaces .
The Parallel Interface . .
Signals Description . .
Operating Phases . . .
Parallel Interface Signals
Parallel Interface Signals
The Serial Interface . . .
Serial Interface Signals .
LAN Interface Port . .
USB Interface Port . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Behaviour
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix F. Network Interface Technical Reference . . . . . . . . . . . .
4247 Network Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing a Single Printer Configuration Using the 4247 Internal Webpage . . . . .
Configuration Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing and Saving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Multiple Printers Using the 4247 Remote Printer Management Utility . . .
4247 Network Interface Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM systems - LAN printing technical support documents on the world-wide-web . .
32815, Configuring a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description . . . . . . . . .
19934440, Recommended SNMP Port Number Values for *LAN 3812 SNMP Device
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
329
329
329
329
330
331
335
336
336
336
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Descriptions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
337
337
339
339
339
339
339
342
342
343
Contents
xi
8983237, Configuring a Remote Output Queue (RMTOUTQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
18762910, Configuring a *LAN 3812 Device Description that Uses the LPR Print Driver
(TSPLPRD) Exit Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
IPDS Services Facility (PSF) printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Appendix G. LAN Interface MIB Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Appendix H. The Remote Printer Management Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Operating System Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Software Installation and Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
Programmer Manual
. . .
. . . .
. . . . .
. .
. . .
. . . . .
. 357
Figures
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
The Physical Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Xm,Ym Medium Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Physical-Logical Page Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The X and Y Coordinate System and the Logical Page . . . . . . . . . .
The I and B Coordinate System on the Logical Page . . . . . . . . . .
An Example of the IPDS Data Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Sample Page Constructed on an IPDS Printer . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Relationship between Home State, Page State, and Block States . . . .
The Relationship between Home State, Overlay State, and Block State. . . .
The Relationship between Home State, Page Segment State, and Block States
The Complete IPDS State Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Load Page Descriptor Command to Specify the Logical Page . . .
Using the Logical Page Position Command to Position . . . . . . . . .
Using the Set Media Size Command to Specify the Physical Medium . . . .
Exception Handling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Graphics X and Y Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Graphic Medium Presentation Space and Its Limits . . . . . . . . .
The Graphic Window within the Graphic Medium Presentation Space . . . .
The Graphic Block Area on the Physical Medium . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphic Block Area Position Control and the Graphic Block Area. . . . . .
Graphic Output Control and the Graphic Block Area . . . . . . . . . .
Graphic Data Descriptor and the Graphic Medium Presentation Space . . .
Scale-to-Fit Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center-and-Trim Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position-and-Trim Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Bar Code Block Using the Bar Code Area Position Field . . .
Specifying the Bar Code Block Size Using the Bar Code Output Control . . .
Specifying the Bar Code Medium Presentation Space Size. Using the Bar Code
An Example of Overlay Nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Sample from an IPDS Application Program . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode Centronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode IEEE 1284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
Data
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Descriptor
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
76
77
77
78
79
79
85
87
88
89
91
113
113
116
130
145
146
146
147
149
151
153
154
155
156
182
184
188
193
223
334
335
xiii
xiv
Programmer Manual
Tables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Valid IPDS Command Codes for the 4247 Printer . . . . .
IPDS Command Code Summary for the 4247 Printer . . .
An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence . . . . . .
IPDS Initialization Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and Rear with no linking . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Drawing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC) . . . . . . . . .
Exception Reporting Group Codes . . . . . . . . . .
IPDS Coding Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes .
Bar Code Printing Options for UPC Family Bar Codes . .
OCR Symbol Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM GROUP - RFC 1213 . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFACE GROUP - RFC 1213 . . . . . . . . . .
ADDRESS GROUP - RFC 1213. . . . . . . . . . .
HOST RESOURCES - RFC 1213 . . . . . . . . . .
PRINTER - RFC 1759 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
81
89
92
99
115
177
192
199
223
318
323
325
326
345
345
345
346
347
xv
xvi
Programmer Manual
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 Serial Matrix Printers
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 printers are professional, industrial impact-matrix printers. The 4247 Model
X03/Z03 printers are rugged printers designed for harsh environments and demanding applications. Each
of the 4247 models offers user-installable interface cards.
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 printers can have either one or two straight continuous-forms paper paths. One
paper path is standard, and the second path is an optional feature. The printer operator panel is common
with these models and includes the same full-function, full-size, 2 line by 24 character display, making
messages and menus easy to understand.
Print-quality choices are Fast Draft mode (Model Z03 only), Data Processing mode (DP), DP Text mode
(DP Text), and Near Letter Quality mode (NLQ). Versatile paper-handling capability provides printing on up
to 8-part forms. Typical applications include transaction processing for invoices, office or internal business
documents, as well as barcodes, labels, and multipart forms.
Printer description
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 printers build on the strengths of previous models of the 4247 family while
providing a Fast Draft mode for the Model Z03 and a faster print speed for the Model X03.
Print speeds
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 printers print speeds (in characters per second):
Print Quality
4247 X03
4247 Z03
Fast Draft
N/A
1100
Data Processing (DP)
800
800
DP Text
400
480
Near Letter Quality
200
240
Note: Print speed (CPS) at 10 CPI.
Paper paths
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 printers provide exceptional forms-handling flexibility. The base printer includes
one front continuous-forms tractor paper path, and an optional second continuous-forms tractor paper
path. Both continuous-form paper paths are front loading. Paper path linking is available when the optional
second tractor is installed.
Paper path nomenclature
Front continuous-forms tractor: The first tractor visible when opening the front tractor cover is called the
front continuous-forms tractor. In the standard (one tractor) configuration the installed tractor is called the
front continuous-forms tractor.
In the optional (two tractor) configuration the forward most installed tractor is called the front
continuous-forms tractor.
Rear continuous-forms tractor: In the optional (two tractor) configuration the tractor behind the front
continuous-form tractor is called the rear continuous-forms tractor.
xvii
Print qualities
Fast Draft is a print quality available only for the 4247 Model Z03 printer. The Data Processing (DP), Data
Processing Text (DP Text), Near Letter Quality (NLQ), OCR-A, and OCR-B print qualities on the 4247
Model X03 printer is equivalent in character size, shape, and resolution to the print qualities available on
the 4247 Models Z03 printer.
Print quality selection
Print quality can be selected using program control or through the printer operator panel. Program control
datastream commands take precedence over operator panel settings and can not be overridden.
Available printer operator panel settings are:
Print Quality = Fast Draft (Model Z03 printer)
Fast Draft is the default setting for the Model Z03 printer.
Print Quality =
DP is the default
Print Quality =
Print Quality =
Print Quality =
Print Quality =
DP
setting for the Model X03 printer.
DP TEXT
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
An 4247 Model Z03 printer operator panel feature, Host Fast Draft, is a setting that allows application
programs written for earlier printers in DP mode to print in Fast Draft mode without changes to the
application program. If Host Fast Draft is enabled then DP mode applications print in Fast Draft mode. If
Host Fast Draft is disabled then DP mode applications print in DP mode.
The following table summarizes the print quality for Fast Draft (model Z03 only), DP, DP Text, and NLQ:
Horizontal DPI
Vertical DPI
Horizontal character
cell size (dots)
Vertical character
cell size (dots)
45
72
9
9
DP
60
72
12
9
DP Text
100
72
20
9
NLQ
100
144
20
18
Print quality
Fast Draft
(Model Z03 only)
Printer interfaces
There are three Controller Board options:
v Allows a host connection to Parallel, Serial, and USB 2.0 interfaces
v Allows a host connection to Parallel and ASCII Ethernet 10/100 BaseT LAN Network interfaces.
v Allows a host connection to Parallel and ASCII-IPDS Ethernet 10/100 BaseT LAN Network interfaces.
Printer datastream emulations
v ASCII emulations for the IBM® 4202 Proprinter III XL, IBM 2381 Personal Printer, and Epson FX printers
v IPDS™ emulations for the IBM 4224 and IBM 4230 printers
v IBM 4247 mode (native mode) extensions to ASCII and IPDS datastream emulations
xviii
Programmer Manual
How to Use This Manual
The following lists describes the contents of each chapter and the appendixes:
Chapter 1, “Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS),” on page 1 describes the Personal Printer Data Stream
(PPDS) programming commands for use when your printer is attached and emulation mode is set to 4247,
4202 III XL, or 2381 Personal Printer.
Chapter 2, “Epson FX-1050 Data Stream,” on page 39 describes Epson FX printers Data Stream
commands for use when your printer is attached and emulation mode is set to Epson FX.
Chapter 3, “Intelligent Printer Data Stream,” on page 75 explains the concepts and basic principles of the
Intelligent Printer Data Stream™ (IPDS).
Chapter 4, “IPDS Programming Information,” on page 99 contains the technical details of IPDS commands
that the 4247 receives and sends.
Chapter 5, “IPDS Exception Reporting Codes,” on page 199 contains the exception reporting codes the
printer sends to the host in the NACK reply.
Chapter 6, “Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example,” on page 215 contains samples showing the
printing capabilities of the 4247 Printer.
Appendix A, “Code Pages,” on page 231 contains the code pages (both EBCDIC and ASCII) available on
this printer.
Appendix B, “Application Paper Source Selection,” on page 321 describes the differences between the
4247 Printer and other IBM compatible printers.
Appendix C, “4247 Bar Code and OCR Printing Options,” on page 323 describes the bar codes available
for the printer and describes the Optical Character Recognition (OCR) printing options.
Appendix D, “Configuration Menu Lockout,” on page 327 describes the Menu Lock function of the operator
panel.
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 Serial Matrix Printers
xix
xx
Programmer Manual
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
The 4247 Model X03/Z03 printers implement a subset of PPDS. The environment in which the printer data
stream processor operates is described below.
Print Job Processing
There are no PPDS controls that explicitly define print job boundaries. A print job for the 4247 is
established by the host system and consists of any set of related print objects. A print job could be as
short as one character or could be many pages long.
As an aid to the printer operator, the printer provides a PROCESSING indicator on the operator panel.
When the PROCESSING indicator is flashing, it indicates that data is currently being received, processed,
or printing, or that data is buffered in the printer but cannot be immediately printed. If the PROCESSING
indicator is not lit, then all print jobs have been completed.
Configuration parameter values can be changed at any time; however, to obtain predictable results,
changes to operator panel configuration parameter values should be made before the print job is sent to
the printer and after the previous print job has completed printing. Changing configuration parameter
values while a print job is in progress may cause unpredictable results.
We recommend the following to ensure that your print jobs run correctly:
v Establish a known print environment, and end any previous print job. Start each print job with a Set
Initial Conditions control. This control resets the printer environment to the default settings. You can then
set additional controls depending on your print job environment.
v End each print job with a FORM FEED control. This control causes all data to be printed, and the
current position is set to the top-of-form position.
v If a print job is abnormally terminated, the job should be canceled. See “Cancel Print” in “Chapter 2.
Understanding the Operator Panel” in the User's Guide for your printer.
Page Printing Concept
The 4247 processes print jobs in terms of pages, as well as in lines and columns. A page is a logical entity
whose boundaries are defined by the width and the page length. These boundaries are established during
printer initialization using the printer defaults, and can be changed using the Configuration Menu or by
issuing the appropriate data stream controls.
As a job prints, the printer controller maintains both the logical position and the physical position on the
page. If a print job does not end with a proper job terminator (for example, FORM FEED), then:
v All data for the current page may not print
v The next print job may be misaligned on the form
v Residual data from a previous job could print with the new job.
Page Presentation
Many PPDS commands (tabs, margins, line spacing, for example) are described in terms of the
presentation surface. A presentation surface is a two-dimensional surface upon which the printer positions
symbols according to controls embedded in the incoming data stream. The presentation surface is defined
in absolute terms by the width and depth parameters of the page size control commands (Set Page
Length, Set Horizontal Margins, for example). The physical print position does not move outside the range
of these two parameters. The left margin (LM) and right margin (RM) are variable parameters within the
presentation surface. The logical print position does not move outside the range of the vertical margins nor
outside the horizontal margins + 1. The following figure shows the presentation surface and the
1
relationships of some of these parameters.
CPP
CPL
MPP
PMPP
LM
RM
MPL
Current Print Position (LM ≤ CPP ≤ RM).
Current Print Line
Maximum Print Position (in characters at current CPI)
Physical Maximum Print Position. The largest number of characters that can be placed on one line
of the surface (the largest value that MPP can assume).
Left Margin
Right Margin
Maximum Page Length (in lines at current LPI)
Notes:
1. The host should set the limits of the presentation surface if the default or previous values are not
acceptable.
2. The operator should align the physical paper so that it matches the logical presentation surface.
Also created with this surface is a pair of numbers (CPL and CPP) which specify the line number and
column number where the next graphic will be printed. These internal values are the logical position on the
presentation surface.
The variable parameters have default values which are established when the printer is initialized. The
standard power-on defaults are:
MPP (width)
Operator panel setting
MPL (depth)
Operator panel setting
CPI
Operator panel setting
LPI
Operator panel setting
LM
0 inches (Column 1)
2
Programmer Manual
RM
HT
VT
Equal to MPP
Horizontal tabs are set at each 8th column, starting with column 9 (9, 17,
25, 33, and so on.)
Vertical tabs are all cleared
Graphic and Control Character Sequences
PPDS uses an ASCII encoding scheme to define controls and printable graphics. Multiple code pages for
printable graphics are supported. Control characters are interpreted based on the environment established
by any preceding control characters and signals.
The 4247 supports several ASCII code pages. Within a code page, a code point can be treated as a
printable character (including space) or as a control code. The following data stream controls affect how a
code point is interpreted:
ESC 6 Select PC Character Set 2
ESC 7 Select PC Character Set 1
ESC \ Print All Characters
ESC ^ Print Single Character
ESC [ K
Set Initial Conditions
The following code points are interpreted as control characters:
v PC Character Set 1
X'00' to X'1F'
X'7F' (treated as NULL)
X'80'' to X'9F'
v PC Character Set 2
X'00' to X'02'
X'07' to X'1F'
X'7F' (treated as NULL)
Note: No characters are treated as controls when they are part of a Print Single Character or Print All
Characters control.
The following code points are interpreted as printable graphic characters:
v PC Character Set 1
X'20' (space)
X'21' to X'7E'
X'A0'' to X'FE'
X'FF' (required space)
v PC Character Set 2
X'03' to X'06'
X'20' (space)
X'20' to X'7E'
X'80' to X'FE'
X'FF' (required space)
Note: All characters are treated as printable graphic characters when they are part of a Print Single
Character or Print All Characters control.
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
3
PPDS Compatibility
PPDS is supported in 4247, 2381 Personal Printer, and 4202 Proprinter III XL emulation modes. When
4247 is selected, PPDS control codes are supported in the same manner as if emulating the 2381
Personal Printer. The Emulation Mode can be selected from the Configuration Menu using the operator
panel. Emulation mode may also be selected using the Set Initial Conditions (ESC [ K) control sequence, if
the printer is set to 4247 or 2381 Personal Printer emulation mode.
One-Byte Controls
The printer uses the following one-byte controls:
Control
Hex
Name
NUL
00 (80)
Null (no operation)
BEL
07 (87)
Bell
BS
08 (88)
Backspace
HT
09 (89)
Horizontal Tab
LF
0A (8A)
Line Feed
VT
0B (8B)
Vertical Tab
FF
0C (8C)
Form Feed
CR
0D (8D)
Carriage Return
SO
0E (8E)
Shift Out (Double-Wide Print)
SI
0F (8F)
Shift In (Condensed Print)
DC1
11 (91)
Device Control 1 (Select)
DC2
12 (92)
Device Control 2 (Select 10 CPI)
DC3
13 (93)
Device Control 3 (Deselect)
DC4
14 (94)
Device Control 4 (Cancel Double-Wide Print)
CAN
18 (98)
Cancel
ESC
1B (99)
Escape (Multiple-byte control prefix)
SP
20
Space
Note: Control hex values within parentheses (nn) are recognized only within PC Character Set 1.
Null (NUL)
00
This control terminates the Set Horizontal Tab and Set Vertical Tab control codes. The printer ignores NUL
by itself.
Bell (BEL)
07
This control causes the audible alarm to sound, if enabled. The alarm may be disabled or enabled from
the Configuration Menu.
4
Programmer Manual
Backspace (BS)
08
This control moves the print position horizontally one character width to the left. If the current print position
is at the left margin, the printer ignores this command.
Horizontal Tab (HT)
09
This control moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. If there are no tab stops to the right,
or if the next tab stop is beyond the current right margin, the control is ignored.
Line Feed (LF)
0A
This control advances the paper one line. The horizontal position does not change unless automatic
carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel Configuration Menu. If the paper advance
crosses the bottom margin, the printer completes all deferred printing on the current page and then does
an automatic form feed.
If skip perforation mode is active and the bottom margin is crossed, the vertical position on the new page
following the automatic form feed will be the top-of-form position. If skip perforation is not active, the
vertical position on the new page is the point immediately following the previous print line.
Vertical Tab (VT)
0B
This control causes the vertical print position to be advanced to the next vertical tab stop. The horizontal
position is not affected unless automatic carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel
Configuration Menu. If there are no tab stops past the current vertical print position, Vertical Tab is treated
as a Line Feed.
Form Feed (FF)
0C
This control causes a new page to be started. Form Feed is a line end and page end control; it causes all
deferred printing that may have been buffered for the current page to be completed and the form
physically advanced to eject the current page. The vertical print position advances to the top margin and
the horizontal print position is set to the left margin for subsequent printing.
Carriage Return (CR)
0D
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
5
This control moves the current horizontal print position to the left margin. The vertical print position does
not change unless automatic line feed mode is active (see “Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5)” on page 13).
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print
0E
This control causes the printer to start double-width printing. Double-width printing prints the characters
twice as wide as the current character spacing. This results in half as many characters per inch. Each
character takes up the space of two single-width characters. A Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed,
Vertical Tab, Double-Wide Continuous Mode, or Cancel Double-Wide Print with vertical movement
specified cancels the Shift Out control code.
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print
0F
This control prints graphic characters in condensed pitch (15 CPI, 16.7 CPI, 17.1 CPI or 20 CPI).
Shift In is a buffer terminating control; if printable data at a different character-per-inch setting is buffered,
that data is printed before the setting is changed. The current print position becomes the next printable
column at the new character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a print line, and this control
changes the maximum number of characters that can be printed on one line.
When Printer Compatibility 7 – Condensed Print option in the ASCII Configuration menu is set to 15 CPI,
then 15 CPI is selected, otherwise, 16.7 CPI or 17.1 CPI is selected.
A combination of 12 CPI and Condensed Print sets the printer to 20 CPI when Printer Compatibility 9 (20
CPI) option is set to Enabled in the ASCII Configuration menu. A combination of 12 CPI and Condensed
Print sets the printer to 12 CPI when Printer Compatibility 9 (20 CPI) option is set to Disabled in the ASCII
Configuration menu.
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select
11
This control selects the printer.
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Select
12
This control sets 10 characters per inch. DC2 is a buffer terminating control; if printable data at a different
characters-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is printed before the setting is changed. The current print
position becomes the next printable column at the new character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed
within a print line.
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Select
13
6
Programmer Manual
This control is treated as a NUL.
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Select
14
This control cancels double-wide printing if double wide was selected with the Shift Out control. The
characters-per-inch setting returns to the previous value.
Cancel (CAN)
18
This control purges all buffered data. All data received after the most recent buffer terminating control is
discarded. For a list of buffer terminating controls, see “Buffer Terminating Conditions” on page 38. Any
data received after Cancel is processed normally. Cancel does not change the current print position.
Escape (ESC)
1B
This control is a prefix used in combination with supplementary control bytes to provide an extended set of
control functions.
Space
20
This control moves the print position one character space to the right.
Escape Sequence Controls
Escape sequence controls have an ESC followed by one or more control parameters. Supported escape
sequence controls are:
Control
Hex
Name
ESC NUL
1B 00
Null (no operation)
ESC BEL
1B 07
Bell
ESC BS
1B 08
Backspace
ESC HT
1B 09
Horizontal Tab
ESC LF
1B 0A
Line Feed
ESC VT
1B 0B
Vertical Tab
ESC FF
1B 0C
Form Feed
ESC CR
1B 0D
Carriage Return
ESC SO
1B 0E
Shift Out (Double-Wide Print)
ESC SI
1B 0F
Shift In (Condensed Printer)
ESC DC1
1B 11
Device Control 1 (Select)
ESC DC2
1B 12
Device Control 2 (Select 10 CPI)
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
7
Control
Hex
Name
ESC DC3
1B 13
Device Control 3 (Deselect)
ESC DC4
1B 14
Device Control 4 (Cancel Double-Wide Print)
ESC CAN
1B 18
Cancel
ESC EM
1B 19
Turn Auto Sheet Feeder On or Off
ESC -
1B 2D
Auto Underscore
ESC 0
1B 30
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing
ESC 1
1B 31
Set 7/72 Inch Vertical Spacing
ESC 2
1B 32
Invoke Text Line Spacing
ESC 3
1B 33
Set Graphics Line Spacing
ESC 4
1B 34
Set Top of Form
ESC 5
1B 35
Set Auto Line Feed
ESC 6
1B 36
Select PC Character Set 2
ESC 7
1B 37
Select PC Character Set 1
ESC :
1B 3A
Set 12 CPI
ESC <
1B 3C
Unidirectional Printing
ESC =
1B 3D
Character Font Image Download
ESC A
1B 41
Select n/72 Inch Spacing
ESC B
1B 42
Set Vertical Tabs
ESC C
1B 43
Set Page Length (Lines or Inches)
ESC D
1B 44
Set Horizontal Tabs
ESC E
1B 45
Begin Emphasized Print
ESC F
1B 46
End Emphasized Print
ESC G
1B 47
Begin Double-Strike Print
ESC H
1B 48
End Double-Strike Print
ESC I
1B 49
Change Font
ESC J
1B 4A
Relative Move Baseline
ESC K
1B 4B
Normal Density Bit Image Graphics
ESC L
1B 4C
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics, Type 1
ESC N
1B 4E
Begin Skip Perforation
ESC O
1B 4F
End Skip Perforation
ESC P
1B 50
Proportional Space Mode
ESC Q
1B 51
Deselect on Positive Query Reply
ESC R
1B 52
Set Default Tabs
ESC S
1B 53
Begin Subscript/Superscript
ESC T
1B 54
End Subscript/Superscript
ESC U
1B 55
Set Print Direction
ESC W
1B 57
Double-Wide Continuous Mode
ESC X
1B 58
Set Horizontal Margins
ESC Y
1B 59
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2
ESC Z
1B 5A
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics
ESC \
1B 5C
Print All Characters
8
Programmer Manual
Control
Hex
Name
ESC ]
1B 5D
Reverse Line Feed
ESC ^
1B 5E
Print Single Characters
ESC _
1B 5F
Continuous Overscore
ESC d
1B 64
Relative Move Right
ESC e
1B 65
Relative Move Left
ESC [ - (See Note)
1B 5B 2D
Select Line Scoring
ESC [ @
1B 5B 40
Set Presentation Highlights (SPH)
ESC [ I (See Note)
1B 5B 49
Set Font Global (SFG)
ESC [ K
1B 5B 4B
Set Initial Conditions (SIC)
ESC [ T (See Note)
1B 5B 54
Select Code Page (SCP)
ESC [ d (See Note)
1B 5B 64
Set Print Quality (SPQ)
Note: Commands are only available in 4247 or 2381 emulation mode.
Null (ESC NUL)
1B
00
The printer ignores the NUL control by itself.
Bell (ESC BEL)
1B
07
This control causes the audible alarm to sound, if enabled. The alarm may be disabled or enabled from
the Configuration Menu.
Backspace (ESC BS)
1B
08
This control moves the print position horizontally one character width to the left. If the current print position
is at the left margin, the printer ignores this command.
Horizontal Tab (ESC HT)
1B
09
This control moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. If there are no tab stops to the right,
or if the next tab stop is beyond the current right margin, the control is ignored.
Line Feed (ESC LF)
1B
0A
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
9
This control advances the paper one line. The horizontal position does not change unless automatic
carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel Configuration Menu. If the paper advance
crosses the bottom margin, the printer completes all deferred printing on the current page and then does
an automatic form feed.
If skip perforation mode is active and the bottom margin is crossed, the vertical position on the new page
following the automatic form feed will be the top-of-form position. If skip perforation is not active, the
vertical position on the new page is the point immediately following the previous print line.
Vertical Tab (ESC VT)
1B
0B
This control causes the vertical print position to be advanced to the next vertical tab stop. The horizontal
position is not affected unless automatic carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel
Configuration Menu. If there are no tab stops past the current vertical print position, Vertical Tab is treated
as a Line Feed.
Form Feed (ESC FF)
1B
0C
This control causes a new page to be started. Form Feed is a line end and page end control; it causes all
deferred printing that may have been buffered for the current page to be completed and the form
physically advanced to eject the current page. The vertical print position advances to the top margin and
the horizontal print position is set to the left margin for subsequent printing.
Carriage Return (ESC CR)
1B
0D
This control moves the current horizontal print position to the left margin. The vertical print position does
not change unless automatic line feed mode is active (see “Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5)” on page 13).
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Doube-Wide Print
1B
0E
This control causes the printer to start double-width printing. Double-width printing prints the characters
twice as wide as the current character spacing. This results in half as many characters per inch. Each
character takes up the space of two single-width characters. A Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed,
Vertical Tab, Double-Wide Continuous Mode, or Cancel Double-Wide Print with vertical movement
specified cancels the Shift Out control code.
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print
1B
0F
This control prints graphic characters in condensed pitch (15 CPI, 16.7 CPI, 17.1 CPI or 20 CPI).
10
Programmer Manual
Shift In is a buffer terminating control; if printable data at a different character-per-inch setting is buffered,
that data is printed before the setting is changed. The current print position becomes the next printable
column at the new character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a print line, and this control
changes the maximum number of characters that can be printed on one line.
When Printer Compatibility 7 – Condensed Print option in the ASCII Configuration Menu is set to 15 CPI,
then 15 CPI is selected, otherwise, 16.7 CPI or 17.1 CPI is selected.
A combination of 12 CPI and Condensed Print sets the printer to 20 CPI when Printer Compatibility 9 (20
CPI) option is set to Enabled in the ASCII Configuration menu. A combination of 12 CPI and Condensed
Print sets the printer to 12 CPI when Printer Compatibility 9 (20 CPI) option is set to Disabled in the ASCII
Configuration menu.
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1 / Select)
1B
11
This control selects the printer.
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Select 10 CPI
1B
12
This control sets 10 characters per inch. DC2 is a buffer terminating control; if printable data at a different
characters-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is printed before the setting is changed. The current print
position becomes the next printable column at the new character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed
within a print line.
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect
1B
13
This control is treated as a NUL.
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print
1B
14
This control cancels double-wide printing if double wide was selected with the Shift Out control. The
characters-per-inch setting returns to the previous value.
Cancel (ESC CAN)
1B
18
This control purges all data in the preceding print buffer. Any data received after Cancel is processed
normally. Cancel does not change the current print position.
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
11
Auto Underscore (ESC -)
1B
2D
NN
This control turns on and off the continuous underscore function.
If NN is 1, the printer underscores all text characters and spaces following this sequence. The printer does
not underscore white space caused by horizontal tabs.
If NN is 0, the printers stops the underscore of all data following this sequence.
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0)
1B
30
This control sets the line spacing to eight lines per inch.
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on the current page
relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing within a print job without changing the page
length can cause printing on the page perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC
C)” on page 15.
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1)
1B
31
This control sets the line spacing to 7/72 inch. The application program is responsible for keeping track of
the vertical position on the current page relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing
within a print job without changing the page length can cause printing on the page perforation. For
additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC C)” on page 15.
Invoke Text Line Spacing (ESC 2)
1B
32
This control sets the line spacing at the value set by the last Set Text Line Spacing (ESC A) control
received. The printer sets the line spacing to six lines per inch if no ESC A has been issued.
Set Graphics Line Spacing (ESC 3)
1B
33
NN
This control changes the line spacing to the value specified by NN.
NN is a value that specifies the line spacing in units of 1/216 inch. Valid values are 0 to 255. If N equals 0,
the printer ignores this control.
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on the current page
relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing within a print job without changing the page
length can cause printing on the page perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC
C)” on page 15.
12
Programmer Manual
Set Top of Form (ESC 4)
1B
34
This control establishes the current vertical position as the top of form.
Set Auto Line Feed (ESC 5)
1B
35
NN
This control sets the automatic line feed mode of the printer. When automatic line feed is on, the printer
does a line feed each time it receives a carriage return. When automatic line feed if off, a carriage return
is processed normally. This control overrides the automatic line feed mode set in the operator panel
Configuration Menu.
If NN is 1, the printer turns automatic line feed mode on.
If NN is 0, the printer turns automatic line feed mode off.
Select PC Character Set 2 (ESC 6)
1B
36
This control selects PC Character Set 2 as the active character set. In PC Character Set 2, code points
X'03' to X'06', X'15', and X'80' to X'9F' are treated as graphic characters (not controls). See “Graphic and
Control Character Sequences” on page 3.
Select PC Character Set 1 (ESC 7)
1B
37
This control selects PC Character Set 1. In PC Character Set 1, code pointsX'03' to X'06', X'15', and X'80'
to X'9F' are treated as controls (not printable graphics). See “Graphic and Control Character Sequences”
on page 3.
Set 12 CPI (ESC :)
1B
3A
This control sets the pitch to 12 characters per inch. If the current font is proportionally spaced, this control
selects a horizontal resolution of 240 dots per inch. If the active font is OCR, the printer does not prohibit
the change in pitch; however, the printed OCR characters may be unreadable by automatic identification
equipment.
Unidirectional Printing (ESC <)
1B
3C
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
13
This command selects unidirectional printing for one line only. The print head moves to the home position
at the left side of the printer and prints one line, left to right. The command is then cancelled by the
carriage return that sends the print head back to the home position.
Character Font Image Download (ESC =)
1B
3D
LL
HH
FF
LF
W
H
CP
N
XX...XX
This control downloads special character images.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control.
LL is the least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte of the count. The number of
bytes that follow should equal HH × 256 + LL. If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
FF is the format byte and must equal X'13'. LF is a one-byte font identifier that specifies the previously
initialized or selected font to be modified. See “Change Font (ESC I)” on page 16.
W is a one-byte value that specifies the width of the character cells in options. For DP fonts, the value is
X'0A'. For fixed pitch DP Text and NLQ fonts, the value is X'14'. For DP Text and NLQ, proportional fonts
values may vary. However, for all code points downloaded with this control, all character cells defined will
be Width options wide.
H is a one-byte value that specifies the height of the character cells in dots. Valid values are X'09' for DP
and DP Text and X'12' for NLQ.
CP is a one-byte value. This parameter specifies the first code point to download. A single code point or
multiple code points can be downloaded. If the font being downloaded was previously initialized, the
downloaded characters overlay the resident characters in the font.
N is a one-byte value that specifies the number of code points defined by this control. If the starting code
point plus the number of code points is greater than 256, the control is ignored.
XX .. XX is the font image download data. These data bytes define the character cells. Multiple bytes
define each vertical slice of the character cell. The slice data for each code point is in a contiguous format
(run-together) as follows:
v If the slice data is nine-bits high, byte 1 is put into the high-order bits in slice 1 and the high-order bit of
byte 2 is the low order bit of slice 1. The remaining seven bits of byte 2 are put into the high-order
seven bits of slice 2, and so on.
v If the slice data is 18-bits high, bytes 1 and 2 are put into the high-order bits of the first slice and the
two high-order bits of byte 3 complete the first slice. Slice 2 is composed similarly, starting with the
remaining six bits in byte 3.
Note: The contiguous format (run-together) does not occur from one code point to the next. The top dot of
the leftmost slice of each code point is always in the high-order bit of the first byte of image data for
that code point.
The number of data bytes required to define the image for each code point can be calculated as follows:
Image Length = (Width × Height) ÷ 8
Note: If there is a remainder from the division by 8, add 1 to the quotient.
Example: To define an image for a standard DP font where Width = 10 and Height = 9:
Image Length = (10 × 9) ÷ 8
14
Programmer Manual
Image Length = 11 with a remainder of 2
Image Length = 12 bytes per character
If both printer provided images and downloaded images are to be printed from the same local font ID, we
recommend that the downloaded images be sent, using this control, at the start of a print job when the
print environment for the job is established. This ensures that the actual printed output appears as
intended.
It is also recommended that image data bits for the last vertical column of NLQ character patterns be all
zeros. The last vertical column will be clipped if NLQ character patterns are expanded for graphics
printing. Resident NLQ text character patterns do not contain image data (dots) in the last column of the
character box.
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A)
1B
41
NN
This control stores the line spacing value, in units of 1/72 inch, which is later selected by Invoke Text Line
Spacing (ESC 2). The valid values for NN are X'01' to X'FF' (1 to 255). The default line spacing is X'0C'
(six lines per inch).
A value of 0 is not valid and causes the printer to ignore this command. Following are example values for
NN:
X'00'
No Change
X'18'
3 LPI
X'12'
4 LPI
X'0C'
6 LPI
X'09'
8 LPI
X'08'
9 LPI
X'06'
12 LPI
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B)
1B
42
TT...TT
00
This control sets the vertical tab stops. The maximum number of tab stops supported is 64. The Null
control code terminates this sequence. If the Null terminator is missing, the printer treats the next 64 bytes
as tab stops and ignores all the data bytes following these 64 bytes until a Null is received. If the printer
receives this sequence without any tabs specified, all tab stops are cleared.
TT...TT are the tab values that specify the tab stops as line numbers, relative to the top of the physical
page. Tab stops must be specified in ascending order; entries not in ascending order are ignored.
Set Page Length (ESC C)
1B
43
LL
IN
This control sets the physical page length in lines or inches and resets skip perforation mode.
LL is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the page length in lines. The value is converted to
inches based upon the current line spacing. Valid values for LL are X'01' to X'FF', but the resulting page
length in inches must be less than 113.8 inches (2890 mm). If LL equals 0, then parameter II (length is
inches) is used.
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
15
IN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the page length in inches. IN is present only if
parameter LL equals 0. Valid values for IN are X'01' to X'71'. If IN is greater than the maximum value, the
maximum value is used. If both LL and IN are zero, the control is ignored.
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D)
1B
44
TT...TT
00
This control sets the horizontal tab stops. The maximum number of tab stops supported is 28. The
sequence terminates with the NUL control code. If the null terminator is missing, the printer treats the next
28 bytes as tab stops and ignores all the data bytes following the 28 bytes until a Null is received. If the
printer receives this control code with no tabs, all horizontal tab stops are cleared.
TT is the list of tab stops as character positions relative to the left edge of the physical page. Valid values
are X'01' to X'FF'. Tab stops must be specified in ascending order. Entries not in ascending order are
ignored.
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E)
1B
45
This control starts emphasized print mode (bold style). Emphasized printing continues until the printer
receives an End Emphasized Print (ESC F) control or the printer is initialized.
End Emphasized Print (ESC F)
1B
46
This control ends emphasized print mode (bold style).
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G)
1B
47
This control starts double-strike printing (all text characters are double struck). Double-strike printing
continues until the printer receives an End Double-Strike Print control (ESC H) or the printer is initialized.
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H)
1B
48
This control ends double-strike printing.
Change Font (ESC I)
1B
49
NN
This control selects the font to be used for printing.
16
Programmer Manual
NN is the one-byte local font identifier number that specifies the font. The mapping of the local font
identifier is dependent upon the printer's emulation mode setting. In the Configuration Menu, if the
emulation mode is set to 4202 III XL, the Change Font control code selects fonts compatible with the 4202
Proprinter III XL Printer. If the emulation mode is set to 4247 or 2381, Change Font selects the fonts
compatible with the 2381 Personal Printer.
Supported local font identifiers are shown in the following table.
Local Font
Identifier
(Hex)
4247 and 2381 Emulation Mode
4202 III XL Emulation Mode
00
Default (op. panel selection)
DP
01
DP
Fast Draft (for model Z03); DP (for model X03)
(See Note 1)
02
DP Text
DP Text
03
NLQ (Courier/Gothic)
NLQ (Courier/Gothic)
04
DP Text Proportional
DP (Download)
05
NLQ Proportional (Courier/Gothic)
DP (Download)
06
Fast Draft (for model Z03); DP (for model X03)
DP text (Download)
07
Reserved
NLQ (Download)
08-0F
Reserved
Reserved
10
OCR-A
Reserved
11
OCR-B
Reserved
12-5F
Reserved
Reserved
60
Reserved
Default (op. panel selection)
61
Reserved
Fast Draft (for model Z03); DP-Gothic (for model
X03) (See Note 1)
62
Reserved
NLQ Proportional (Courier/Gothic)
63
Reserved
OCR-A
64
Reserved
OCR-B
65
Reserved
Fast Draft (for model Z03); DP (for model X03)
(See Note 1)
66-FF
Reserved
Reserved
Notes:
1. If printer configuration Host Fast Draft setting is Enabled, then Fast Draft quality is selected. If Host
Fast Draft is disabled then DP quality is selected (only for model Z03).
2. If a downloaded font has not been previously downloaded with a Character Font Image Download
control (CFID), a Change Font control to select a downloaded font is ignored.
3. The NLQ font style is selected as defined in the Configuration Menu as either Courier or Gothic.
Relative Move Baseline (ESC J)
1B
4A
NN
This control performs a vertical move relative to the current print position.
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
17
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that specifies the move amount in units of 1/216 inch. The printer will
adjust the value to the nearest 1/144 inch. If Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed is set in the operator
panel Configuration Menu, a carriage return is also performed when a Relative Move Baseline code is
received (see “Carriage Return (CR)” on page 5).
Normal Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC K)
1B
4B
LL
HH
NN...NN
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 60 horizontal pel by 72 vertical pel. Bit image data can be
mixed with text data on the same line.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256
+ LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
NN...NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit vertical slices, with the
least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed;
B'0' indicates an un-printed pel. Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1 (ESC L)
1B
4C
LL
HH
NN...NN
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 120 horizontal by 72 vertical pel. Bit image data can be
mixed with text data on the same line.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256
+ LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit vertical slices, with the
least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed;
B'0' indicates an un-printed pel. Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N)
1B
4E
NN
This control sets the number of lines to be skipped at the bottom of each page. Once this function is
activated, it stays active until the End Skip Perforation (ESC O) or Set Page Length (ESC C) control is
received or the printer is initialized.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that specifies the number of lines to skip at the bottom of each page.
This value must be zero or greater and less than the length of the page in lines (from 0 to 255). Once
Begin Skip Perforation is activated, the number of lines that may be printed on a page is the page length
minus NN.
End Skip Perforation (ESC O)
1B
18
4F
Programmer Manual
This control ends skip perforation.
Proportional Space Mode (ESC P)
1B
50
NN
This control starts or stops proportional space mode.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that sets proportional space mode on or off.
v If NN is 1, proportional space mode is on.
v If NN is 0, proportional space mode is off.
Note: Code pages OCR-A (code page 876), OCR-B (code page 877), Arabic (code page 864), Cyrillic
(code page 855), Thai (code page 874), Extended Arabic (code page 1046), and Farsi Bilingual
(code page 1098) are not supported in proportional space mode.
Deselect on Positive Query Reply (ESC Q)
1B
51
NN
This control deselects the printer if the response to the query is positive.
NN is the query printer identifier. If the value matches the printer's ID, the query response is positive and
the printer deactivates the Select line. If the query is not positive, the control is ignored.
The printer must be reselected using a DC1 control after a positive response to ESC Q if the printer is to
be used.
Query Identifiers: If the emulation mode is set to 4202 III XL, the printer ID is X'16'. If the emulation
mode is set to 4247 or 2381, the printer ID is X'B8'.
Set Default Tabs (ESC R)
1B
52
This control resets both the horizontal and vertical tab stops. The horizontal tab stops are set to every
eighth position starting with the ninth column (9, 17, 25,...). The vertical tab stops are cleared.
Begin Subscript/Superscript (ESC S)
1B
53
NN
This control activates subscript and superscript printing. Once this printing is active, it stays active until
another Begin Subscript/Superscript control changes the mode, an End Subscript/Superscript control is
received, or the printer is initialized.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that activates subscript or superscript printing.
v If NN is 1, subscript mode is active.
v If NN is 0, superscript mode is active.
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
19
End Subscript/Superscript (ESC T)
1B
54
This controls stops subscript and superscript printing.
Set Print Direction (ESC U)
1B
55
NN
This control specifies bidirectional or unidirectional printing.
v If NN is 1, unidirectional printing is selected.
v If NN is 0, bidirectional printing (default) is selected.
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W)
1B
57
NN
This control turns double-wide printing on or off. When double-wide printing is on, the width of subsequent
graphic characters is doubled (the characters per inch value is half of the single character value). For tabs,
the font width is not doubled (tab distance is based upon single character width).
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns double-wide printing on or off.
v If NN is 1, double-wide printing is turned on.
v If NN is 0, double-wide printing is turned off.
Note: Double-Wide Continuous Mode does the same function as Shift Out, except double wide printing is
not canceled when a new line begins.
Set Horizontal Margins (ESC X)
1B
58
LL
RR
This control sets the left and right margins. The margins are specified in character positions relative to the
left edge of the physical page.
LL is a one-byte hexadecimal value from X'00' to X'FF', which specifies the starting print position relative to
the left edge of the physical page. If LL equals 0, the left margin is unchanged.
RR is a one-byte hexadecimal number from X'00' to X'FF' that specifies the rightmost print position relative
to the first print position. If RR equals 0, the right margin is unchanged.
Notes:
1. Set Horizontal Margins should be followed by a carriage return (CR) control to set the print position to
the new left margin.
2. LL should be at least one character width less than the page width.
3. If RR is greater than the page width or is less than LL, RR is set to the page width (MPP).
20
Programmer Manual
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y)
1B
59
LL
HH
NN...NN
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 120 horizontal pel by 72 vertical pel. Bit image data can
be mixed with text data on the same line. Horizontally adjacent dots are not allowed and will be removed if
specified.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256
+ LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
NN...NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit vertical slices, with the
least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed;
B'0' indicates an un-printed pel. Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z)
1B
5A
LL
HH
NN...NN
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 240 horizontal per by 72 vertical pel. Bit image data can
be mixed with text data on the same line.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256
+ LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
NN...NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit vertical slices, with the
least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed;
B'0' indicates an un-printed pel. Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.
Print All Characters (ESC \)
1B
5C
LL
HH
This control forces a specified number of characters to be interpreted as graphic characters, including
those that occur in the space normally reserved for controls.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes to be interpreted as printable graphics. LL is the
least significant byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should
equal HH × 256 + LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
Reverse Line Feed (ESC ])
1B
5D
This command causes the contents of the buffer to be printed and advances the paper one line in the
reverse direction from the paper path.
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
21
Note: If Printer Compatibility 4 - Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed is set to Enabled in the
Configuration Menu, the next print position is print position 1 at the left margin. If Printer
Compatibility 4 - Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed is set to Disabled, the next print position
is the current print position.
Print Single Character (ESC ^)
1B
5E
This control specifies that the next character to follow is to be interpreted as a graphic character, including
those characters that occur in the space normally reserved for controls.
Continuous Overscore (ESC _)
1B
5F
NN
This control turns on and off the continuous overscore function. All graphic characters and spaces that are
bounded by start and stop versions of this control are overscored. White space caused by horizontal tabs
is not overscored.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns overscore on or off.
v If NN is 1, continuous overscore is on.
v If NN is 0, continuous overscore is off.
Relative Move Right (ESC d)
1B
64
N1
N2
This command moves the print position to the right (from the current position) in increments of 1/120 of an
inch.
Bytes N1 and N2 indicate the move distance based on the following:
(N1 + [N2 x 256])/120
Relative Move Left (ESC e)
1B
65
N1
N2
This command moves the print position to the left (from the current position) in increments of 1/120 of an
inch.
Bytes N1 and N2 indicate the move distance based on the following:
(N1 + [N2 x 256])/120
Select Line Scoring (ESC [ -)
1B
5B
2D
02
00
N1
N2
This command selects underscore, strikethrough, and overscore. This command is supported in 4247 or
2381 emulation mode only.
22
Programmer Manual
The values for N1 are:
X'01' Underscore
X'02' Strikethrough
X'03' Overscore
X'00' Cancel
X'01' Single Line
X'02' Double Line
Set Presentation Highlight (SPH) (ESC [ @)
1B
5B
40
LL
HH
M1
M2
M3
M4
SPH activates or deactivates double wide, double high, and italic printing. This command is supported in
4247, 4202 III XL, and 2381 emulation with some exceptions as noted.
Once these highlights are active, they remain active until terminated, either by another SPH command or
an initialization. If double wide printing is activated by an SPH, a DC4 control can also cancel it.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is X'00' to X'04'. HH
is always X'00'. If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
M1 .. M4 turn double wide, double high, or italics on or off.
M1 is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns italics on or off as follows:
X'00' No change
X'01' Italics on (2381 and 4247 only)
X'02' Italics off (2381 and 4247 only)
M2 is always X'00'.
M3 is a one-byte hexadecimal that controls line feeds and character height (vertical spacing) as follows:
X'00' No change to line feed, no change to character height
X'01' Line feeds unchanged, standard character height
X'02' Line feeds unchanged, double character height
X'10' Single line feeds, character height unchanged (4202 only)
X'11'
Single line feeds, standard character height
X'12' Single line feeds, double character height
X'20' Double line feeds, character height unchanged (4202 only)
X'21' Double line feeds, standard character height
X'22' Double line feeds, double character height
M4 is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns double wide on or off as follows:
X'00' No Change
X'01' Turn double wide off
X'02' Turn double wide on
X'10' Single line feeds (2381 and 4247 only)
X'20' Double line feeds (2381 and 4247 only)
Set Font Global (SFG) (ESC [ I)
1B
5B
49
02
00
HF
LF
This control selects font and pitch based on the values of HF and LF. (Supported in 4247 or 2381
emulation mode only.)
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
23
HF
LF
Font and Pitch
00
0B
Courier 10
01
EB
Courier 12
01
EC
Courier 15
01
ED
Courier 17
01
EE
Courier 20
00
AB
Courier Proportional
HF
LF
Font and Pitch
00
24
Gothic 10
01
8F
Gothic 12
01
8E
Gothic 15
01
8D
Gothic 17
01
8C
Gothic 20
00
AE
Gothic Proportional
Set Initial Conditions (SIC) (ESC [ K)
1B
5B
4B
LL
HH
INIT
ID
P1
P2
This control initializes the printer.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (HH is always X'00' for this command.) The number of
bytes is counted from the INIT byte.
The INIT byte is processed the same way in 4247, 4202 III XL, or 2381 emulation mode, but causes
different results in the P1 and P2 parameters, depending on the ID byte. The values for the INIT byte are:
INIT
Mode Byte
X'00'
X'01'
X'04'
X'05'
X'FE'
X'FF'
ID
P1
24
Initializes printer to user-defined settings; downloaded fonts are not
initialized.
Initializes printer to user-defined settings; downloaded fonts are
initialized.
Initializes printer to factory settings; downloaded fonts are not
initialized. See Note.
Initializes printer to factory settings; downloaded fonts are initialized.
See Note.
Initializes printer to user-defined settings; downloaded fonts are
initialized. Settings are saved in non-volatile memory (NVM).
Initializes printer to factory settings; downloaded fonts are initialized.
See Note. Settings are saved in non-volatile memory (NVM).
Printer ID Byte:
X'B6'
For 4247 or 2381 emulation
X'03' or X'16'
For 4202 III XL emulation
Parameter Byte for 4247 or 2381 Emulation
X'00'
No Emulation Change
X'01'
Switch to 2381 emulation
X'02'
Switch to Epson FX printer emulation
X'03' to X'FF'
No Emulation Change
Programmer Manual
P1
Parameter Byte for 4201 III XL Emulation
Bit
On
Off
7 Discard Byte
Ignore
Process
5 Alarm
Disable
Enable
4 Auto CR
CR on Vertical Movement
No CR on Vertical Movement
3 Auto LF
Auto LF after CR
No Auto LF after CR
2 Form Length
12 inch forms
11 inch forms
6 Reserved
1 Zero
Slashed Zero
Normal Zero
0 Character Set
PC Char Set 2
PC Char Set 1
P2 Parameter Byte for 4202 III XL Emulation
Bit
On
Off
7 Discard Byte
Ignore
Process
6 Print Language
CP 850 Multilingual
CP 437 ASCII
5 Direction
Unidirectional
Bidirectional
4 20 Condense
12+Condense = 12 CPI
12+Condense = 20 CPI
3 Select NLQ
NLQ Gothic
NLQ Courier
2 Form Feed
Ignore FF if at TOF
Honor all FF
1 Line Length
8 inch line
13.6 inch line
0 Sheet Feeder
Enable
Disable
Notes: The following parameters are changed to the manufacturing default by the INIT control byte in the
ASCII Configuration Menu only:
v Characters Per Inch (CPI)
v Lines Per Inch (LPI)
v Maximum Print Position (MPP)
v Maximum Page Length (MPL)
v Print Language
v Print Quality
v NLQ Typeface
v Character Set
v Printer Compatibility 3 - Automatic Line Feed on Carriage Return
v Printer Compatibility 4 - Automatic Carriage Return on Line Feed
v Printer Compatibility 5 - Form Feed Suppression
v Printer Compatibility 8 - Slashed Zero
v Printer Compatibility 9 - 20 CPI
v Alarm Control
The following parameters are NOT modified by the INIT control byte:
v Values in Any Custom Set
v Active Custom Set
v Default Attachment Selection
v Rear Tractor Use
v ASCII Configuration:
– Emulation Mode
– Printer Compatibility 6 – Init
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
25
v
v
v
v
v
– Printer Compatibility 7 – Condensed Print
– Interface Type
– Input Buffer Size
– Select-In Signal
– AutoFeed XT
All Printer Adjustments Values
All Printer Setup Values
Display Language
All Vital Product Data
Active Form Path
Select Code Page (SCP) (ESC [ T)
1B
5B
54
04
00
00
00
HC
LC
This control selects a code page for printing where HC and LC specify the code page in hexadecimal.
(Supported in 4247 or 2381 emulation mode only.)
The following table shows the values for HC and LC:
HC
LC
Character Set
01
B5
CP437 USA (Personal Computer) A-54
02
E1
CP737 Greek (MS DOS)
03
2D
CP813 Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)
03
33
CP819 Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)
03
52
CP850 PC Multilingual
03
53
CP851 Old Greek
03
54
CP852 Latin 2/ROECE
03
55
CP853 Latin 3 (PC)
03
57
CP855 Cyrillic (PC)
03
59
CP857 Latin 5-Turkey + euro
03
5A
CP858 PC Multilingual + euro
03
5C
CP860 Portuguese
03
5D
CP861 Icelandic
03
5E
CP862 Hebrew
03
5F
CP863 Canadian French
03
60
CP864 Arabic
03
61
CP865 Danish/Norwegian
03
62
CP866 PC Data, Cyrillic, Russian
03
65
CP869 Greek New + euro
03
6A
CP874 Thai
03
6C
CP876 OCR-A
03
6D
CP877 OCR-B
03
90
CP912 Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)
03
91
CP913 Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)
03
92
CP914 Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)
26
Programmer Manual
HC
LC
Character Set
03
93
CP915 Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)
03
94
CP916 Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)
03
98
CP920 Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)
03
99
CP921 Baltic Multilingual
03
9A
CP922 Estonian
03
9B
CP923 Latin 9 (ISO 8859-15)
03
EE
CP1006 Urdu
04
16
CP1046 Arabic Extended
04
41
CP1089 Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)
04
4A
CP1098 Farsi (Personal Computer)
04
5C
CP1116 Estonian (Personal Computer)
04
5D
CP1117 Latvian (Personal Computer)
04
5E
CP1118 Lithuanian (Personal Computer)
04
E2
CP1250 Central Europe Latin 2
04
E3
CP1251 Cyrillic Windows® + euro
Note: The following languages are all supported within code page 850 (PC Multilingual):
Austrian/German
Austrian/German (alternate)
Belgian
Brazilian
Finnish/Swedish
Finnish/Swedish (alternate)
French/French Azerty
Italian
Japanese English
Spanish/Spanish speaking
Spain (alternate)
United Kingdom
U.S.A./Canada
Yugoslav
Set Print Quality (SPQ) (ESC [ d)
1B
5B
54
04
00
00
00
HC
LC
This control allows the host application to specify the desired print quality when the printer is in 4247 or
2381 emulation mode. The setting remains in effect until changed by another Set Print Quality control or
until the printer is initialized. Bit image graphics (ESC K, L, Y, and Z) are not affected. Highlighting modes,
such as italics, emphasized, and double wide remain active if they were active when the SPQ control was
activated.
QQ specifies the quality of subsequent printing. Valid values are X'00' to X'FE' as follows:
Hex
Function
X'00'
No change (Default)
X'01 - 3F'
Low quality level (highest speed) See Note
X'40 - 7F'
Medium quality level (medium speed)
X'80 - FE'
High quality level (lowest speed)
X'FF'
Printer Initialization (Default)
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
27
Hex
Function
Note: If printer configuration Host Fast Draft setting is Enabled then Fast Draft quality is selected. If Host Fast Draft
is disabled then DP quality is selected. (Model Z03 only)
4247 Commands
Control
Hex
Name
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 1 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 01
Select EAN-8 Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 2 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 02
Select EAN-13 Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 3 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 03
Select UPC-A Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 4 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 04
Select MSI Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 5 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 05
Select UPC-E Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 6 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 06
Select UPC 2-Digit Bar Code
(Magazine)
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 7 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 07
Select UPC 5-Digit Bar Code
(Magazine)
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 17 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 11
Select 2 of 5 INTERLEAVED Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 18 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 12
Select 2 of 5 INDUSTRIAL Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 19 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 13
Select 2 of 5 MATRIX Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 20 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 14
Select CODE 3 of 9 Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 22 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 16
Select CODABAR Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 23 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 17
Select CODE 128 Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 24 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 18
Select POSTNET Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS {N1} {DATA1} {N2} {DATA2}
EM
14 14 1B 28 1D
Print Bar Code Selection
DD..DD 1D DD..DD 19
DC4 DC4 ESC @
14 14 1B 40
Reinitialize Printer
DC4 DC4 ESC 1 NN
14 14 1B 31
Set Vertical Spacing n/144 Inch
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1
14 14 1B 33 31
Set Vertical Spacing to 12 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3
14 14 1B 33 33
Set Vertical Spacing to 3 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4
14 14 1B 33 34
Set Vertical Spacing to 4 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6
14 14 1B 33 36
Set Vertical Spacing to 6 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8
14 14 1B 33 38
Set Vertical Spacing to 8 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 5
14 14 1B 35
Eject Single Sheet or Form Feed
DC4 DC4 ESC A
14 14 1B 41
Set 15, 17.1, or 20 CPI
DC4 DC4 ESC N
14 14 1B 4E
Load or Park Fanfold from a Rear Path
DC4 DC4 ESC T
14 14 1B 54
Load or Park Fanfold from a Front Path
DC4 DC4 ESC Y
14 14 1B 59
Select Emulation
DC4 DC4 ESC Z
14 14 1B 5A
Select AFTA in Column
DC4 DC4 ESC g
14 14 1B 67
Select Resident Font
DC4 DC4 ESC h
14 14 1B 68
Request to Read Configuration
DC4 DC4 ESC h
14 14 1B 68 .....
Printer Configuration Response
DC4 DC4 ESC i
14 14 1B 69 .....
Write Configuration Response
DC4 DC4 ESC i
14 14 1B 69
Write Configuration Acknowledgement
28
Programmer Manual
Control
Hex
Name
DC4 DC4 ESC p
14 14 1B 70
Select Print Quality
Select EAN-8 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 1 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
01
PP
19
This control selects the EAN-8 bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be eight bytes long, check digit
included.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select EAN-13 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 2 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
02
PP
19
The control selects the EAN-13 bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be thirteen bytes long, check digit
included.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select UPC-A Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 3 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
03
PP
19
The control selects the UPC-A bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be twelve bytes long, including a
system digit at the leftmost position and a check digit at the rightmost position of the data field.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
29
00
01
Do not print human readable characters
Print human readable characters
Select MSI Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 4 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
04
PP
19
The control selects the MSI bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but the DATA field must contain only
ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select UPC-E Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 5 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
05
PP
19
The control selects the UPC-E bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be eight bytes long, including a
system digit at the leftmost position and a check digit at the rightmost position of the data field. The
system digit must be a 0 or 1.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select UPC 2-Digit Bar Code (Magazine) (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 6 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
06
PP
19
This control selects the UPC 2-Digit bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be three bytes long, check digit
included.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
30
Programmer Manual
01
Print human readable characters
Select UPC 5-Digit Bar Code (Magazine) (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 7 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
07
PP
19
This control selects the UPC 5-Digit bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be six bytes long, check digit
included.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select 2 of 5 INTERLEAVED Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 17 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
11
PP
19
The control selects the 2 of 5 Interleaved bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but the number of data bytes must be
even. The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select 2 of 5 INDUSTRIAL Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 18 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
12
PP
19
The control selects the 2 of 5 Industrial bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but the DATA field must contain only
ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
31
Select 2 of 5 MATRIX Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 19 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
13
PP
19
The control selects the 2 of 5 Matrix bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but the DATA field must contain only
ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select CODE 3 of 9 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 20 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
14
PP
19
This control selects the Code 3 of 9 bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but must start and end with an *.
The DATA field may contain alphanumeric data as follows:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Space - . $ / + %
* (as start/stop character)
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select CODABAR Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 22 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
16
PP
19
This control selects the Codabar bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, and must contain only the data
characters listed below. Any combination of start/stop characters is allowed.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - $ : / . +
A B C D E N T * a b c d e n t (as start/stop characters)
32
Programmer Manual
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select CODE 128 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 23 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
17
PP
19
This control selects the Code 128 bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, and must contain only the data
characters belonging to the selected ASCII character set, including control characters.
Since GS and EM are control codes, the host application must set the high-order bit of the control code to
allow the printer to distinguish between encodable data and terminator strings.
Human Readable Characters will be centered below the bar code and can be wider than the encoded
area. The user is responsible for allowing space for Human Readable Characters to print without
overlapping adjacent data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select POSTNET Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 24 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
18
PP
19
This control selects the POSTNET [ZIP, ZIP+4, or Delivery Point Bar Code (DPBC)] bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data. A data string of all zeroes
will be encoded if other than numeric data is detected in the job stream.
POSTNET bar code does not print Human Readable Characters, regardless of the PP byte. POSTNET
uses the tall and short bars required by the United States Postal Service standard, and encodes numeric
data streams regardless of length.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
33
Print Bar Code Selection (DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS {N1} {DATA1} GS {N2}
{DATA2} EM)
14
14
1B
28
1D
DD...DD
1D
DD...DD
19
This sequence causes the bar code symbol to be printed according to the Bar Code Selection command.
Sequential bar codes of the same type and height may be printed. GS N# defines the distance from the
beginning of the line or between two bar code symbols in multiples of 1/72 of an inch. This command must
be closed with an EM character.
Note: Bar code symbols will print over any descenders in the previous character box if any text is present.
Example 1:
Print an EAN-8 bar code symbol, one inch from the right margin with the data set of 12345678.
ASCII: DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS 72 12345678 EM
HEX: 14 14 1B 28 1D 48 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19
Example 2:
Print two Code 3 of 9 bar code symbols. The first symbol on the right margin; the second symbol one inch
to the right of the first symbol. Data sets are ABC+0123 and 12345678
ASCII: DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS 0 *ABC+123* GS 72 *1234* EM
HEX: 14 14 1B 28 1D 00 2A 41 42 43 2B 31 32 33 2A
1D 48 2A 31 32 33 34 2A 19
Reinitialize Printer (DC4 DC4 ESC @)
14
14
1B
40
This command reinitializes the printer. It resets the printer mode and clears the buffer of printable data.
Set Vertical Spacing n/144 Inch (DC4 DC4 ESC 1 NN)
14
14
1B
31
NN
This control sets a line spacing value for subsequent line feeds.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the line spacing value of NN/144 inches. The value of
NN is 1 to 255.
Set Vertical Spacing 12 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1)
14
14
1B
33
31
This command sets line spacing to 12 lines per 30 mm.
Set Vertical Spacing 3 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3)
14
34
14
1B
Programmer Manual
33
33
This command sets line spacing to 3 lines per 30 mm.
Set Vertical Spacing 4 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4)
14
14
1B
33
34
This command sets line spacing to 4 lines per 30 mm.
Set Vertical Spacing 6 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6)
14
14
1B
33
36
This command sets line spacing to 6 lines per 30 mm.
Set Vertical Spacing 8 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8)
14
14
1B
33
38
This command sets line spacing to 8 lines per 30 mm.
Eject Single Sheet or Form Feed (DC4 DC4 ESC 5)
14
14
1B
35
This command causes a form feed on fanfold forms.
Set 15, 17.1, 20 CPI (DC4 DC4 ESC A)
14
14
1B
41
NN
This command sets horizontal spacing (characters per inch) to 15, 17.1 or 20.
The values for NN are:
4
15 CPI
5
17.1 CPI
6
20 CPI
Load or Park Fanfold from a Rear Path (DC4 DC4 ESC N)
14
14
1B
4E
NN
This command loads or performs the Park function for fanfold paper fed from the rear path.
The values for NN are:
0
The printer selects the rear path. If fanfold paper is already loaded in a paper path that is not
requested, the printer automatically performs the Park function before loading the rear path. The
printer will then load the fanfold paper once data is received. For more information on the Park
function, see “PARK/PATH” in “Chapter 2. Understanding the Operator Panel” in the User's Guide
for your printer.
1
The printer performs the Park function for forms in the rear path.
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
35
Load or Park Fanfold from a Front Path (DC4 DC4 ESC T)
14
14
1B
54
NN
This command loads or performs the Park function for fanfold paper fed from the front path.
The values for NN are:
0
The printer selects the front path. If fanfold paper is already loaded in a paper path that is not
requested, the printer automatically performs the Park function before loading the front path. The
printer will then load the fanfold paper once data is received. For more information on the Park
function, see “PARK/PATH” in “Chapter 2. Understanding the Operator Panel” in the User's Guide
for your printer.
1
The printer performs the Park function for forms in the front path.
Select Emulation (DC4 DC4 ESC Y)
14
14
1B
59
NN
This command selects the printer emulation mode.
The values for NN are:
1
Epson FX 1050
2
4202 Proprinter III XL
5
4247 or 2381 Personal Printer
Select AFTA in Column (DC4 DC4 ESC Z)
14
14
1B
5A
NN
This command selects the column at 10 CPI where the Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) will
be made.
The value for NN is the column number.
Select Resident Font (DC4 DC4 ESC g)
14
14
1B
67
NN
This command selects the resident font based on the following values of NN:
0
Courier
1
Gothic
128
OCR-B
129
OCR-A
Request to Read Configuration (DC4 DC4 ESC h)
14
14
1B
68
This command requests the printer to send its configuration saved in non-volatile memory (NVM).
The printer must be configured for 1284 Parallel mode.
36
Programmer Manual
Printer Configuration Response (DC4 DC4 ESC h)
14
14
1B
68
LL
HH
TT
SS
D1...DN
CS
This is the response Request to Read Configuration command.
The printer must be configured for 1284 Parallel mode. LL and HH indicate the number of bytes that follow
this control. LL is the least significant byte of the count and HH is the most significant byte. (The number
of bytes that follow equal HH x 256 + LL.)
The other values are:
TT
Model Type
SS
Model Sub-type
D1...DN
Configuration Data
CS
Checksum of the data bytes
Write Configuration Response (DC4 DC4 ESC i)
14
14
1B
69
LL
HH
TT
SS
D1...DN
CS
This command writes configuration data to non-volatile memory (NVM).
The printer must be configured for 1284 Parallel mode. LL and HH indicate the number of bytes that follow
this control. LL is the least significant byte of the count and HH is the most significant byte. (The number
of bytes that follow equal HH x 256 + LL.)
The other values are:
TT
Model Type
SS
Model Sub-type
D1...DN
Configuration Data
CS
Checksum of the data bytes
Write Configuration Acknowledgement (DC4 DC4 ESC i)
14
14
1B
69
NN
This command acknowledges that the configuration was written to the printer. This is the response to the
Write Configuration command.
The printer must be configured for 1284 Parallel mode.
NN is a single byte defined as follows:
X'00' Configuration Saved (Successful)
X'01' Configuration Not Saved (Error)
Select Print Quality (DC4 DC4 ESC p)
14
14
1B
70
NN
The values of NN are:
Chapter 1. Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
37
0
1
2
3
Fast Draft (Model Z03 only)
DP
DP Text
NLQ
Buffer Terminating Conditions
The following controls cause buffered data to be released for printing:
v Carriage Return
v Line Feed
v Reverse Line Feed
v Form Feed
v Horizontal Tab (if there is print head movement)
v Vertical Tab
v Backspace
v Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing
v Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing
v Set Graphics Line Spacing
v Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing
v Invoke Text Line Spacing (if the line spacing is changed)
v Relative Move Right
v Relative Move Left
v Relative Move Baseline
v Shift In/Condensed Print
v Shift Out/Double-Wide Print
v Device Control 4/Cancel Double-Wide Print
v Begin Subscript/Superscript
v End Subscript/Superscript
v Begin Double-Strike Print
v End Double-Strike Print
v Begin Emphasized Print
v End Emphasized Print
v Set Presentation Highlight
v Continuous Overscore
v Auto Underscore
v Device Control 2/Select 10 CPI
v Set 12 CPI
v Proportional Space Mode
v Change Font
v Normal Density Bit Image Graphics
v Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1
v Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2
v High Density Bit Image Graphics
v Set Initial Conditions
v Select Score Line (2381 and 4247 only)
v Unidirectional Printing
v Set Horizontal Margins
The following conditions also cause buffered data to be released for printing:
v Parallel -INIT
v Automatic Line Wrap
An automatic line wrap consists of a carriage return and line feed inserted after the maximum number of
characters has been printed on a line. The next character is then printed at the left margin on the
following line. Automatic line wrap occurs for text data but not for bit image graphics.
38
Programmer Manual
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
When the 4247 is in Epson emulation mode, the printer can print files coded for the Epson FX-1050 printer
using the Epson ESC/P printer control language. Use the Configuration menu to select Epson FX
emulation mode as the active printer configuration.
The following chapter describes the Epson FX-1050 emulation host control codes that are supported for
the printer.
Print Job Processing
There are no Epson FX-1050 controls that explicitly define print job boundaries. A print job for the 4247 is
established by the host system and consists of any set of related print objects. A print job could be as
short as one character or could be many pages long.
As an aid to the printer operator, the printer provides a Processing indicator on the operator panel. When
the Processing indicator is flashing, it indicates that data is currently being received, processed, or printing,
or that data is buffered in the printer but cannot be immediately printed. If the Processing indicator is not
lit, then all print jobs have been completed.
Configuration parameter values can be changed at any time; however, to obtain predictable results,
changes to operator panel configuration parameter values should be made before the print job is sent to
the printer and after the previous print job has completed printing. Changing configuration parameter
values while a print job is in progress may cause unpredictable results.
We recommend the following to ensure that your print jobs run correctly:
v Establish a known print environment, and end any previous print job. Start each print job with an
Initialize Printer/control. This control resets the printer environment to the default settings. You can then
set additional controls depending on your print job environment.
v End each print job with a Form Feed control. This control causes all data to be printed, and the current
position is set to the top-of-form position.
v If a print job is abnormally terminated, the job should be canceled. See “Cancel Print” in “Chapter 2.
Understanding the Operator Panel” in the User's Guide for your printer.
Page Printing Concept
The 4247 processes print jobs in terms of pages, as well as in lines and columns. A page is a logical entity
whose boundaries are defined by the width and the page length. These boundaries are established during
printer initialization using the printer defaults, and can be changed using the Configuration menu or by
issuing the appropriate data stream controls.
As a job prints, the printer controller maintains both the logical position and the physical position on the
page. If a print job does not end with a proper job terminator (for example, Form Feed), then:
v All data for the current page may not print
v The next print job may be misaligned on the form
v Residual data from a previous job could print with the new job.
Page Presentation
Many Epson ESC/P commands (tabs, margins, line spacing, for example) are described in terms of the
presentation surface. A presentation surface is a two-dimensional surface upon which the printer positions
symbols according to controls embedded in the incoming data stream. The presentation surface is defined
in absolute terms by the width and depth parameters of the page size control commands (Set Page
39
Length, Set Horizontal Margins, for example). The physical print position does not move outside the range
of these two parameters. The left margin (LM) and right margin (RM) are variable parameters within the
presentation surface. The logical print position does not move outside the range of the vertical margins nor
outside the horizontal margins + 1. The following figure shows the presentation surface and the
relationships of some of these parameters.
CPP
CPL
MPP
PMPP
LM
RM
MPL
Current Print Position (LM ≤ CPP ≤ RM).
Current Print Line
Maximum Print Position (in characters at current CPI)
Physical Maximum Print Position. The largest number of characters that can be placed on one line
of the surface (the largest value that MPP can assume).
Left Margin
Right Margin
Maximum Page Length (in lines at current LPI)
Notes:
1. The host should set the limits of the presentation surface if the default or previous values are not
acceptable.
2. The operator should align the physical paper so that it matches the logical presentation surface.
Also created with this surface is a pair of numbers (CPL and CPP) which specify the line number and
column number where the next graphic will be printed. These internal values are the logical position on the
presentation surface.
The variable parameters have default values which are established when the printer is initialized. The
standard power-on defaults are:
MPP (width)
Operator panel setting
40
Programmer Manual
MPP (depth)
CPI
LPI
LM
RM
HT
Operator panel setting
Operator panel setting
Operator panel setting
0 inches (Column 1)
Equal to MPP
Horizontal tabs are set at each 8th column, starting with column 9 (9, 17,
25, 33, and so on.)
Vertical tabs are all cleared
VT
One-Byte Controls
Note: Control hex values within parentheses are recognized only within PC Character Set 1.
The printer uses the following one-byte controls:
Control
Hex
Name
NUL
00 (80)
Null (no operation)
BEL
07 (87)
Bell
BS
08 (88)
Backspace
HT
09 (89)
Horizontal Tab
LF
0A (8A)
Line Feed
VT
0B (8B)
Vertical Tab
FF
0C (8C)
Form Feed
CR
0D (8D)
Carriage Return
SO
0E (8E)
Shift Out (Double-Wide Print)
SI
0F (8F)
Shift In (Condensed Print)
DC1
11 (91)
Device Control 1 (Parallel Select)
DC2
12 (92)
Device Control 2 (Cancel Condensed Print)
DC3
13 (93)
Device Control 3 (Parallel Deselect)
DC4
14 (94)
Device Control 4 (Cancel Double-Wide Print)
CAN
18 (98)
Cancel
SP
20
Space
DEL
7F
Delete Character
Null (NUL)
00
This control terminates the Set Horizontal Tab and Set Vertical Tab control codes. The printer ignores NUL
by itself.
Bell (BEL)
07
This control causes the audible alarm to sound.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
41
Backspace (BS)
08
This control moves the print position horizontally one character width to the left. If the current print position
is at the left margin, the printer ignores this command.
Horizontal Tab (HT)
09
This control moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. If there are no tab stops to the right,
or if the next tab stop is beyond the current right margin, the control is ignored.
Line Feed (LF)
0A
This control advances the paper one line. The horizontal position does not change unless automatic
carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel Configuration menu. If the paper advance
crosses the bottom margin, the printer completes all deferred printing on the current page and then does
an automatic form feed.
If skip perforation mode is active and the bottom margin is crossed, the vertical position on the new page
following the automatic form feed will be the top-of-form position. If skip perforation is not active, the
vertical position on the new page is the point immediately following the previous print line.
Vertical Tab (VT)
0B
This control causes the vertical presentation position to be advanced to the next vertical tab stop. The
horizontal position is not affected unless automatic carriage return mode is activated from the operator
panel Configuration menu. If there are no tab stops past the current vertical presentation position, Vertical
Tab is treated as a Line Feed.
Form Feed (FF)
0C
This control causes a new page to be started. Form Feed is a line end and page end control; it causes all
deferred printing that may have been buffered for the current page to be completed and the form
physically advanced to eject the current page. The vertical presentation position advances to the top
margin and the horizontal presentation position is set to the left margin for subsequent printing.
Carriage Return (CR)
0D
42
Programmer Manual
This control moves the current horizontal print position to the left margin. If Carriage Return equals
Carriage Return + Line Feed, a Line Feed is executed when Carriage Return is received. Otherwise, the
vertical position does not change. Carriage Return is a line ending control code that causes buffered data
to print.
Shift Out (SO) / Double-Wide Print
0E
This control causes the printer to start double-width printing. Double-width printing prints the characters
twice as wide as the current character spacing. This results in half as many characters per inch. Each
character takes up the space of two single-width characters. A Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed,
Vertical Tab, Double-Wide Continuous Mode, Cancel Double-Wide Print, or Set Presentation Position with
vertical movement specified cancels the Shift Out control code.
Shift In (SI) / Condensed Print
0F
This control prints graphic characters in condensed pitch (15, 17.1, or 20 CPI). If the current print option is
10 CPI this control will condense printing to 17.1 CPI. If the current print option is 12 CPI this control will
condense printing to 20 CPI. If the current print option is 15 CPI there is no change in density. This control
changes the maximum number of characters that can be printed on one line. Shift In is a buffer
terminating control; if printable data at a different character-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is printed
before the setting is changed. The current presentation position becomes the next printable column at the
new character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a print line.
Device Control 1 (DC1) / Select
11
This control selects the printer.
Device Control 2 (DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print
12
This control cancels or ends condensed (17.1 or 20 CPI) printing. DC2 is a buffer terminating control; if
printable data at a different characters-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is printed before the setting is
changed. The current presentation position becomes the next printable column at the new
character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a print line.
Device Control 3 (DC3) / Deselect
13
This control is treated as a NUL.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
43
Device Control 4 (DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print
14
This control cancels double-wide printing if double wide was selected with the Shift Out control. The
characters-per-inch setting returns to the previous value.
Cancel (CAN)
18
This control purges all buffered data. All data received after the most recent buffer terminating control is
discarded. For a list of buffer terminating controls, see “Buffer Terminating Conditions” on page 72. Any
data received after Cancel is processed normally. Cancel does not change the current presentation
position.
Space (SP)
20
This control moves the print position one character space to the right.
Delete Character (DEL)
7F
This control removes the last text character on the print line and does not affect control codes.
Escape Sequence Controls
Escape sequence controls have an ESC followed by one or more control parameters. Supported escape
sequence controls are:
Control
Hex
Name
ESC
1B
Escape
ESC NUL
1B 00
Null (no operation)
ESC BEL
1B 07
Bell
ESC BS
1B 08
Backspace
ESC HT
1B 09
Horizontal Tab
ESC LF
1B 0A
Line Feed
ESC VT
1B 0B
Vertical Tab
ESC FF
1B 0C
Form Feed
ESC CR
1B 0D
Carriage Return
ESC SO
1B 0E
Shift Out (Double-Wide Print)
ESC SI
1B 0F
Shift In (Condensed Print)
ESC DC1
1B 11
Device Control 1 (Select)
ESC DC2
1B 12
Device Control 2 (Cancel Condensed Print)
44
Programmer Manual
Control
Hex
Name
ESC DC3
1B 13
Device Control 3 (Deselect)
ESC DC4
1B 14
Device Control 4 (Cancel Double-Wide Print)
ESC CAN
1B 18
Cancel
ESC EM
1B 19
Turn Auto Sheet Feed On or Off
ESC SP
1B 20
Set Intercharacter Spacing
ESC !
1B 21
Master Select
ESC #
1B 23
Cancel MSB Control
ESC $
1B 24
Set Absolute Print Position
ESC %
1B 25
Select User-defined Set
ESC &
1B 26
Define User-defined Characters
ESC *
1B 2A
Select Graphics Mode
ESC -
1B 2D
Auto Underscore
ESC /
1B 2F
Select Vertical Tab Channel
ESC 0
1B 30
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (8 LPI)
ESC 1
1B 31
Set 7/72 Inch Vertical Spacing
ESC 2
1B 32
Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing (6 LPI)
ESC 3
1B 33
Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing
ESC 4
1B 34
Select Italic Mode
ESC 5
1B 35
Cancel Italic Mode
ESC 6
1B 36
Printable Code Area Expansion
ESC 7
1B 37
Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion
ESC : NUL
1B 3A 00
Copy ROM into RAM
ESC <
1B 3C
Set Unidirectional Mode (1 line only)
ESC =
1B 3D
Set MSB to 0
ESC >
1B 3E
Set MST to 1
ESC ?
1B 3F
Reassign Graphics Mode
ESC @
1B 40
Initialize Printer
ESC A
1B 41
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing
ESC B
1B 42
Set Vertical Tabs
ESC C
1B 43
Set Page Length (Lines or Inches)
ESC D
1B 44
Set Horizontal Tabs
ESC E
1B 45
Begin Emphasized Print
ESC F
1B 46
End Emphasized Print
ESC G
1B 47
Begin Double-Strike Print
ESC H
1B 48
End Double-Strike Print
ESC I
1B 49
Printable Code Area Expansion
ESC J
1B 4A
Perform n/216 Inch Line Feed
ESC K
1B 4B
Select Single Density Graphics Mode
ESC L
1B 4C
Select Double Density Graphics Mode
ESC M
1B 4D
Select 12 CPI
ESC N
1B 4E
Begin Skip Perforation
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
45
Control
Hex
Name
ESC O
1B 4F
End Skip Perforation
ESC P
1B 50
Select 10 CPI
ESC Q
1B 51
Set Right Margin
ESC R
1B 52
Select Character Set
ESC S
1B 53
Begin Subscript/Superscript
ESC T
1B 54
End Subscript/Superscript
ESC U
1B 55
Set Print Direction
ESC W
1B 57
Double-Wide Continuous Mode
ESC Y
1B 59
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2
ESC Z
1B 5A
High Density Bit Image Graphics
ESC \
1B 5C
Set Relative Position
ESC a
1B 61
Set Letter Quality Justification
ESC b
1B 62
Set Vertical Tabs in Channel
ESC d
1B 64
Relative Move Right n/120
ESC e
1B 65
Relative Move Left n/120
ESC g
1B 67
Set 15 CPI
ESC j
1B 6A
Feed Paper n/216 Reverse
ESC k
1B 6B
Select NLQ Font
ESC l
1B 6C
Set Left Margin
ESC p
1B 70
Turn Proportional Mode On/Off
ESC s
1B 73
Quiet Printing
ESC t
1B 74
Select Character Table
ESC w
1B 77
Double High Printing
ESC x
1B 78
Select NLQ or DP Print Quality
Escape (ESC)
1B
This control is a prefix used in combination with supplementary control bytes to provide an extended set of
control functions.
Null (ESC NUL)
1B
00
The printer ignores the NUL control by itself.
Bell (ESC BEL)
1B
46
07
Programmer Manual
This control causes the audible alarm to sound, if enabled. The alarm may be disabled or enabled from
the Configuration menu.
Backspace (ESC BS)
1B
08
This control moves the print position horizontally one character width to the left. If the current print position
is at the left margin, the printer ignores this command.
Horizontal Tab (ESC HT)
1B
09
This control moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. If there are no tab stops to the right,
or if the next tab stop is beyond the current right margin, the control is ignored.
Line Feed (ESC LF)
1B
0A
This control advances the paper one line. The horizontal position does not change unless automatic
carriage return mode is activated from the operator panel Configuration menu. If the paper advance
crosses the bottom margin, the printer completes all deferred printing on the current page and then does
an automatic form feed.
If skip perforation mode is active and the bottom margin is crossed, the vertical position on the new page
following the automatic form feed will be the top-of-form position. If skip perforation is not active, the
vertical position on the new page is the point immediately following the previous print line.
Vertical Tab (ESC VT)
1B
0B
This control causes the vertical presentation position to be advanced to the next vertical tab stop. The
horizontal position is not affected unless automatic carriage return mode is activated from the operator
panel Configuration menu. If there are no tab stops past the current vertical presentation position, Vertical
Tab is treated as a Line Feed.
Form Feed (ESC FF)
1B
0C
This control causes a new page to be started. Form Feed is a line end and page end control; it causes all
deferred printing that may have been buffered for the current page to be completed and the form
physically advanced to eject the current page. The vertical presentation position advances to the top
margin and the horizontal presentation position is set to the left margin for subsequent printing.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
47
Carriage Return (ESC CR)
1B
0D
This control moves the current horizontal print position to the left margin. The vertical print position does
not change unless automatic line feed mode is active.
Shift Out (ESC SO) / Double-Wide Print
1B
0E
This control causes the printer to start double-width printing. Double-width printing prints the characters
twice as wide as the current character spacing. This results in half as many characters per inch. Each
character takes up the space of two single-width characters. A Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed,
Vertical Tab, Double-Wide Continuous Mode, Cancel Double-Wide Print, or Set Presentation Position with
vertical movement specified cancels the Shift Out control code.
Shift In (ESC SI) / Condensed Print
1B
0F
This control prints graphic characters in condensed pitch (15, 17.1, or 20 CPI). If the current print option is
10 CPI this control will condense printing to 17.1 CPI. If the current print option is 12 CPI this control will
condense printing to 20 CPI. If the current print option is 15 CPI there is no change in density. This control
changes the maximum number of characters that can be printed on one line. Shift In is a buffer
terminating control; if printable data at a different character-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is printed
before the setting is changed. The current presentation position becomes the next printable column at the
new character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a print line.
Device Control 1 (ESC DC1) / Select
1B
11
This control selects the printer.
Device Control 2 (ESC DC2) / Cancel Condensed Print
1B
12
This control cancels or ends condensed (17.1 or 20 CPI) printing. DC2 is a buffer terminating control; if
printable data at a different characters-per-inch setting is buffered, that data is printed before the setting is
changed. The current presentation position becomes the next printable column at the new
character-per-inch setting. CPI can be changed within a print line.
Device Control 3 (ESC DC3) / Deselect
1B
13
This control is treated as a NUL.
48
Programmer Manual
Device Control 4 (ESC DC4) / Cancel Double-Wide Print
1B
14
This control cancels double-wide printing if double wide was selected with the Shift Out control. The
characters-per-inch setting returns to the previous value.
Cancel (ESC CAN)
1B
18
This control purges all buffered data. All data received after the most recent buffer terminating control is
discarded. For a list of buffer terminating controls, see “Buffer Terminating Conditions” on page 72. Any
data received after Cancel is processed normally. Cancel does not change the current presentation
position.
Set Intercharacter Spacing (ESC SP)
1B
20
NN
This control sets the amount of space to be added to the right of each character. The number of units of
space is equal to NN, from 0 to 127. Each unit of space is 1/120th of an inch.
Master Select (ESC !)
1B
21
NN
This control selects any valid combination of the modes in the table below. To determine the value of the
NN, add together the values of the modes you select from the table.
Mode
Decimal
Hex
10 CPI
0
00
12 CPI
1
01
Proportional
2
02
Condensed
4
04
Emphasized
8
08
Double-Strike
16
10
Double-Wide
32
20
Italic
64
40
Underline
128
80
This control applies to DP and NLQ. Proportional cannot be condensed and 10 CPI cannot be combined
with 12 CPI. Proportional overrides condensed if both proportional and condensed are selected.
Double-strike is ignored in NLQ.
Cancel MSB Control (ESC #)
1B
23
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
49
Cancels the most significant bit (MSB) control.
Set Absolute Print Position (ESC $)
1B
24
N1
N2
This control specifies the distance that subsequent characters are to be printed from the set left margin in
1/60 inch units. Where the total number of dots equals N1 + (N2 × 256). If the position is beyond the right
margin, the control is ignored and the previous setting remains active. If the position is within the right
margin, subsequent characters will be printed at (N1 + [N2 × 256])/60 inches.
Select User-Defined Set (ESC %)
1B
25
NN
00
This control specifies the character set as default or user-defined. The following are the values of NN:
0
Selects the default character set.
1
Selects the user-defined character set.
Define User-Defined Characters (ESC &)
1B
26
NN
MM
W0
W1
W2
D0...DN
This control allows the definition of special characters that are not present in the character sets.
NN and MM are two decimal numbers that define the first and last characters to be replaced in the
character set in use. If you want to replace only one character, MM must be equal to NN. Any value in the
range of 0 to 127 is accepted, even code 32, which is the space character.
W0, W1, and W2 are numbers that specify the width of the character and the space around it. The space
on the left of the character (in columns of dots) is specified by W0; the space on the right of the character
is specified by W2. W1 specifies the number of columns of dots that must be printed to design the
character.
The following table lists the maximum value for W0, W1, and W2:
Printing
W0 + W1
W0 + W1 + W2
DP
9
12
NLQ at 10 CPI
35
36
NLQ at 12 CPI
29
30
Proportional
41
42
D0...DN is the data of the character that is printed. Three bytes are needed for each column because it is
composed of 24 dot positions. In this way, the number of data bytes is W1 x 3. You can define a character
in superscript or subscript. Two bytes are needed for each column because it is composed of 16 dot
positions. The number of data bytes is W1 x 2.
50
Programmer Manual
Select Graphics Mode (ESC *)
1B
2A
MM
N1
N2
This control selects the graphics mode MM from the table below. The total number of columns equals N1
+ (N2 ×256).
Option
Alternate
Code
MM
Horizontal
Density
(dots/in.)
Single-Density
ESC K
0
60
Double-Density
ESC L
1
120
High-Speed Double-Density *
ESC Y
2
120
Quadruple-Density *
ESC Z
3
240
CRT I
NONE
4
80
Plotter (1:1)
NONE
5
72
CRT II
NONE
6
90
Double-Density Plotter
NONE
7
144
Note: (*) Adjacent dots cannot be printed in this mode
Auto Underscore (ESC –)
1B
2D
NN
This control turns on and off the continuous underscore function.
If NN is an odd value (1, 3, 5 ...), the printer underscores all text characters and spaces following this
sequence. The printer does not underscore white space caused by horizontal tabs.
If NN is an even value (0,2,4,...), the printers stops the underscore of all data following this sequence.
Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /)
1B
2F
CH
This control selects the vertical tab channel. The values for CH are 0 to 7. The channel selected by this
control is used for all subsequent vertical tab commands. Channel 0 is used if no channel has been
selected.
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 0)
1B
30
This control sets the line spacing to eight lines per inch.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
51
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on the current page
relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing within a print job without changing the page
length can cause printing on the page perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC
C)” on page 55.
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 1)
1B
31
This control sets the line spacing to 7/72 inch.
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on the current page
relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing within a print job without changing the page
length can cause printing on the page perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC
C)” on page 55.
Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 2)
1B
32
This control sets the line spacing at the value set by the last Set Text Line Spacing (ESC A) control
received. The printer sets the line spacing to six lines per inch if no ESC A has been issued.
Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing (ESC 3)
1B
33
NN
This control changes the line spacing to the value specified by NN.
NN is a value that specifies the line spacing in units of 1/216 inch. Valid values are 0 to 255. If NN equals
0, the printer ignores this control.
The application program is responsible for keeping track of the vertical position on the current page
relative to the current line spacing. Changing the line spacing within a print job without changing the page
length can cause printing on the page perforation. For additional information, see “Set Page Length (ESC
C)” on page 55.
Select Italic Mode (ESC 4)
1B
34
This control turns on italic character printing. This control is valid even if the Epson Extended Graphics
character set has been selected by the Character Table (ESC t) or the operator panel, but character
graphics cannot be italicized. This control is used in both DP and NLQ.
Cancel Italic Mode (ESC 5)
1B
35
NN
This control cancels italic character printing.
52
Programmer Manual
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 6)
1B
36
This control enables codes X'80' through X'9F' from the active character set to become printable
characters instead of control characters.
Cancel Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 7)
1B
37
This control cancels Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC 6).
Copy ROM into Ram (ESC : NUL)
1B
3A
00
This control copies the characters in ROM into RAM. Specific characters may be redefined.
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line only) (ESC <)
1B
3C
This control selects unidirectional printing from left to right for one line only. ESC < is cancelled by a
Carriage Return. The print head begins the line at the Home position, prints to the end of the line, then is
cancelled by the CR that returns the head to Home.
Set MSB to 0 (ESC =)
1B
3D
This control sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 0. The MSB is bit 7. This control
only affects text and control code data. This control can prevent the problem of some system applications
that always send data with the MSB set to 1, which results in italic or graphics printing in Epson printers.
Set MSB to 1 (ESC >)
1B
3E
This control sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 1. The MSB is 7. This control only
affects text and control code data.
Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?)
1B
3F
S
NN
This control reassigns a graphics command (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z) to a different mode (K, L,
Y, or Z).
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
53
Option
Alternate Code
NN
Horizontal
Density
(dots/in.)
Single-Density
ESC K
0
60
Double-Density
ESC L
1
120
High-Speed Double-Density *
ESC Y
2
120
Quadruple-Density *
ESC Z
3
240
CRT I
NONE
4
80
Plotter (1:1)
NONE
5
72
CRT II
NONE
6
90
Double-Density Plotter
NONE
7
144
Note: (*) Adjacent dots cannot be printed in this mode.
Initialize Printer (ESC @)
1B
40
This control resets all print related parameters to values previously saved and clears the buffer of printable
data.
Select n/72 Inch Line Spacing (ESC A)
1B
41
NN
This control sets a line spacing value for subsequent line feeds.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the line spacing value of NN/72 inches.
The value of NN is 0 to 85. Following are example values for NN:
X'18' 3 LPI
X'12' 4 LPI
X'0C' 6 LPI
X'09' 8 LPI
X'08' 9 LPI
X'06' 12 LPI
Set Vertical Tabs (ESC B)
1B
42
N1
N2...00
This control sets the vertical stops. The maximum number of tab stops supported is 16. The settings are
not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. The tab settings must be in ascending order (N1, N2,
etc.) with the 0 character indicating the end of the command. Values of N are 1 to 255. All settings are
stored in Channel 0. See “Select Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b)” on page 60. To clear the tab settings,
use ESC B 0.
54
Programmer Manual
Set Page Length (ESC C)
1B
43
LL
IN
This control sets the physical page length in lines or inches and resets skip perforation mode.
LL is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the page length in lines. The value is converted to
inches based upon the current line spacing. Valid values for LL are X'01' to X'FF', but the resulting page
length in inches must be less than 113.8 inches (2890 mm). If LL equals 0, then parameter II (length is
inches) is used.
IN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the page length in inches. IN is present only if
parameter LL equals 0. Valid values for IN are X'01' to X'71'. If IN is greater than the maximum value, the
maximum value is used. If both LL and IN are zero, the control is ignored.
Set Horizontal Tabs (ESC D)
1B
44
TT...TT
00
This control sets the horizontal tab stops. The maximum number of tab stops supported is 32. The
sequence terminates with the NUL control code. If the null terminator is missing, the printer treats the next
32 bytes as tab stops and ignores all the data bytes following the 32 bytes until a Null is received. If the
printer receives this control code with no tabs, all horizontal tab stops are cleared.
TT is the list of tab stops as character positions relative to the left edge of the physical page. Valid values
are X'01' to X'FF'. Tab stops must be specified in ascending order. Entries not in ascending order are
ignored.
Begin Emphasized Print (ESC E)
1B
45
This control starts emphasized print mode (bold style). Emphasized printing continues until the printer
receives an End Emphasized Print (ESC F) control or the printer is initialized.
End Emphasized Print (ESC F)
1B
46
This control ends emphasized print mode (bold style).
Begin Double-Strike Print (ESC G)
1B
47
This control starts double-strike printing (all text characters are double struck). Double-strike printing
continues until the printer receives an End Double-Strike Print control (ESC H) or the printer is initialized.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
55
End Double-Strike Print (ESC H)
1B
48
This control ends double-strike printing.
Printable Code Area Expansion (ESC I)
1B
49
This control defines whether codes X'00' through X'1F' and codes X'80' through X'9F' are printable
characters or control characters of the active character set.
When NN equals X'01', the codes become printable characters, which allows them to be used as
user-defined characters.
When NN equals X'00', the codes are returned to nonprintable characters.
Perform n/216 Inch Line Feed (ESC J)
1B
4A
NN
This control performs a vertical move relative to the current presentation position.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that specifies the move amount in units of 1/216 inch. The printer will
adjust the value to the nearest 1/144 inch. This control performs an immediate line feed, but does not
affect subsequent line spacing and does not produce a CR.
Select Single Density Graphics Mode (ESC K)
1B
4B
LL
HH
NN...NN
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 60 horizontal pel by 72 vertical pel. Bit image data can be
mixed with text data on the same line.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256
+ LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
NN...NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit vertical slices, with the
least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed;
B'0' indicates an unprinted pel. Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.
Select Double Density Graphics Mode (ESC L)
1B
4C
LL
HH
NN...NN
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 120 horizontal by 72 vertical pel. Bit image data can be
mixed with text data on the same line.
56
Programmer Manual
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256
+ LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
NN .. NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit vertical slices, with the
least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed;
B'0' indicates an unprinted pel. Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.
Select 12 CPI (ESC M)
1B
4D
This control selects 12 characters per inch printing.
Begin Skip Perforation (ESC N)
1B
4E
NN
This control sets the number of lines to be skipped at the bottom of each page. Once this function is
activated, it stays active until the End Skip Perforation (ESC O) or Set Page Length (ESC C) control is
received or the printer is initialized.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that specifies the number of lines to skip at the bottom of each page.
This value must be greater than zero and less than the length of the page in lines (from 0 to 127). If the
value is not valid, the control is ignored. Once Begin Skip Perforation is activated, the number of lines that
may be printed on a page is the page length minus NN.
End Skip Perforation (ESC O)
1B
4F
This control ends skip perforation.
Select 10 CPI (ESC P)
1B
50
This control selects 10 CPI printing and is normally used to cancel 12 CPI.
Select Right Margin (ESC Q)
1B
51
NN
This control sets the right margin to N columns at the current character width. Where NN is the number of
columns from the first print position to the end of the print line.
Select Character Set (ESC R)
1B
52
NN
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
57
This control specifies an international character set as shown in the table below and is available in both
DP and NLQ. The following values for NN are:
Hex Codes
N
Character Set
23
24
40
5B
5C
5D
5E
60
7B
7C
7D
7E
0
USA
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
'
{
¦
}
-
1
France
#
$
à
°
ç
§
^
'
é
ù
è
..
2
Germany
#
$
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
^
'
ä
ö
ü
ß
3
United
Kingdom
£
$
@
[
\
]
^
'
{
¦
}
-
4
Denmark I
#
$
@
Æ
Ø
Å
^
'
æ
ø
å
-
5
Sweden
#
¤
É
Ä
Ö
Å
Ü
é
ä
ö
å
ü
6
Italy
#
$
@
°
\
é
^
ù
à
ò
è
ì
7
Spain I
$
@
¡
Ñ
¿
^
'
..
ñ
}
-
8
Japan
#
$
@
[
¥
]
^
'
{
¦
}
-
9
Norway
#
¤
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
A
Denmark II
#
$
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
å
ü
B
Spain II
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
'
í
ñ
ó
ú
C
Latin America
I
#
$
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
ü
í
ñ
ó
ú
D
French
Canadian
#
$
à
â
ç
ê
î
ô
é
ù
è
û
E
Latin America
II
#
$
@
[
Ñ
]
ú
í
ó
á
é
ü
Begin Subscript/Superscript (ESC S)
1B
53
NN
This control activates subscript and superscript printing. Once this printing is active, it stays active until
another Begin Subscript/Superscript control changes the mode, an End Subscript/Superscript control is
received, or the printer is initialized.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that activates subscript or superscript printing.
v If NN is an odd value (1, 3, 5, ...), subscript mode is active.
v If NN is an even value (0, 2, 4, ...), superscript mode is active.
End Subscript/Superscript (ESC T)
1B
54
This controls stops subscript and superscript printing.
Set Print Direction (ESC U)
1B
58
55
NN
Programmer Manual
This control specifies bidirectional or unidirectional printing.
v If NN is an odd value (1, 3, 5, ...) unidirectional printing is selected.
v If NN is an even value (0, 2, 4, ...), bidirectional printing (default) is selected.
Double-Wide Continuous Mode (ESC W)
1B
57
NN
This control turns double-wide printing on or off. When double-wide printing is on, the width of subsequent
graphic characters is doubled (the characters per inch value is half of the single character value). For tabs,
the font width is not doubled (tab distance is based upon single character width).
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal value that turns double-wide printing on or off.
v If NN is an odd value (1, 3, 5, ...), double-wide printing is turned on.
v If NN is an even value (0, 2, 4, ...), double-wide printing is turned off.
Note: Double-Wide Continuous Mode does the same function as Shift Out, except double wide printing is
not canceled when a new line begins.
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2 (ESC Y)
1B
59
LL
HH
NN...NN
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 120 horizontal pel by 72 vertical pel. Bit image data can
be mixed with text data on the same line. Horizontally adjacent dots are not allowed and will be removed if
specified.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256
+ LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
NN...NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit vertical slices, with the
least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed;
B'0' indicates an unprinted pel. Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.
High Density Bit Image Graphics (ESC Z)
1B
5A
LL
HH
NN...NN
This control prints the supplied bit image data at 240 horizontal per by 72 vertical pel. Bit image data can
be mixed with text data on the same line.
A two-byte count (LL HH) indicates the number of bytes that follow in this control. LL is the least significant
byte of the count; HH is the most significant byte. (The number of bytes that follow should equal HH × 256
+ LL.) If the count equals X'0000', the control is ignored.
NN...NN are the bytes containing the bit image data. The data format is in 8-bit vertical slices, with the
least significant bit the bottom dot and the most significant bit the top dot. B'1' indicates a pel to be printed;
B'0' indicates an unprinted pel. Data that exceeds the right margin is discarded.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
59
Set Relative Position (ESC \)
1B
5C
N1
N2
This control moves the print head to a horizontal print position relative to the current print position using
1/120 inch increments. To calculate the correct values for N1 and N2, determine the displacement required
in 1/120 of an inch. Send the resulting number using the formula total number of dots equals N1 + (N2 ×
256). If the desired formula is to the left, subtract the number from 65536 before using the formula. The
print head will move (N1 + [N2 × 256])/120 inches relative to the current print position. The control is
ignored if it would move the print head beyond the page margins.
Set Letter Quality Justification (ESC a)
1B
61
NN
This control selects print justification according to the following values of NN:
0
Selects left justification
1
Selects center justification
2
Selects right justification
3
Selects full justification
Notes:
1. Left justification is the default setting (NN = 0).
2. The commands HT and BS are valid only when left justification is active.
3. For full justification, there must be no carriage returns within a paragraph.
Select Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b)
1B
62
CH
N1
N2...00
This control sets vertical tabs to channels selected by the Set Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /) control. The
value of CH is 0 through 7 and the value of N1 is 0 through 255.
The distance of each tab stop from top of form is the current line spacing times the number of lines given
in N1.
If paper movement is commanded to a value of N1 greater than the page length, the paper movement
command is ignored. The values of N1 must be in ascending order. If they are not, the sequence up to
and including the out of sequence number is ignored. Skip over perforation is ignored. You can clear any
channel by sending ESC b CH 0, where CH is the channel number.
Relative Move Right n/120 (ESC d)
1B
64
N1
N2
This control spaces forward in 1/120s of an inch. To find the values for N1 and N2, determine the required
displacement in 1/120s of an inch. Send the resulting number in the formula: N1 + (N2 X 256).
Relative Move Left n/120 (ESC e)
1B
60
65
N1
Programmer Manual
N2
This control spaces backward in 1/120s of an inch. To find the values for N1 and N2, determine the
required displacement in 1/120s of an inch. Send the resulting number in the formula: N1 + (N2 X 256).
Set 15 CPI (ESC g)
1B
67
This control prints any data stored in the print buffer, and initializes following text to print at 15 CPI.
Feed Paper n/216 Reverse (ESC j)
1B
6A
This command causes fanfold paper to feed backwards n/216 of an inch.
Select NLQ Font (ESC k)
1B
6B
NN
This control selects an NLQ font based on the following values of NN:
0
Courier
1
Gothic
This control affects only NLQ.
Set Left Margin (ESC l)
1B
6C
NN
This control sets the left margin to NN columns from the left edge of the physical page to the beginning of
the print line. Where NN is a hex value. The number of inches in the margin does not vary if the font,
character width, or horizontal dot density changes. This command automatically clears and resets
horizontal tabs to every eight characters, then performs a cancel operation. The smallest possible space
between the left margins is the width of one double-wide, 10 CPI character. If a margin control code
violates this minimum distance, it is ignored. Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 CPI.
Turn Proportional Mode On/Off (ESC p)
1B
70
NN
This control sets proportional mode on or off to the following values of NN:
0
Mode is Off
1
Mode is On
This control overrides condensed and is available for DP, NLQ, and user-defined characters.
Quiet Printing (ESC s)
1B
73
NN
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
61
This control activates and deactivates Quiet Mode (half-speed printing). The following are the values for
NN:
0
Set Quiet Mode Off
1
Set Quiet Mode On
Select Character Table (ESC t)
1B
74
NN
This control selects italic characters from the Epson Italic character set. The characters selected are ASCII
codes 128 to 255 (X'80' through X'FF').
The following values of NN are:
X'0'
Select Epson Italic character set
X'1'
Selects Epson Extended Graphics Italic character set (actually Code Page 437)
X'2'
Remap DLL character set from positions 0 - 127 to 128 - 255.
Selecting Epson Extended Graphics does not disable italic printing. The value of NN must equal X'00' or
X'01'.
Double High Printing (ESC w)
1B
77
NN
This control activates and deactivates double-high printing. The following are the values for NN:
0
Set Double-High Mode Off
1
Set Double-High Mode On
Superscript, subscript, and condensed modes are not valid in double-high mode. This command is
available for both DP and NLQ printing.
Select NLQ or DP Print Quality (ESC x)
1B
78
NN
This control selects NLQ or DP from the following values of NN:
0
Selects Fast Draft or DP mode. (See Note).
1
Selects NLQ mode
Notes: If the printer configuration 'Host Fast Draft' setting is enabled then Fast Draft quality is selected. If
'Host Fast Draft' is disabled then DP quality is selected (model Z03 only).
4247 Commands
Control
Hex
Name
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 1 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 01
Select EAN-8 Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 2 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 02
Select EAN-13 Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 3 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 03
Select UPC-A Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 4 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 04
Select MSI Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 5 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 05
Select UPC-E Bar Code
62
Programmer Manual
Control
Hex
Name
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 6 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 06
Select UPC 2-Digit Bar Code
(Magazine)
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 7 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 07
Select UPC 5-Digit Bar Code
(Magazine)
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 17 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 11
Select 2 of 5 INTERLEAVED Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 18 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 12
Select 2 of 5 INDUSTRIAL Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 19 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 13
Select 2 of 5 MATRIX Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 20 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 14
Select CODE 3 of 9 Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 22 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 16
Select CODABAR Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 23 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 17
Select CODE 128 Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 24 PP EM
14 14 1B 21 18
Select POSTNET Bar Code
DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS {N1} {DATA1} {N2} {DATA2}
EM
14 14 1B 28 1D
Print Bar Code Selection
DD..DD 1D DD..DD 19
DC4 DC4 ESC @
14 14 1B 40
Reinitialize Printer
DC4 DC4 ESC 1 NN
14 14 1B 31
Set Vertical Spacing n/144 Inch
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1
14 14 1B 33 31
Set Vertical Spacing to 12 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3
14 14 1B 33 33
Set Vertical Spacing to 3 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4
14 14 1B 33 34
Set Vertical Spacing to 4 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6
14 14 1B 33 36
Set Vertical Spacing to 6 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8
14 14 1B 33 38
Set Vertical Spacing to 8 Lines/30mm
DC4 DC4 ESC 5
14 14 1B 35
Eject Single Sheet or Form Feed
DC4 DC4 ESC A
14 14 1B 41
Set 15, 17.1, or 20 CPI
DC4 DC4 ESC N
14 14 1B 4E
Load or Park Fanfold from a Rear Path
DC4 DC4 ESC T
14 14 1B 54
Load or Park Fanfold from a Front Path
DC4 DC4 ESC Y
14 14 1B 59
Select Emulation
DC4 DC4 ESC Z
14 14 1B 5A
Select AFTA in Column
DC4 DC4 ESC g
14 14 1B 67
Select Resident Font
DC4 DC4 ESC h
14 14 1B 68
Request to Read Configuration
DC4 DC4 ESC h
14 14 1B 68 .....
Printer Configuration Response
DC4 DC4 ESC i
14 14 1B 69 .....
Write Configuration Response
DC4 DC4 ESC i
14 14 1B 69
Write Configuration Acknowledgement
DC4 DC4 ESC p
14 14 1B 70
Select Print Quality
Select EAN-8 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 1 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
01
PP
19
This control selects the EAN-8 bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be eight bytes long, check digit
included.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
63
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select EAN-13 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 2 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
02
PP
19
The control selects the EAN-13 bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be thirteen bytes long, check digit
included.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select UPC-A Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 3 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
03
PP
19
The control selects the UPC-A bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be twelve bytes long, including a
system digit at the leftmost position and a check digit at the rightmost position of the data field.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select MSI Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 4 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
04
PP
19
The control selects the MSI bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but the DATA field must contain only
ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
64
Programmer Manual
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select UPC-E Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 5 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
05
PP
19
The control selects the UPC-E bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be eight bytes long, including a
system digit at the leftmost position and a check digit at the rightmost position of the data field. The
system digit must be a 0 or 1.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select UPC 2-Digit Bar Code (Magazine) (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 6 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
06
PP
19
This control selects the UPC 2-Digit bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be three bytes long, check digit
included.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select UPC 5-Digit Bar Code (Magazine) (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 7 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
07
PP
19
This control selects the UPC 5-Digit bar code.
The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data, and must be six bytes long, check digit
included.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
65
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select 2 of 5 INTERLEAVED Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 17 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
11
PP
19
The control selects the 2 of 5 Interleaved bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but the number of data bytes must be
even. The DATA field must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select 2 of 5 INDUSTRIAL Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 18 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
12
PP
19
The control selects the 2 of 5 Industrial bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but the DATA field must contain only
ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select 2 of 5 MATRIX Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 19 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
13
PP
19
The control selects the 2 of 5 Matrix bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but the DATA field must contain only
ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
66
Programmer Manual
00
01
Do not print human readable characters
Print human readable characters
Select CODE 3 of 9 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 20 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
14
PP
19
This control selects the Code 3 of 9 bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, but must start and end with an *.
The DATA field may contain alphanumeric data as follows:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Space - . $ / + %
* (as start/stop character)
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select CODABAR Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 22 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
16
PP
19
This control selects the Codabar bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, and must contain only the data
characters listed below. Any combination of start/stop characters is allowed.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - $ : / . +
A B C D E N T * a b c d e n t (as start/stop characters)
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select CODE 128 Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 23 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
17
PP
19
This control selects the Code 128 bar code.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
67
The DATA field for this bar code does not have a defined length, and must contain only the data
characters belonging to the selected ASCII character set, including control characters.
Since GS and EM are control codes, the host application must set the high-order bit of the control code to
allow the printer to distinguish between encodable data and terminator strings.
Human Readable Characters will be centered below the bar code and can be wider than the encoded
area. The user is responsible for allowing space for Human Readable Characters to print without
overlapping adjacent data.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Select POSTNET Bar Code (DC4 DC4 ESC ! NN 24 PP EM)
14
14
1B
21
NN
18
PP
19
This control selects the POSTNET [ZIP, ZIP+4, or Delivery Point Bar Code (DPBC)] bar code.
The DATA field for this bar code must contain only ASCII numeric (0 to 9) data. A data string of all zeroes
will be encoded if other than numeric data is detected in the job stream.
POSTNET bar code does not print Human Readable Characters, regardless of the PP byte. POSTNET
uses the tall and short bars required by the United States Postal Service standard, and encodes numeric
data streams regardless of length.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the height of the bar code symbol as 1 to 12 (1/6 to
12/6 inch, or 2 inches).
PP is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies whether or not to print the bar code in Human
Readable Characters as follows:
00
Do not print human readable characters
01
Print human readable characters
Print Bar Code Selection (DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS {N1} {DATA1} GS {N2}
{DATA2} EM)
14
14
1B
28
1D
DD...DD
1D
DD...DD
19
This sequence causes the bar code symbol to be printed according to the Bar Code Selection command.
Sequential bar codes of the same type and height may be printed. GS N# defines the distance from the
beginning of the line or between two bar code symbols in multiples of 1/72 of an inch. This command must
be closed with an EM character.
Note: Bar code symbols will print over any descenders in the previous character box if any text is present.
Example 1:
Print an EAN-8 bar code symbol, one inch from the right margin with the data set of 12345678.
68
Programmer Manual
ASCII: DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS 72 12345678 EM
HEX: 14 14 1B 28 1D 48 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19
Example 2:
Print two Code 3 of 9 bar code symbols. The first symbol on the right margin; the second symbol one inch
to the right of the first symbol. Data sets are ABC+0123 and 12345678
ASCII: DC4 DC4 ESC ( GS 0 *ABC+123* GS 72 *1234* EM
HEX: 14 14 1B 28 1D 00 2A 41 42 43 2B 31 32 33 2A
1D 48 2A 31 32 33 34 2A 19
Reinitialize Printer (DC4 DC4 ESC @)
14
14
1B
40
This command reinitializes the printer. It resets the printer mode and clears the buffer of printable data.
Set Vertical Spacing n/144 Inch (DC4 DC4 ESC 1 NN)
14
14
1B
31
NN
This control sets a line spacing value for subsequent line feeds.
NN is a one-byte hexadecimal number that specifies the line spacing value of NN/144 inches. The value of
NN is 1 to 255.
Set Vertical Spacing 12 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 1)
14
14
1B
33
31
This command sets line spacing to 12 lines per 30 mm.
Set Vertical Spacing 3 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 3)
14
14
1B
33
33
This command sets line spacing to 3 lines per 30 mm.
Set Vertical Spacing 4 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 4)
14
14
1B
33
34
This command sets line spacing to 4 lines per 30 mm.
Set Vertical Spacing 6 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 6)
14
14
1B
33
36
This command sets line spacing to 6 lines per 30 mm.
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
69
Set Vertical Spacing 8 Lines/30mm (DC4 DC4 ESC 3 8)
14
14
1B
33
38
This command sets line spacing to 8 lines per 30 mm.
Eject Single Sheet or Form Feed (DC4 DC4 ESC 5)
14
14
1B
35
This command causes a form feed on fanfold forms.
Set 15, 17.1, 20 CPI (DC4 DC4 ESC A)
14
14
1B
41
NN
This command sets horizontal spacing (characters per inch) to 15, 17.1 or 20.
The values for NN are:
4
15 CPI
5
17.1 CPI
6
20 CPI
Load or Park Fanfold from a Rear Path (DC4 DC4 ESC N)
14
14
1B
4E
NN
This command loads or performs the Park function for fanfold paper fed from the rear path.
The values for NN are:
0
The printer selects the rear path. If paper fanfold is already loaded in a paper path that is not
requested, the printer automatically performs the Park function before loading the rear path. The
printer will then load the fanfold paper once data is received. For more information on the Park
function, see “PARK/PATH” in “Chapter 2. Understanding the Operator Panel” in the User's Guide
for your printer.
1
The printer performs the Park function for forms in the rear path.
Load or Park Fanfold from a Front Path (DC4 DC4 ESC T)
14
14
1B
54
NN
This command loads or performs the Park function for fanfold paper fed from the front path.
The values for NN are:
0
The printer selects the front path. If paper fanfold is already loaded in a paper path that is not
requested, the printer automatically performs the Park function before loading the front path. The
printer will then load the fanfold paper once data is received. For more information on the Park
function, see “PARK/PATH” in “Chapter 2. Understanding the Operator Panel” in the User's Guide
for your printer.
1
The printer performs the Park function for forms in the front path.
70
Programmer Manual
Select Emulation (DC4 DC4 ESC Y)
14
14
1B
59
NN
This command selects the printer emulation mode.
The values for NN are:
1
Epson FX 1050
2
4202 Proprinter III XL
5
4247 or 2381 Personal Printer
Select AFTA in Column (DC4 DC4 ESC Z)
14
14
1B
5A
NN
This command selects the column at 10 CPI where the Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment (AFTA) will
be made.
The value for NN is the column number.
Select Resident Font (DC4 DC4 ESC g)
14
14
1B
67
NN
This command selects the resident font based on the following values of NN:
0
Courier
1
Gothic
128
OCR-B
129
OCR-A
Request to Read Configuration (DC4 DC4 ESC h)
14
14
1B
68
This command requests the printer to send its configuration saved in non-volatile memory (NVM).
The printer must be configured for 1284 Parallel mode.
Printer Configuration Response (DC4 DC4 ESC h)
14
14
1B
68
LL
HH
TT
SS
D1...DN
CS
This is the response Request to Read Configuration command.
The printer must be configured for 1284 Parallel mode. LL and HH indicate the number of bytes that follow
this control. LL is the least significant byte of the count and HH is the most significant byte. (The number
of bytes that follow equal HH x 256 + LL.)
The other values are:
TT
Model Type
SS
Model Sub-type
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
71
D1...DN
CS
Configuration Data
Checksum of the data bytes
Write Configuration Response (DC4 DC4 ESC i)
14
14
1B
69
LL
HH
TT
SS
D1...DN
CS
This command writes configuration data to non-volatile memory (NVM).
The printer must be configured for 1284 Parallel mode. LL and HH indicate the number of bytes that follow
this control. LL is the least significant byte of the count and HH is the most significant byte. (The number
of bytes that follow equal HH x 256 + LL.)
The other values are:
TT
Model Type
SS
Model Sub-type
D1...DN
Configuration Data
CS
Checksum of the data bytes
Write Configuration Acknowledgement (DC4 DC4 ESC i)
14
14
1B
69
NN
This command acknowledges that the configuration was written to the printer. This is the response to the
Write Configuration command.
The printer must be configured for 1284 Parallel mode.
NN is a single byte defined as follows:
X'00' Configuration Saved (Successful)
X'01' Configuration Not Saved (Error)
Select Print Quality
14
14
1B
70
NN
The values of NN are:
0
Fast Draft (model Z03 only)
1
DP
2
DP Text
3
NLQ
Buffer Terminating Conditions
The following controls cause buffered data to be released for printing:
v Carriage Return
v Line Feed
v Form Feed
v Reverse Line Feed
v Horizontal Tab
v Vertical Tab
72
Programmer Manual
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Backspace
Set 1/8 Inch Line Spacing
Set 7/72 Inch Line Spacing
Set 1/6 Inch Line Spacing
Set n/216 Inch Line Spacing
Set n/72 Inch Line Spacing
Invoke Text Line Spacing (if the line spacing is changed)
Move Right n/120
Move Left n/120
Feed Paper n/216 Reverse
Relative Move Baseline
Shift Out/Double-Wide Print
Device Control 4/Cancel Double-Wide Print
Begin Subscript/Superscript
End Subscript/Superscript
Begin Double-Strike Print
End Double-Strike Print
Begin Emphasized Print
End Emphasized Print
Set Presentation Highlight
Continuous Overscore
Auto Underscore
Device Control 2/Select 10 CPI
Set 12 CPI
Shift In/Condensed Prin
Proportional Space Mode
Change Font
Normal Density Bit Image Graphics
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 1
Dual Density Bit Image Graphics Type 2
High Density Bit Image Graphics
Unidirectional Printing
Set Horizontal Margins
Set Initial Conditions
The following conditions also cause buffered data to be released for printing:
v Parallel -INIT
v Automatic Line Wrap
An automatic line wrap consists of a carriage return and line feed inserted after the maximum number of
characters has been printed on a line. The next character is then printed at the left margin on the
following line. Automatic line wrap occurs for text data but not for bit image graphics or advanced
function graphics.
Unsupported Command Processing
The following Epson controls are not supported by the 4247. If any of these commands are received, they
are ignored.
v Select 9 Pin Graphic Mode (ESC ^)
v
v
v
v
Disable Paper-Out Sensor (ESC 8)
Enable Paper-Out Sensor (ESC 9)
Select Color (ESC r)
Assign Character Table (ESC t)
Chapter 2. Epson FX-1050 Data Stream
73
74
Programmer Manual
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
This chapter explains the concepts of the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS). IPDS is an orderable
feature for your printer. The intent of this chapter is to provide a basic overview of how IPDS works. The
Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference provides detailed information about IPDS programming in
general while Chapter 4, “IPDS Programming Information,” on page 99 provides a detailed description of
the IPDS commands that the 4247 Model X03/Z03 printer uses. If the programming information in the
Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference is different from the programming information in this manual, use
this manual to program the 4247 Model X03/Z03 printer.
Overview
The Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) is a structured-field data stream for managing and controlling
printer processes. IPDS uses all points addressability that allows users to position text, images, graphic
pictures, bar codes, and overlays at any defined point on a printed page. Later pages in this chapter
explain each of these data types and their uses.
IPDS offers the flexibility of creating data and commands independent of the type of attachment protocol
used by the printer or its system. Using the same data stream, printers can attach to control units or any
type of network link that does not restrict the transmission of data to the printer.
IPDS commands within the data stream enable the host processor to control and manage the downloading
of symbol sets and stored objects, such as overlays and page segments. The printer can later use these
stored objects to construct a printed page.
The IPDS command structure also provides the means for returning error information to the host, for
returning query information, and for performing error recovery actions.
Physical Medium
The 4247 Printer defines the physical medium as an area with boundaries of width and depth that define
the limits of this page. The maximum print position (MPP) defines the width of the current page in
characters.
MPP x 1/CPI = width in inches (CPI is the number of characters per inch).
The maximum page length (MPL) defines the depth of the current page in lines.
MPL x 1/LPI = depth in inches (LPI is the number of lines per inch).
The top margin on this page is the top-of-form position, as selected by pressing SET TOP OF FORM on
the operator panel. Figure 5-1 shows the physical medium layout.
75
Figure 1. The Physical Medium
The physical medium defined above is assumed to coincide with the actual physical medium (form) as that
terminology is used in the following discussion.
IPDS Coordinate Systems
IPDS uses coordinate systems to define any point on a page. All IPDS commands containing location
parameters use these coordinate systems to define distance measurements. The coordinate systems
specify these distances in logical units called units.
Many IPDS commands contain parameters that specify values for position or size in units. For example,
one unit may equal approximately 0.018 mm (0.0007 in. [1/144 in.]). Before using these values, the 4247
Printer truncates the specified values to multiples of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/1440 in.]) for all unit parameters
except those associated with DP, and DP Text baseline positioning. The 4247 Printer truncates DP, and
DP Text baseline positioning parameters to multiples of 0.36 mm (0.014 in. [1/72 in.]). The unit parameters
are identified in Chapter 4, “IPDS Programming Information,” on page 99.
X and Y Medium Coordinate System
The Xm and Ym coordinates, known as the medium coordinate system, relate directly to the physical
medium. The Xm, Ym coordinate system is fixed for each medium or form size. IPDS commands cannot
change the origin and the orientation of these coordinates. The origin (Xm=0, Ym=0) is always at the top
left hand corner of the physical medium. Positive Xm values begin at the origin and increase along the top
of the sheet, from left to right. Positive Ym values begin at the origin and increase along the left side of the
sheet moving downward toward the bottom of the sheet. Figure 2 on page 77 shows the Xm, Ym coordinate
system:
76
Programmer Manual
Figure 2. The Xm,Ym Medium Coordinate System
Logical Page Layout
IPDS describes the printed output in terms of logical pages. The logical page does not have to be
contained completely on the physical medium. However, printing can only occur where the two areas
overlap. Figure 3 shows the physical-logical page relationship.
Figure 3. The Physical-Logical Page Relationship
The logical page reference corner is the corner of the logical page that is at the smallest Xp, Yp position.
This corner does not necessarily have to coincide with the physical medium origin (Xm=0, Ym=0). The
logical page size in the X dimension is the 'X-Extent', and the logical page size in the Y dimension is the
'Y-Extent'. IPDS commands specify the logical page size and location. Figure 5-4 shows the relationship
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
77
between the X and Y coordinates and the logical and physical medium.
Figure 4. The X and Y Coordinate System and the Logical Page
I and B Coordinate System
In addition to the X,Y coordinate system, IPDS uses another coordinate system, the I-B coordinate system.
These coordinates describe the placement and orientation of text or images on the logical page. The
printer places characters along the I-axis for a line of text. The B-axis is the direction in which the printer
places lines of text on the logical page. IPDS commands can change both the origin and the orientation of
the I and B axes (see Figure 5 on page 79).
Direction: As the printer places text characters on the page, the inline coordinate increases. The direction
of this increase is the positive inline direction or +I. The baseline coordinate also increases as the printer
places text lines on the page. The direction of this increase is the positive baseline direction or +B.
Location parameters within the IPDS commands specify the I and B directions. Chapter 4, “IPDS
Programming Information,” on page 99 contains specific information about these commands.
Distance: The inline coordinate increases a predetermined distance as the printer places the text
characters on the page. This distance is the character increment. The baseline coordinate also increases a
predetermined distance as the printer places lines of text on the page. This distance is the baseline
increment. Location parameters within the IPDS commands specify the I and B distances. Chapter 4,
“IPDS Programming Information,” on page 99 contains specific information about these commands.
Initial coordinates: The coordinates of the first print position on the logical page are the initial
coordinates. The initial inline print coordinate is Ii. The initial baseline print coordinate is Bi.
Current coordinates: The coordinates of the current print position on the logical page are the current
coordinates. The current inline print coordinate is Ic. The current baseline print coordinate is Bc. Figure 5
on page 79 shows the various I and B coordinates on the logical page:
78
Programmer Manual
Figure 5. The I and B Coordinate System on the Logical Page
Notes:
1. The 4247 Printer text character box is 180 units high by 144 units wide at 10 CPI when the XpYp units
equal 1,440 per inch. The left edge of the character box is at the specified inline position and the
bottom edge of the character box is 20 units below the specified baseline position.
2. If the bottom edge of the character box falls below the printable area on the physical medium, the
character will not print. In this situation, a baseline move (Relative Move Baseline or Absolute Move
Baseline) text command can place the character box totally within the printable area.
Processing IPDS Commands
The structured field format of IPDS allows one or more commands to be sent to the printer in a continuous
stream. Each command is self-describing; the command length, type, optional parameters, and data are all
part of each specific command. The printer processes each command in the order it is received. Every
IPDS command contains a flag byte. Setting the Acknowledgment Required bit on in this flag byte
indicates to the printer the end of a command stream sequence. The printer then sends an Acknowledge
Reply to the host. Figure 6 shows an example of an IPDS data stream:
Figure 6. An Example of the IPDS Data Stream
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
79
IPDS Command Format
All of the printer commands use the following format:
Length
Command
Flag
Correlation ID
Data
Note: Bit numbering follows the EBCDIC convention with bit zero being the most significant bit. A
description of each field follows.
Length
Length is a two-byte field that specifies the length of this command. This count includes the two-byte
length field, the command field, the flag byte, and the optional fields (Correlation ID and Data Fields). The
Length field can be any value from 5 to 32,767 (X'7FFF').
Command
Command is a two-byte field that specifies the IPDS command code. See Table 1 on page 81 for a list of
valid command codes.
Flag
Flag is a one-byte field that contains the IPDS command stream flags.
Bit 0 of this byte is the Acknowledgment Required (ARQ) flag. If this bit is on, the host requests the printer
to send an Acknowledge Reply.
Bit 1 of this byte is the Correlation ID flag. If this bit is B'1', a two-byte correlation number follows this flag
byte. If this bit is B'0', the optional correlation number is not present and the following byte or bytes contain
the data field.
Bit 2 of this byte is the acknowledgement continuation flag. If this bit is B'1', the host is requesting
continuation of the current Acknowledge Reply. If this bit is B'0', the host is not requesting continuation.
Bits 3-7 of the flag byte are reserved and must be zero.
Correlation ID
Correlation ID is a two-byte value that specifies an identifier for this command. The Correlation ID is an
optional field and is only present if bit 1 of the flag byte is B'1'. The printer can use any value between
0000 and FFFF for this ID. If an error occurs on a command prior to acceptance for processing, the printer
sends a negative acknowledgement (NACK) to the host. If the printer recognizes the command that
caused the error, the Correlation ID field in the NACK will contain the ID of the command responsible for
the NACK. Correlation ID is also returned in response to commands that request information and
commands that request an acknowledgement.
Data
80
Programmer Manual
Data is an optional field and is not present for all commands. This field contains specific subcommands,
parameters, and data appropriate for the given command. The length of the data field can range from 0 to
32760 (X'7FF8') if the correlation ID is present. If the correlation ID is not present, the length of the data
field can range from 0 to 32762 (X'7FFA').
Table 1 lists the valid IPDS commands for the 4247 Printer.
Table 1. Valid IPDS Command Codes for the 4247 Printer
Command
Hex Code
Description
SHS
D697
Set Home State
STM
D6E4
Sense Type and Model
NOP
D603
No Operation
LSS
D61E
Load Symbol Set
XOH
D68F
Execute Order Home State
XOA
D633
Execute Order Any State
BP
D6AF
Begin Page
EP
D6BF
End Page
LCC
D69F
Load Copy Control
LPD
D6CF
Logical Page Descriptor
LPP
D66D
Logical Page Position
WBCC
D680
Write Bar Code Control
WBC
D681
Write Bar Code
WGC
D684
Write Graphics Control
WG
D685
Write Graphics
WIC
D63D
Write Image Control
WI
D64D
Write Image
WT
D62D
Write Text
BO
D6DF
Begin Overlay
DO
D6EF
Deactivate Overlay
IO
D67D
Include Overlay
BPS
D65F
Begin Page Segment
DPS
D66F
Deactivate Page Segment
IPS
D67F
Include Page Segment
LE
D61D
Load Equivalence
LFE
D63F
Load Font Equivalence
DF
D64F
Deactivate Font
END
D65D
End
Acknowledge Requests and Replies
The following sections explain:
v Acknowledge Reply (ACK)
v Host Acknowledgment Requests
v Printer Acknowledgement Replies.
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
81
Acknowledge Reply (ACK)
The printer uses the Acknowledge Reply to return device status, sense information, and any additionally
requested information to the host application program.
The application program uses the Acknowledge data to maintain control of the printing application and to
initiate error recovery actions when necessary.
The format for the Acknowledge Reply is:
Length
D6FF
Flag
Data
Length
D6FF
Flag
Correlation ID
or
Data
The printer sends an acknowledgment:
v Whenever the acknowledgment required bit in the flag byte is on
v Whenever the printer detects a command stream error or device error and a negative response must be
sent.
A negative reply (NACK), if required, has priority over a positive reply (ACK).
Length
Length is the total length of the ACK reply, including this field. The maximum length of this command is
255 bytes. If there is a five-byte command header (no correlation ID present), the data field can be up to
250 bytes long. If a correlation ID is present in the header, the maximum data field length is 248 bytes.
D6FF
D6FF in the command ID field indicates this is an Acknowledge Reply from the printer to the host.
Flag
Flag is a one-byte field that specifies the flags for this command. Bits 1, 2, and 7 are the only bits used in
this byte. All other bits are reserved and must be zeros. If bit 1 is BX'1', a Correlation ID is present in this
command. If bit 1 is BX'0', no Correlation ID is present. If bit 2 is B'1', the response can be continued in a
later Acknowledge Reply. If bit 2 is B'0', the response is complete in this Acknowledge Reply.
Correlation ID
Correlation ID is a two-byte field that contains the identifier from a previously received command, such as
Sense Type and Model. If the printer receives a command that requires an Acknowledgment Reply, and if
that command contains a correlation ID, the printer also includes the same correlation ID in its
corresponding field. Also, if an error occurs and the printer can recognize the command that caused the
error, the printer includes the correlation ID of that command in the NACK.
Data
Acknowledgement Type
82
Programmer Manual
Page/Copy Counters
Special Data (SD)
DATA is the field that follows the correlation ID field or the flag byte if no correlation ID is present. The
length of this field can be 0-250 (X'00'-X'FA') if no correlation ID is present, and 0-248 (X'00'-X'F8') if the
correlation ID is present.
The first byte of the data field is the acknowledgment type. Values of 00, 01, 04, and 06 for this byte
indicate a positive acknowledgment (ACK). A value of X'80' for this byte indicates a negative
acknowledgment (NACK). Any other values for this byte are invalid.
The next 4 bytes of the data field are the page/copy counters. The first two page/copy counter bytes
(most significant bytes) are a stacked page counter. This counter identifies how many pages have
successfully stacked and printed. The last two page/copy counter bytes (least significant bytes) are
reserved and must be zero.
Following the page/copy counter bytes is the Special Data (SD) area. Depending on the acknowledgment
type, this field can be omitted, can contain requested printer information, or can contain sense information.
The following chart summarizes the acknowledgments and the special data areas:
Type
Meaning
Special Data Area Contents
X'00'
ACK
None
X'01'
ACK
Type and Model
X'04'
ACK
Resource List
X'06'
ACK
Printer Information
X'80'
NACK
Sense Bytes
For a detailed explanation of the Special Data (SD) area contents, see Chapter 4, “IPDS Programming
Information,” on page 99.
Host Acknowledgment Requests
The host requests an acknowledgment from the printer by setting the Acknowledgment Required (ARQ)
flag bit on in the IPDS command (see “IPDS Command Format” on page 80). This request occurs in two
instances:
1. In any command of a command sequence when the host wants a positive acknowledgment (ACK) that
the printer has received and accepted the command sequence for processing.
2. In commands sent by the host to request the return of printer information.
If the printer receives a command that is normally used to request the return of printer data but the ARQ
flag is not on, the printer ignores this command.
A positive acknowledgment (ACK) at the end of a command stream is equivalent to an ACK on each and
every command preceding the command that has the ACK. An ACK is an indication from the printer that
all commands since the last acknowledgment are accepted for processing.
Printer Acknowledgment Replies
The printer sends an Acknowledge Reply to the host to:
v Indicate that a received command or command sequence requesting acknowledgment has been
accepted for processing
v Return requested printer information
v Report errors.
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
83
The printer sends a Negative Acknowledge Reply (NACK) to the host to indicate that an error has
occurred.
The printer can send an ACK or a NACK in response to an ARQ. If an error occurs, the printer can send a
NACK without receiving an ARQ.
The following general rules apply to the printer replies:
v If the printer receives a command requesting acknowledgment and this command also requests specific
printer information, then:
1. The printer sends a positive acknowledgment to the host, and
2. The printer sends the requested information in the data field portion of the Acknowledge Reply.
v If the printer receives a command requesting acknowledgment and this command does not request
specific printer information, then:
1. The printer sends a positive acknowledgment to the host, and
2. The printer does not include any information in the data field portion of the Acknowledge Reply.
v If the printer generates the Acknowledge Reply as a result of detecting an error, then the printer sends a
Negative Acknowledgment (NACK) to the host. Under this condition, the printer also sends to the host
information concerning the error. This error information is in the data field portion of the Acknowledge
Reply.
v The Exception Handling Control command instructs the printer on error processing. For more
information about the Exception Handling Control, see Chapter 4, “IPDS Programming Information,” on
page 99.
v The printer can only return one error per NACK.
v If the printer receives a command requesting an acknowledgment, the printer expects the host to wait
for the acknowledgment before sending further commands. If the printer receives additional commands
from the host within the same transmission after the acknowledgment, the commands are ignored.
IPDS Data
There are various forms of data that the printer uses for creating the output page. These include text,
graphics, bar codes, and images. The printed page can include any combination of this data.
Text data contains lines of character information which the printer places in sequence on the page.
Graphics data contains lines, arcs, markers, and other elements which present a printed picture.
Bar code data is a data type that supports applications requiring precision printing of encoded information
in a form that is recognizable by scanning devices.
Image data contains rectangular arrays of information. The array consists of a sequence of scan lines.
Each scan line consists of picture elements (pels). The image data contains one (dot position) bit per pel.
The text, graphics, bar code, and image data types each have their own unique commands. Chapter 4,
“IPDS Programming Information,” on page 99 contains a detailed description of these commands.
Blocks of graphics, image, or bar code data are presented as a single unit to the printer. The printer
enters the appropriate Block State (graphics block, image block, or bar code block) to create the entire
data group for that block of data.
Page segments and overlays are any combinations of text, graphics, bar codes, and images. The printer
can store these segments and overlays for later use as the page is created. For information about
segments, see “Include Page Segment (IPS)” on page 195. For information about overlays, see “Begin
84
Programmer Manual
Overlay (BO)” on page 194. Figure 7 shows various data types on a page.
Figure 7. A Sample Page Constructed on an IPDS Printer
Notes:
1. Overlays and page segments can be merged on this page.
2. Text and data blocks can be positioned at different places on this page.
3. A logical page can be positioned anywhere with respect to the physical medium.
Mixing Rules
IPDS allows the same physical pel to be overwritten an unlimited number of times. Overwriting can occur
both within a block and across blocks. For example, within text blocks, overwriting can be caused by using
the Overstrike control. Within a graphics block, overwriting occurs whenever one graphics area or figure
overlays another. Across block overwriting can occur whenever one IPDS block physically overlays any
portion of another IPDS block.
Within each block, the 4247 Printer further defines background pels and foreground pels. Foreground pels
are:
v The one pels of a character
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
85
v
v
v
v
v
The
The
The
The
The
pels of a rule
one pels of an image
pels of a graphic line or arc
one pels of a filled area
one pels of a bar code.
Background pels are all other pels.
Text data, because it prints at a different physical resolution than the data in the other blocks, does not
logically mix with any other data type. The only mixing that takes place between text data and any other
data type is the (possible) physical mixing of ink on forms.
For the 4247 Printer, the mixing rule for overwritten data within a given block of image, graphics, or bar
code data is quite simple: background pels are transparent; foreground pels are opaque. Thus,
background pels always show through what is underneath (what was received earlier), while foreground
pels cover it up. In other words, a pel prints in the color of its last overwriting.
Note: Color of medium is a valid color for image, graphics, and bar code data. Thus, foreground pels in
this color cover up pels of any other color that are underneath.
For the 4247 Printer, the mixing rule for overwritten data across blocks is the same as it is within blocks
except for text. Thus, across image and graphics, or bar code blocks, background pels are transparent,
while foreground pels are opaque.
IPDS Operating States
There are various operating states using the IPDS commands. The following states define the operating
environment for this printer:
v Home state
v Page state
v Overlay state
v Page segment state
v Block state.
While in the page, overlay, or page segment state, the printer can enter a block state. The block state
causes the printer to process a block of data. There are image blocks, graphics blocks, and bar code
blocks. Thus, the printer can enter any of the data block states from any of the operating states.
Home State
Home state is the initial IPDS operating state. The printer returns to home state at the end of each page,
page segment, or overlay. In addition, the printer can enter the home state by receiving a Set Home State
command. The 4247 Printer also goes to home state when a NACK is returned.
While in the home state, the printer receives control and initialization commands to prepare for a print
operation. In this state, the printer can also receive commands that request the return of printer information
to the host application program.
Page State
Page state is the operating state for printing a logical page. The printer enters the page state from the
home state as a result of receiving a Begin Page command.
In the page state, the printer can receive commands that merge previously defined and loaded overlay and
page segments with the current page information. The printer can also receive Write Text commands that
position text on the logical page. The presence of Write Image (block) Control, Write Graphics (block)
86
Programmer Manual
Control, or Write Bar Code (block) Control commands in the data stream indicates that the printed page
contains individual blocks of image, graphics, or bar code data for positioning on the page. These
commands cause a state transition to occur to an appropriate page block state. In the block state, the
printer establishes the initial conditions and processes the block of data onto the page. Receiving an End
command in a page block state terminates that state and returns processing back to the page state.
Figure 8 shows the relationship between the home state, page state, and block states.
Figure 8. The Relationship between Home State, Page State, and Block States
Overlay State
Overlay state is the operating state that stores data in the printer. The printer enters the overlay state from
the home state as a result of receiving a Begin Overlay command.
A parameter in the Begin Overlay command provides an identifier for later references to this overlay. The
printer saves the currently active Logical Page Descriptor value, the Load Font Equivalence value, and the
Load Equivalence value as part of the stored overlay definition.
The same commands that the printer uses in the page state are also valid while in the overlay state.
Figure 9 on page 88 shows the relationship between the home state, overlay state, and block states.
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
87
Figure 9. The Relationship between Home State, Overlay State, and Block State
Page Segment State
The printer enters the page segment state from the home state as a result of receiving a Begin Page
Segment command. A parameter in the Begin Page Segment command provides an identifier for later
references to this segment.
Page segments assume the environment (Logical Page Descriptor, Load Font Equivalence, and Load
Equivalence) that is active at the time the segment is presented.
While in a page segment state, the printer can only receive commands to write text, image, bar code, and
graphics blocks.
Figure 10 on page 89 shows the relationship between the home state, page segment state, and block
states.
88
Programmer Manual
Figure 10. The Relationship between Home State, Page Segment State, and Block States
A Summary of the IPDS States and Commands
Table 2 shows all the valid IPDS commands for the 4247 Printer and the initial and ending states for each
command. The printer must be in the initial state shown for each command for that command to be valid.
The ending state is the resulting state the printer enters after a valid command processes.
Table 2. IPDS Command Code Summary for the 4247 Printer
Cmd
Hex
Code
Description
Initial State
Ending State
SHS
D697
Set Home State
Any
Home
STM
D6E4
Sense Type and Model
Any
No Change
NOP
D603
No Operation
Any
No Change
LSS
D61E
Load Symbol Set
Home
Home
XOH
D68F
Execute Order Home State
Home
Home
XOA
D633
Execute Order Any State
Any
No Change (See Note 1)
BP
D6AF
Begin Page
Home
Page
EP
D6BF
End Page
Page, Page Segment, or
Overlay
Home
LCC
D69F
Load Copy Control
Home
Home
LPD
D6CF
Logical Page Descriptor
Home
Home
LPP
D66D
Logical Page Position
Home
Home
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
89
Table 2. IPDS Command Code Summary for the 4247 Printer (continued)
Cmd
Hex
Code
Description
Initial State
Ending State
WBCC
D680
Write Bar Code Control
Page, Page Segment, or
Overlay
Page Bar Code Block, Page
Segment Bar Code Block, or
Overlay Bar Code Block
WBC
D681
Write Bar Code
Page Bar Code Block, Page
Segment Bar Code Block, or
Overlay Bar Code Block
No Change
WGC
D684
Write Graphics Control
Page, Page Segment, or
Overlay
Page Graphics Block, Page
Segment Graphics Block, or
Overlay Graphics Block
WG
D685
Write Graphics
Page Graphics Block, Page
Segment Graphics Block, or
Overlay Graphics Block
No Change
WIC
D63D
Write Image Control
Page, Page Segment, or
Overlay
Page Image Block, Page
Segment Image Block, or
Overlay Image Block
WI
D64D
Write Image
Page Image Block, Page
Segment Image Block, or
Overlay Image Block
No Change
WT
D62D
Write Text
Page, Page Segment, or
Overlay
No Change
BO
D6DF
Begin Overlay
Home
Overlay
DO
D6EF
Deactivate Overlay
Home
Home
IO
D67D
Include Overlay
Page or Overlay
No Change
BPS
D65F
Begin Page Segment
Home
Page Segment
DPS
D66F
Deactivate Page Segment
Home
Home
IPS
D67F
Include Page Segment
Page or Overlay
No Change
LE
D61D
Load Equivalence
Home
Home
LFE
D63F
Load Font Equivalence
Home, Page, Page Segment,
or Overlay
No Change
DF
D64F
Deactivate Font
Home
Home
END
D65D
End
See Note 2
See Note 2
Notes:
1. The Discard Buffered Data subcommand in the Execute Order Any State command causes the printer to enter
the home state.
2. The End command is valid in any page block, overlay block, or page segment block state and causes the printer
to return to the corresponding page, overlay, or page segment state.
Figure 11 on page 91 shows all of the IPDS states and their commands. Notice that some commands can
only occur in a specific state, some commands can occur in more than one state, and some commands
can occur in any state. Also note that the printer can only enter the page state, the page segment state,
and the overlay state from the home state.
90
Programmer Manual
Figure 11. The Complete IPDS State Diagram
A Typical IPDS Command Sequence
The following chart shows an example of a typical IPDS command sequence. This sequence contains five
basic categories:
1. Initialization
2. Preparation
3. Page Segment
4. Overlay
5. Page
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
91
Each category starts with a command from the host to the printer and ends with an acknowledgment from
the printer to the host. An analysis of each category follows this example.
Note: → indicates a command from the host to the printer. ← indicates a reply from the printer to the host.
Table 3. An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence
Printer State
Command
Direction
Initialization
Sequence
Preparatory
Sequence
Page
Segment
Sequence
Block State
End Block
State
CMD
Command Name
Description
STM
Sense Type and Model
Request Device Information
ACK
Acknowledgement
Response
Return Type/Model Information
SHS
Set Home State
Set Printer Home State
LPD
Logical Page Descriptor
Define Logical Page
LPP
Logical Page Position
Locate Logical Page
LCC
Load Copy Control
Load Page Copy Information
LFE
Load Font Equivalence
Load Font Mapping
ACK
Acknowledgement
Response
Acknowledge Successful Operation
BPS
Begin Page Segment
Set Printer to Page Segment State
WT
Write Text
Store Text Data in Page Segment
WT
Write Text
Store Text Data in Page Segment
WT
Write Text
Store Text Data in Page Segment
WIC
Write Image Control
Start Page Segment Image Block State
WI
Write Image
Store Image Data in Page Segment
WI
Write Image
Store Image Data in Page Segment
END
End
End Image Block State
WT
Write Text
Store Text Data in Page Segment
WT
Write Text
Store Text Data in Page Segment
EP
End Page
Return to Home State
Acknowledgement
Response
Acknowledge Successful Operation
BO
Begin Overlay
Enter Overlay State
WT
Write Text
Store Text Data in Overlay
WT
Write Text
Store Text Data in Overlay
WT
Write Text
Store Text Data in Overlay
IO
Include Overlay
Include Another Overlay
Write Graphics Control
Enter Overlay Graphics Block State
WG
Write Graphics
Store Graphics Data in Overlay
WG
Write Graphics
Store Graphics Data in Overlay
ACK
Overlay
Sequence
Block State
92
Programmer Manual
WGC
Table 3. An Example of an IPDS Command Sequence (continued)
Printer State
End Block
State
Command
Direction
CMD
Command Name
Description
END
End
End Overlay Graphics Block State
WT
Write Text
Store Text in Overlay
WT
Write Text
Store Text in Overlay
IO
Include Overlay
Include Another Overlay
IPS
Include Page Segment
Include Page Segment in Overlay
EP
End Page
Return to Home State
Acknowledgement
Response
Acknowledge Successful Operation
BP
Begin Page
Enter Page State
WT
Write Text
Send Text Data to Printer
IO
Include Overlay
Print Overlay
IPS
Include Page Segment
Print Page Segment
WIC
Write Image Content
Start Page Segment Image Block State
WI
Write Image
Send Image Data to Printer
WI
Write Image
Send Image Data to Printer
END
End
End Image Block State
WT
Write Text
Send Text Data to Printer
WT
Write Text
Send Text Data to Printer
IO
Include Overlay
Print Overlay
IPS
Include Pate Segment
Print Page Segment
EP
End Page
Complete All Printing and Return to
Home State
Acknowledgement
Response
Acknowledge Successful Operation
ACK
Page
Sequence
Block State
End Block
State
ACK
Printer Initialization and Preparation Sequence
Before any printing begins, it is necessary to specify certain parameters and conditions for the printer. The
following sample command sequence accomplishes this task:
v STM (Sense Type and Model)
v ACK (Acknowledgment Reply)
v SHS (Set Home State)
v LPD (Logical Page Descriptor)
v LPP (Logical Page Position)
v LCC (Load Copy Control)
v LFE (Load Font Equivalence)
v ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).
Note: This sequence is only a typical example. It is not mandatory for the host to send all of these
commands.
STM (Sense Type and Model): The host sends the STM command to sense the printer characteristics.
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
93
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
type and model information to the host. This information includes printer number (4247), model, and the
various function set vector information.
SHS (Set Home State): The host sends the SHS command to make sure the printer is in the home state
before the start of a print job.
LPD (Logical Page Descriptor): The LPD command sets print characteristics for the logical page. These
parameters include:
v Page size
v Initial coordinates
v Initial left margin
v Intercharacter increment
v Baseline increment
v Font ID
v Text color.
LPP (Logical Page Position): The LPP command positions the upper-left corner of the logical page (as
defined by the LPD command) with respect to the top-of-form setting. This command locates the logical
page on the physical medium.
LCC (Load Copy Control): The LCC command specifies which overlays to include on each subsequent
page and which suppressions to activate for each page. Suppression allows selective suppression of data
while printing.
LFE (Load Font Equivalence): The LFE command maps a local font identifier (from within the text,
graphics, or bar code data) to a global ID used for resource management. This command also specifies
for each font attributes, such as bold, double-strike, double-wide, and italics.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
the ACK reply to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This command
indicates to the host that the printer is now ready to accept data for print operations. This is the end of the
initialization and preparation sequence.
Page Segment Sequence
The page segment sequence creates one or more page segments for later printing. The following
command sequence illustrates the loading of a sample page segment:
v BPS (Begin Page Segment)
v WT (Write Text)
v WIC (Write Image Control)
v WI (Write Image)
v END (End)
v WT (Write Text)
v EP (End Page)
v ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).
Note: This sequence is only an example. A page segment can contain any combination of text, image,
graphics, or bar code data.
BPS (Begin Page Segment): The host sends the BPS command to the printer, causing the printer to
leave the home state and enter the page segment state. The page segment state creates a segment of
page data to save within the printer for later printing. The BPS command contains an identifier (ID) for
later use in selecting this segment. This segment can contain combinations of text, images, bar codes, and
graphics.
94
Programmer Manual
WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in a
page segment state, this text information does not print at this time. Instead, the data becomes part of the
page segment. The host can send multiple WT commands to the printer while in the page segment state.
WIC (Write Image Control): The WIC command causes the printer to enter the image block state.
Parameters in this command define the image size, scale, initial coordinates, and color of the image.
WI (Write Image): The WI command sends a block of image data to the printer. One or more of these
commands create the actual image for later printing.
END (End): The END command terminates the image block state. The printer remains in the page
segment state with the image stored for later use.
WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text
data can be added to the page segment. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, this segment
could also include additional graphics data, image data, or bar code data.
EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the page segment state and return to the
home state. We recommend that this command contain an acknowledgment request to let you know of
successful execution of the page segment.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
the ACK command to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This
command indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the segment data and stored this
information for later printing.
Overlay Sequence
The overlay sequence creates one or more overlays for later printing. The following command sequence
illustrates the loading of a typical overlay:
v BO (Begin Overlay)
v WT (Write Text)
v IO (Include Overlay)
v WGC (Write Graphics Control)
v WG (Write Graphics)
v END (End)
v WT (Write Text)
v IO (Include Overlay)
v IPS (Include Page Segment)
v EP (End Page)
v ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).
Note: This sequence is only an example. An overlay can contain any combination of text, image blocks,
graphics blocks, bar code blocks, page segments, or overlays.
BO (Begin Overlay): The host sends the BO command to the printer causing the printer to leave the
home state and enter the overlay state. The overlay state creates an overlay of data to save within the
printer for later printing. The BO command contains an identifier (ID) for later use in selecting this overlay.
WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in an
overlay state, this information does not print at this time. Instead, the data becomes part of the overlay.
The host can send multiple WT commands to the printer while in the overlay state.
IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current
overlay. This command contains an ID field that selects the desired overlay.
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
95
WGC (Write Graphics Control): The WGC command causes the printer to enter the graphics block state.
Parameters in this command specify the placement, size, and orientation of the graphics block.
WG (Write Graphics): The WG command sends graphics data to the printer. The graphics data
(contained in drawing orders) specifies the various elements of the graphic. These include color, size, line
type, line width, and other parameters. One or more WG commands present the graphics picture.
END (End): The END command terminates the graphics block state. The printer remains in the overlay
state with the graphics block as part of the overlay.
WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text
data can be added to the overlay. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, image data, bar code
data, or additional graphics data could also be included in the overlay.
IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current
overlay.
IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge
onto the current overlay. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment.
EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the overlay state and return to the home
state. We recommend that this command contain an acknowledgment request to verify successful
transmission of the overlay.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
the ACK reply, to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This reply
indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the overlay data and stored this information for later
printing.
Page Sequence
The page sequence causes data to print on the current page. This data can include previously stored
overlays or page segments, as well as text data. The following commands illustrate a typical page
sequence:
v BP (Begin Page)
v WT (Write Text)
v IO (Include Overlay)
v IPS (Include Page Segment)
v WIC (Write Image Control)
v WI (Write Image)
v END (End)
v WT (Write Text)
v IO (Include Overlay)
v IPS (Include Page Segment)
v EP (End Page)
v ACK (Acknowledgment Reply).
Note: This sequence is only an example. A page can contain any combination of text, image blocks,
graphics blocks, bar code blocks, page segments, or overlays.
BP (Begin Page): The host sends the BP command to the printer, causing the printer to leave the home
state and enter the page state.
WT (Write Text): The WT command sends text data to the printer. Because the printer is currently in a
page state, this text information prints at this time. The host can send multiple WT commands to the
printer while in the page state.
96
Programmer Manual
IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current
page. This command contains an ID field, which selects the desired overlay.
IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge
onto the current page. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment. The selected page
segment now prints on the current page.
WIC (Write Image Control): The WIC command causes the printer to enter the image block state.
Parameters in this command define the image size, scale, initial coordinates, and color of the image.
WI (Write Image): The WI command sends a block of bit image data to the printer. One or more of these
commands create the actual image for printing. Because the printer is now in the page state, the image
prints as it is received by the printer.
END (End): The END command terminates the image block state. The printer remains in the page state.
WT (Write Text): This command is repeated at this point in the sequence to illustrate that additional text
data can be added to the page. In addition to zero or more of the WT commands, graphics data, bar code
data, or additional image data could also be included on the page.
IO (Include Overlay): The IO command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current
page. This overlay now prints on the current page.
IPS (Include Page Segment): The IPS command causes a previously stored page segment to merge
onto the current page. An ID in this command specifies the selected page segment. The selected page
segment now prints on the current page.
EP (End Page): The EP command causes the printer to leave the page state and return to the home
state. We recommend that this command contain an acknowledgment request to verify successful
execution of the page data.
ACK (Acknowledgment Reply): If the previous command had the ARQ bit on, the printer responds with
the ACK reply to inform the host of successful execution of all the previous commands. This reply
indicates to the host that the printer has accepted all the page data, and all selected segments, images, or
overlays have successfully printed.
Chapter 4, “IPDS Programming Information,” on page 99 contains a more detailed description of all the
IPDS commands.
Error Handling
An exception (error) occurs when the printer detects an invalid or unsupported command, control, or
parameter value in the data stream received from the host. The IPDS error handling structure assigns a
unique exception code to each type of error. The printer sends these codes to the host, as sense bytes, in
the NACK (negative acknowledgment reply). See Chapter 5, “IPDS Exception Reporting Codes,” on page
199 for a description of the exception codes.
The host can control how the printer responds to the exceptions. The Exception Handling Control (see
“Exception Handling Control (EHC)” on page 126) order permits independent control over three exception
handling functions:
v The exceptions to report with a NACK reply
v The implementation of Alternate Exception Actions (AEA) when a valid parameter value is received but
not supported by the printer
v The termination or continuation procedure to follow if the alternate error action is not taken or if there is
no alternate error action associated with this error.
Chapter 3. Intelligent Printer Data Stream
97
The host application program can use the Exception Handling Control order to accomplish many specific
control capabilities necessary in data printing environments. For example, through the proper selection of
settings, it is possible to:
v Enforce control over printing of page information
v Enable automatic skipping of data types not supported by the printer
v Suppress the return of meaningless or redundant exception reports when alternate actions are
acceptable to the user.
The host can issue the Exception Handling Control order in any printer state. This allows the host to
manage exception processing at any level desired by the host application.
98
Programmer Manual
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
This chapter contains programming information for the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) commands.
The information is for the experienced programmer. A knowledge of data stream requirements,
hexadecimal numbering systems, and data processing terminology and concepts is assumed.
In addition to the information in this chapter, Chapter 3, “Intelligent Printer Data Stream,” on page 75
contains introductory information about the IPDS.
IPDS Initialization Defaults
When the printer power switch is initially turned On (|), various IPDS data stream parameters are set to
their initialization default values. These values remain in effect until overridden by specific data stream
commands from the host application program.
Table 4 contains the initialization defaults for this printer:
Table 4. IPDS Initialization Defaults
Default Description
Hex Value
Units Base Value
00 (10 in.)
Input Media Source
Determined by Operator Panel Paper Source setting
Width of the Physical Medium
MPP Value, Operator Panel Selection
Length of the Physical Medium
MPL Value, Operator Panel Selection
Width of the Logical Page in Units (X-Extent)
4A40 (Decimal 13.2 in. Width, 1440 Units Per In.)
Length of the Logical Page in Units (Y-Extent) 3DE0 (Decimal 11 in. Length, 1440 Units Per In.)
Ordered Data Flags
00 (Unordered Page, Block, and Text Flags)
X-Axis Orientation
0000 (0 Degrees)
Y-Axis Orientation
2D00 (90 Degrees)
Current I Text Position
0000
Current B Text Position
00A0 The Default Font Type Baseline (see Note 1)
X-Displacement
0000 Logical Page X-Displacement from the Physical Medium Origin
Y-Displacement
0000 Logical Page Y-Displacement from the Physical Medium Origin
Initial Inline Margin in Units
0000
Intercharacter Adjustment
0000
Baseline Increment
LPI value, Operator Panel Selection
Local Font ID
FF (see Note 3)
Text Color
Black
Code Page ID
Language value, Operator Panel selection
Font Quality
Print Quality value, Operator Panel selection
Font Type
Determined by Print Quality and CPI value Operator Panel selection
(see Note 2)
Exception Handling Control
Report Undefined Characters, Position Checks, and All Other
Exceptions. Do Not Take Alternate Exception Action. Terminate, Print
Page, and Go to Home State.
Notes:
1. Text printing on the first line requires an initial Y-displacement value of 00A0.
99
2. The printer default font is Gothic for DP and fast draft print quality and Courier for DP Text and NLQ
print quality. To determine the current values for CPI, language and quality, refer to the User’s Guide
for your printer.
3. When Local Font ID equals FF is used, the latest inline sequence established in “Logical Page
Descriptor (LPD)” on page 111 determines whether to print in a left-to-right or right-to-left sequence.
The default when the printer is powered on is the left-to-right sequence.
Parameter Values
The 4247 Printer allows flexibility in selecting various options to perform a wide range of functions.
Parameter values are initially set at the factory. The printer uses these values to format the page and to
control forms movement. The parameter values also allow the operator to select the printer address,
language, and print mode and compatibility options, and to turn the alarm on or off.
The printer can use the initial factory set values, or the operator can change these values. Any new value
selection made at the operator panel becomes the new parameter value immediately upon selection. If this
configuration is saved by the operator into the power-on custom set, this value remains as the new
parameter value, even after the printer power switch is turned Off (O).
The operator can select the following parameter values at the operator panel and change them:
v Characters per inch (CPI)
v Lines per inch (LPI)
v Maximum print position (MPP)
v Maximum page length (MPL) (See Note)
v Language
v Print quality
v Alarm (Enabled/Disabled)
v Graphics and Bar Code mode
v Left margin
v Emulation mode
Note: An MPL setting that results in a page length less than 762 mm (3 in.) causes a throughput
reduction. A maximum reduction of about 50 percent occurs at an MPL setting of one line per page.
The application program can override any of the parameter values, except for turning the alarm on or off
changing the address selection, changing the emulation determines what parameter value the printer uses:
1. The printer uses the program specified value.
2. If no program command has specified the value, the printer uses the current parameter value.
Command Format
All the printer commands use the following format:
Length
Command
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
The following chart shows the purpose of each field:
Byte
Field
Description
0-1
Length
Total Command Length, Including the Length Bytes
2-3
Command
Command Type
100
Programmer Manual
Data
Byte
Field
Description
4
Flag
Bit 0
0 = Acknowledge Response Not Required
1 = Acknowledge Response Required
Bit 1
0 = Correlation ID Not Included
1 = Correlation ID Included
Bit 2
0 = Acknowledge Reply Response is Complete
1 = Second Buffer of XOH - OPC Reply Required
Bit 3 - 6
Reserved (Always Zero)
Bit 7
0 = Persistent NACK is inactive
1 = Persistent NACK
5-6
Correlation ID
Identifier Name (Valid Only if Byte 4, Bit 1 Is On)
7-n
Data
Specific Subcommands, Operands, Parameters, and Data Fields as Appropriate for the
Given Command
Notes:
1. Bit numbering follows the EBCDIC convention with bit zero being the most significant bit.
2. If the Correlation ID field is not present (byte 4, bit 1 is zero), the data field starts at byte 5 instead of
byte 7.
3. Both positive or negative values fitting in the data fields are allowable. Negative values are in
twos-complement form.
4. Some bits or bytes in the data fields are Reserved. The printer does not always check the contents of
these fields. However, We recommend that such fields equal the specified value (if one exists) or zero.
5. The printer will not detect a condition where the specified command length (bytes 0 through 1)
exceeds the actual number of bytes received. If this occurs, the printer will not process the command
until the printer receives the specified number of bytes.
6. If the host wants to request the second buffer, the request must be the next command following the
request for the first buffer of an acknowledgment. However, it is not required that the host request the
second buffer of an acknowledgment.
Supported IPDS Command Codes for the 4247 Printer
Command
Hex Code
Description
SHS
D697
Set Home State
STM
D6E4
Sense Type and Model
NOP
D603
No Operation
LSS
D61E
Load Symbol Set
XOH
D68F
Execute Order Home State
XOA
D633
Execute Order Any State
BP
D6AF
Begin Page
EP
D6BF
End Page
LCC
D69F
Load Copy Control
LPD
D6CF
Logical Page Descriptor
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
101
Command
Hex Code
Description
LPP
D66D
Logical Page Position
WBCC
D680
Write Bar Code Control
WBC
D681
Write Bar Code
WGC
D684
Write Graphics Control
WG
D685
Write Graphics
WIC
D63D
Write Image Control
WI
D64D
Write Image
WT
D62D
Write Text
BO
D6DF
Begin Overlay
DO
D6EF
Deactivate Overlay
IO
D67D
Include Overlay
BPS
D65F
Begin Page Segment
DPS
D66F
Deactivate Page Segment
IPS
D67F
Include Page Segment
LE
D61D
Load Equivalence
LFE
D63F
Load Font Equivalence
DF
D64F
Deactivate Font
END
D65D
End
Command Function Sets
Function sets divide the printer commands into various categories. Each function set provides all the
necessary controls for its functional area. These function sets are:
v Device Control function set
v Text function set
v Image function set
v Graphics function set
v Bar Code function set
v Overlay function set
v Page Segment function set
v Loaded Font function set.
Device Control Function Set Commands
The Device Control function set contains the commands the printer uses to set up the page, communicate
device controls, and manage the Acknowledge protocol. The following commands are the device control
function set:
Command
Hex Code
Description
NOP
D603
No Operation
STM
D6E4
Sense Type and Model
SHS
D697
Set Home State
ACK
D6FF
Acknowledge Reply
LFE
D63F
Load Font Equivalence
LCC
D69F
Load Copy Control
102
Programmer Manual
Command
Hex Code
Description
LPP
D66D
Logical Page Position
LPD
D6CF
Logical Page Descriptor
BP
D6AF
Begin Page
DF
D64F
Deactivate Font
EP
D6BF
End Page
END
D65D
End
XOH
D68F
Execute Order Home State
XOA
D633
Execute Order Any State
The following pages describe the device control function set commands in detail.
No Operation (NOP)
Length
D603
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
An NOP command is valid in any printer state. The printer does not perform any operation as a result of
receiving this command. The printer ignores any data in this command.
Sense Type and Model (STM)
Length
D6E4
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
This command is valid in any state. The Sense Type and Model command requests the printer to respond
with device dependent information, which identifies the printer and the function it supports. The printer
returns this information to the host application program in the Special Data (SD) portion of the
Acknowledge Reply to the STM command.
Acknowledge Reply for Sense Type and Model
Length
D6FF
Flag
Correlation ID
Data
The format of the data field returned with the Acknowledge Reply is: acknowledgment type, page/copy
counters, and 6 bytes of general information, followed by a sequence of function set vectors identifying the
functions supported by this printer. The following chart shows the Data field:
Decimal
Hex
Description
0
0
01 (Acknowledgment Type)
1-4
1-4
Page/Copy Counters
5
5
FF (System/370 Convention)
6-7
6-7
Printer Product Number 4247 (or 4230 or 4224 if printer is in emulation mode)
8
8
Printer Model Number (see note)
9-10
9-A
0000 (Reserved)
11-40
B-28
Device Control Function Set Vector
41-54
29-36
Text Function Set Vector
55-66
37-42
Image Function Set Vector
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
103
Decimal
Hex
Description
67-78
43-4E
Graphics Function Set Vector
79-84
4F-54
Page Segment Function Set Vector
85-92
55-5C
Overlay Function Set Vector
93-98
5D-62
Loaded Font Function Set Vector
99-110
63-6E
Bar Code Function Set Vector
Note: The format for byte 8, the printer model number, is “03 - Ethernet Host Interface”
The function set vectors contain information relating to each specific command function set. The format of
each function set vector group follows:
Device Control Function Set Vector
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
11-12
B-C
001E
13-14
D-E
C4C3
Device Control Function Set Identifier
15-16
F-10
FF10
DC/1 Level Identifier
17-18
11-12
8010
XOA, Activate Printer Alarm
19-20
13-14
80F2
XOA, Discard Buffered Data
21-22
15-16
80F4
XOA, Request Resource List
23-24
17-18
80F6
XOA, Exception Handling
25-26
19-1A
80F8
XOA, Print Quality Control
27-28
1B-1C
9005
XOH, Erase Print Data
29-30
1D-1E
9007
XOH, Erase Font Data
31-32
1F-20
900D
XOH, Stack Received Pages
33-34
21-22
9015
XOH, Select Input Media Source
35-36
23-24
9017
XOH, Set Media Size
37-38
25-26
F001
XOH, DSC Mode Persistent NACK Handling Supported
39-40
27-28
FF02
Three Byte Sense Data Supported
Text Function Set Vector
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
41-42
29-2A
000E
Vector Length
43-44
2B-2C
D7E3
Composed Text Function Set Identifier
45-46
2D-2E
FF20
PT/2 Level Identifier
47-48
2F-30
1001
Unordered Text Supported
49-50
31-32
4020 (see note
1)
4000 (see note
2)
Limited Simulated Color Supported (see note 3)
51-52
33-34
5041
Text Orientation (2 for NLS)
53-54
35-36
1000
Optimum Performance if Text Data in Ordered Page
104
Programmer Manual
Notes:
1. 4247 native mode.
2. 4224 and 4230 emulation mode.
3. For Limited Simulated Color support, all valid but unsupported color values for text data are accepted
and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of unsupported color exceptions. In
the 4247 Printer, simulation of Color of Medium is done by printing in Color of Medium, except where
not possible because of different resolutions when text overlays graphics, image, or bar code. For
actual colors, all valid colors not listed in the above table are simulated in the 4247 Printer by printing
in black.
Image Function Set Vector
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
55-56
37-38
000C
Vector Length
57-58
39-3A
C9D4
Image Function Set Identifier
59-60
3B-3C
FF10
IM/1 Level Identifier
61-62
3D-3E
1001
Unordered Image Blocks Supported
63-64
3F-40
4022
Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported
65-66
41-42
1000
Optimum Performance if Image Blocks in Ordered Page
Graphics Function Set Vector
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
67-68
43-44
000C
Vector Length
69-70
45-46
E5C7
Graphics Function Set Identifier
71-72
47-48
FF20
GR/2 Level Identifier
73-74
49-4A
1001
Unordered Graphics Blocks Supported
75-76
4B-4C
4022
Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported
77-78
4D-4E
A080
Zero Degree (°) Orientation Supported
Page Segment Function Set Vector
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
79-80
4F-50
0006
Vector Length
81-82
51-52
D7E2
Page Segment Function Set Identifier
83-84
53-54
FF10
Page Segment Function Set Level Identifier
Overlay Function Set Vector
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
85-86
55-56
0008
Vector Length
87-88
57-58
D6D3
Overlay Function Set Identifier
89-90
59-5A
FF10
OL/1 Level Identifier
91-92
5B-5C
1505
5 Levels of Nested Overlays in Overlay State
Loaded Font Function Set Vector
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
105
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
93-94
5D-5E
0006
Vector Length
95-96
5F-60
C3C6
Loaded Font Function Set Identifier
97-98
61-62
FF20
Symbol Sets
Bar Code Function Set Vector
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
99-100
63-64
000C
Vector Length
101-102
65-66
C2C3
Bar Code Function Set Identifier
103-104
67-68
FF10
BC/1 Level Identifier
105-106
69-6A
1001
Unordered Bar Code Blocks Supported
107-108
6B-6C
4022 (see note
1)
4002 (see note
2)
Limited Simulated Color and Color of Medium Supported (see
note 3)
109-110
6D-6E
A0C0
0°, 90° Orientation Supported
Notes:
1. 4247 native mode.
2. 4224 and 4230 emulation mode.
3. For Limited Simulated Color support, all valid but unsupported color values for text data are accepted
and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of unsupported color exceptions. In
the 4247 Printer, simulation of Color of Medium is done by printing in Color of Medium, except where
not possible because of different resolutions when text overlays graphics, image, or bar code. For
actual colors, all valid colors not listed in the above table are simulated in the 4247 Printer by printing
in black.
Set Home State (SHS)
Length
D697
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
This command is valid in any state. When the printer receives the Set Home State command, the current
page ends, all buffered data prints, and the printer returns to the home state. If the printer receives this
command while already in the home state, the printer treats this command as a No Operation command.
Acknowledge Reply (ACK)
Length
D6FF
00
Length
D6FF
40
DATA
or
Correlation ID
DATA
The printer uses the Acknowledge Reply to return device status, sense information, and any additionally
requested information back to the host application program. The application program uses the
Acknowledge data to maintain control of the printing application and to begin error recovery actions when
necessary. The printer sends an acknowledgment:
v Whenever the acknowledgment required bit in the flag byte is on
106
Programmer Manual
v Whenever the printer detects a command stream error or device error and a negative response must be
sent.
A negative response has priority over a positive response.
If the printer can identify the command and the command has a correlation ID, the Acknowledge Reply
contains a correlation ID that matches the command.
The maximum length of this command is 255 bytes. If there is a five-byte command header (no correlation
ID present), the data field can be up to 250 bytes long. If a correlation ID is present in the header, the
maximum data field length is 248 bytes. The Acknowledge Reply data field contains the acknowledgment
type, page/copy counters, and a Special Data (SD) area. The printer loads the Special Data area with the
appropriate data when one of the following occurs:
1. The printer receives one of the following information request commands:
v Sense Type and Model
v Obtain Printer Characteristics
v Request Resource List.
2. An error occurs. Under this condition, the printer loads the special data area with the sense bytes and
sends a negative acknowledgment (NACK) to the host.
The format of the Acknowledge Reply data field follows:
Decimal
Hex
0
0
Value
Description
Acknowledgement Type
00
Positive - No Special Data (SD)
01
Positive - Sense Type/Model (STM) Data in SD
04
Positive - Request Resource List (RRL) in SD
06
Positive - Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC) in SD
80
Negative - Sense Bytes in SD
1-4
1-4
XX...XX
5-n
5-n
XX...XX
Load Font Equivalence (LFE)
Length
D63F
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Load Font Equivalence command maps font identifiers. The fonts do not have to exist in the printer
when the printer receives this command.
In the home state, this command creates a new font equivalence record that completely replaces the
current LFE record. In the page state:
v The font equivalence entries in this command add to the current LFE entries, or
v If identical local font identifiers (byte 1) exist, this command overlays the current LFE entries.
In the page segment or overlay state, a received LFE is stored as part of the page segment or overlay,
and it does not process until the Include Page Segment or Include Overlay command is received.
The font equivalences for a given page are those that are in effect when the Begin Page command
processes plus those added in the page state. There is a maximum of 20 different loaded font ID/print
quality combinations defined in home or page state. Page segments use the font equivalence tables active
at the time the Include Page Segment command processes. In addition, the LFEs that were stored as part
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
107
of the page segment add to the font equivalence tables during the include page segment process up to a
maximum of 20 loaded font ID/print quality combinations.
Each Begin Overlay command starts the overlay with the loaded font IDs currently defined and will add its
LFE entries during the overlay’s definition up to a maximum of 20 loaded font ID/print quality combinations
total. On a logical page, the sum of each included overlay’s number of loaded font ID/print quality
combinations (whether included through Include Overlay or through Load Copy Control commands) added
to the number of loaded font ID/print quality combinations on the logical page cannot exceed 58.
Each font equivalence entry is 16 bytes, in the following format:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0
0
00-FE
Local Font ID
FF
Reserved (4248 mode) (See Note 4)
0001 - 7EFF
Font Host Assigned ID (See Note 3)
1-2
1-2
3-4
3-4
5-6
5-6
0000
Reserved
7-8
7-8
XXXX
Code Page ID (See Code Page ID Chart)
FFFF
Use the Printer Defined Default Code Page ID
XXXX
Font (Style) ID (See Font ID Chart)
FFFF
Use the Printer Defined Default Font
9-10
9-A
Font Inline Sequence (Ignored)
11-12
B-C
0000
Reserved
13
D
00
Reserved
14
E
15
F
Font Attributes
Bit 0
Font Is Present in Printer (See Notes 1 and 2)
Bit 1-2
Reserved
Bit 3
Double High (See Notes 5 and 6)
Bit 4
Italicized Print (See Note 6)
Bit 5
Double Strike
Bit 6
Bold
Bit 7
Double Wide
00
Reserved (See Note 2)
Notes:
1. If the Font Present in Printer bit is on, this indicates to the printer that the font has previously been
downloaded or is permanently resident. If this bit is off, this indicates to the printer that the font is not
present in the printer and will, presumably, be downloaded (by an LSS command) prior to selection for
printing.
2. Additional font equivalence entries, each 16 bytes long, can follow this entry, using the same format.
No more than 20 different loaded font ID/print quality combinations can be active at a given time.
3. Use the same Loaded Font ID when using the same Font ID and Code Page ID for several Local IDs.
This saves storage space and font allocation time in the printer.
4. Local ID byte 0 may use any value 1 to FE. A value of FF is supported if the printer is in 4224
Emulation Mode for compatibility, but is not recommended. See “Set Character Set” on page 167,
“Logical Page Descriptor (LPD)” on page 111, and “Printer Initialization and Preparation Sequence” on
page 93 for more information regarding Local IDs equal to FF.
5. A double high font can be printed only on a page that is unordered. See “Logical Page Descriptor
(LPD)” on page 111 for more information.
108
Programmer Manual
6. A font cannot be both double high and italicized.
Code Page ID Values
Hex Value Code Page
Hex Value Code Page
0025
USA/Canada
01A4
Arabic
0100
International Set 1
01A7
Greek
0104
Canadian French
01A8
Hebrew
0111
Austria/Germany
01B5
PC Character Sets 1 and 2
0112
Belgium
01F4
International Set 1
0113
Brazil
0323
Hebrew (old)
0115
Denmark/Norway
033F
Portugal (Alternate)
0116
Finland/Sweden
0341
Korean
0118
Italy
0346
Thai
0119
Japan (English)
0366
Latin 2/ROECE
011A
Portugal
0367
Icelandic
011C
Spain/Latin America
036B
Greek (Old)
011D
United Kingdom
0373
Cyrillic (Old)
011E
Austria/Germany (Alternate)
037A
Yugoslav
011F
Denmark/Norway (Alternate)
037C
OCR-A (NLQ Only)
0120
Finland/Sweden (Alternate)
037D
OCR-B NLQ Only)
0121
Spain (Alternate)
03EA
DCF Compatibility
0122
Japan/Katakana
0401
Cyrillic Multilingual
0125
APL (4224 Compatibility)
0402
Turkish
0129
France
0449
Farsi
0136
APL
0458
Baltic Multilingual
0462
Estonian
0154
OCR (4224 Compatibility) NLQ only
1149
euro 924
Font ID Values
Hex Value Font ID
Hex Value Font ID
001A
10 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft and DP Quality)
00A0
Proportional spacing, Gothic (DP Text and
NLQ)
000B
10 CPI, Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
00DE
15 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft and DP Quality)
0013
10 CPI, OCR-A (NLQ)
00DF
15 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
0003
10 CPI, OCR-B (NLQ)
0190
16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP Quality)
0055
12 CPI, Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
0057
12 CPI, Gothic (Fast Draft and DP Quality)
Notes:
1. The Graphic Character Set Global (GCSGID) portion of the Global Font ID is ignored by the printer.
2. All combinations of CPGID and FGID are valid with the following exceptions:
v OCR-A Code Page and FGID 0013 are only valid in combination together.
v OCR-B Code Page and FGID 0003 are only valid in combination together.
v The following Code Pages are not available with FGID X'00A0' (PSM)
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
109
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
290 Katakana
293 APL (4224)
310 APL
420 Arabic
833 Korean
838 Thai
880 Cyrillic (Old)
1002 DCF Compatibility
1025 Cyrillic Multilingual
1097 Farsi
Load Copy Control (LCC)
Length
D69F
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Load Copy Control command controls the production of output from subsequently received input
logical pages. The LCC command is only valid while the printer is in the home state. This command
remains in effect until the printer receives the next LCC.
The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0
0
02-24
Copy Subgroup Count (See Note 1)
1
1
01
Number of Copies
2-n
2-n
XXXX
Copy Modification (See Description)
C100 = Simplex
D101 - D1FF = Suppression ID
E101 - E1FE = Overlay ID
Notes:
1. Group Count is the number of bytes in this group definition entry. Valid ranges are from 2 to 36 (X'02'
to X'24') in units of 2.
2. Subsequent LCC commands nullify previous Overlay IDs or Suppression IDs from previous LCC
commands.
Copy Modification is an optional modification keyword list made up of two byte controls:
v The first byte is the keyword.
v The second byte is the associated parameter for this keyword.
Valid values for copy modification are:
v C100 - Simplex Printing
v D101 to D1FF - Suppression ID
v E101 to E1FE - Overlay ID.
Simplex Printing is printing on only one side of the document. This is the only type of printing the 4247
Printer can perform.
Suppression ID allows the later suppression of text data. The first byte of the keyword, D1, specifies this
keyword as suppression. The second byte of the keyword specifies a suppression identifier. Valid
suppression ID values are 01 to FF. Print suppression occurs as follows:
1. The LCC command specifies one or more suppression ID values. (Each ID must begin with the
keyword - D1.)
110
Programmer Manual
2. The printer receives a Begin Suppression control (inside a Write Text command) with a suppression ID
that matches a value in the LCC command.
3. All subsequent text data does not print (text suppression), until the printer receives an End
Suppression control (inside a Write Text command) with the same ID.
4. All text data received after the End Suppression control prints normally.
Overlay ID allows later processing of specified overlays. The first byte of the keyword, E1, specifies this
keyword as overlay. The second byte of the keyword specifies an overlay identifier. Valid overlay ID values
are 01 to FE. An overlay processes as follows:
1. The LCC command specifies one or more overlay ID values. (Each ID must begin with the keyword E1.)
2. The previously stored overlay with this specified identifier merges onto the following page at its
reference corner.
Logical Page Descriptor (LPD)
Length
D6CF
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
This command establishes the print characteristics for the logical page. The Logical Page Descriptor
command is only valid in the home state. See “Set Media Size (SMS)” on page 115 for physical medium
size information.
The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0
0
00
Units Base Value Equals 10 in.
1
1
00
Reserved
2-3
2-3
05AD-7FFF
X Units Per Unit Base Value
4-5
4-5
05A0-7FFF
Y Units Per Unit Base Value
6
6
00
Reserved
7-9
7-9
000001 007FFF (See
Note 1)
Width of Page in Units
10
A
00
Reserved
11-13
B-D
000001 007FFF (See
Note 1)
Length of Page in Units
14
E
00
Reserved
15
F
Bit 0
Bits 1-7
Bit 0
Ordered Page Flag (See Note 2)
0
Unordered Page
1
Ordered Page
Bits 1-7
Reserved
16-17
10-11
0000
Reserved
18-21
12-15
00000000
Reserved
22-23
16-17
0000
Reserved
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
111
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
24-25
18-19
0000
I-Axis Orientation of 0 Degrees
5A00
I-Axis Orientation of 180 Degrees (See Note 5)
FFFF
Printer Default (0 Degrees) (See Note 3)
2D00
B-Axis Orientation of 90 Degrees
FFFF
Printer Default (90 Degrees)
26-27
1A-1B
29-29
1C-1D
0000-FFFF
Initial I Displacement in Units (See Note 4)
30-31
1E-1F
0000-FFFF
Initial B Displacement in Units
32-33
20-21
0000-FFFF
Initial Inline Margin in Units
FFFF
Printer Default (Use Initialization Value) (See Note 4)
0000
Intercharacter Increment
0000-7FFF
Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)
34-35
22-23
36-37
24-25
0000
Reserved
38-39
26-27
0000-7FFF
Baseline Increment
FFFF
Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)
00-FE
Local Font ID
FF
Printer Default (Use Initialization Value)
0000
Printer Default (Black)
0008
Black
FF00
Printer Default (Black)
FF07
Printer Default (Black)
FFFF
Printer Default (Black)
40
41-42
28
29-2A
Notes:
1. The LPD command accepts logical page values from 0001 to 7FFF for this parameter. However,
attempts to print outside the intersection of the physical medium (as defined by the Set Media Size
command) and the logical page result in an error.
2. If the Ordered Page Flag is on, this indicates to the printer that subsequent data is in order and can
print as it is received. If page data is unordered, printing is deferred (buffered), because the printer
must place the received data in the proper sequence.
3. The high-order 9 bits of the two byte fields 18-19 and 1A-1B are interpreted as a 9-bit binary value that
describes the orientation of the X and Y axes.
4. If bytes 1C-1D and bytes 20-21 are all 0, each line begins at the leftmost print position for 0, 90
orientation and rightmost print position for 180, 90 orientation.
5. The 4247 Printer can print right-to-left by selecting a 180, 90 degree orientation within the Load Page
Descriptor command or within the Set Text Orientation control sequence. The 4247 Printer forces an
inline sequence of 180 degrees for the default font to maintain upright printing when right-to-left
printing is selected.
Figure 12 on page 113 shows how the Logical Page Descriptor command defines the logical page.
112
Programmer Manual
Figure 12. Using the Load Page Descriptor Command to Specify the Logical Page
Logical Page Position (LPP)
Length
D66D
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
This command positions the upper left corner of the logical page (defined by the Logical Page Descriptor
control) with respect to the physical medium. The Logical Page Position command is only valid in the
home state.
Figure 13 shows the LPP command positioning the logical page on the physical medium.
Figure 13. Using the Logical Page Position Command to Position
The physical medium dimensions do not change. The X and Y coordinates of the LPP command specify
the location of the Logical Page Reference Corner relative to the corresponding corner of the physical
medium. These coordinates are expressed in terms of the units in effect at the time the LPP command is
received.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
113
Only positive values are valid for the data field. The format of the data field (DATA) for this command is:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0
0
00
Reserved
1-3
1-3
000000-007FFF X Displacement
4
4
00
5-7
5-7
000000-007FFF Y Displacement
8-9
8-9
0000
Reserved
Reserved
Deactivate Font (DF)
Length
D64F
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Deactivate Font command provides a means for the control unit to delete one or more fonts from the
printer. The DATA field contains the following information:
End Page (EP)
Length
D6BF
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
This command causes the printer to return to the home state from the page, page segment, or overlay
state. If the printer is in the page state, the printer completes any deferred printing for the current page
and advances the forms to the top of the next page. Zero or more bytes of data may be transmitted with
this command but are ignored.
End (END)
Length
D65D
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The End command is the ending control for a graphics block, image block, or bar code block state. This
command completes a series of write image, write graphics, or write bar code commands. This command
does not transmit any data. At the completion of this command, the printer leaves the block state and
returns to the page, overlay, or page segment state.
Execute Order Home State (XOH)
Length
D68D
Subcommand
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
Subcommand Data
The Execute Order Home State command identifies a set of subcommands (orders) for formatting physical
mediums of data, printing groups of physical mediums, and managing the fonts, page segments, and
overlays. This command is only valid while the printer is in the home state.
The data field contains a two byte order, called the subcommand, and a subcommand data field. There is
only one subcommand for a single XOH command. The subcommand data field contains parameters for
that order.
The valid orders for the XOH command for the 4247 Printer are:
114
Programmer Manual
Order
Description
0100
Print Buffered Data (PBD)
0500
Erase Residual Print Data (ERPD)
0700
Erase Residual Font Data (ERFD)
0D00
Stack Received Pages (SRP)
1500
Select Input Media Source (SIMS)
1700
Set Media Size (SMS)
F300
Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC)
Print Buffered Data (PBD)
This subcommand causes the printer to print all buffered data pages prior to sending the Acknowledgment
Reply, if requested. The print buffer clears at the completion of this command.
Erase Residual Print Data (ERPD)
This is a data security and privacy order. This order causes the printer to first complete a Print Buffered
Data order, then delete all page segments, overlays, and buffered page data (text, image, graphics, and
bar codes) from the printer storage.
Erase Residual Font Data (ERFD)
This is a data security and privacy order. This order causes the printer to first complete a Print Buffered
Data order, then delete all font information from the printer storage.
Stack Received Pages (SRP)
This command is a synchronizing command. It is accepted by the 4247 Printer, but it is functionally a
no-op because of the simple paper path.
Select Input Media Source (SIMS)
The Select Input Media Source (SIMS) subcommand selects an input media source ID and indirectly
selects the input for subsequent sheets. This subcommand applies to the sheet that the next received
page is printed on.
The size of the input media can be specified explicitly by the Set Media Size command or implicitly by the
assumptions the printer makes about the size of the media in the input media source selected by this
subcommand.
The set of valid Media Source ID values depend on what paper sources are currently installed. The
following tables give the valid values for the configurations described in each table.
If the printer is in 4247 mode or an emulation mode with one or two tractors installed, valid values are:
Table 5. Front and Rear with no linking
Bytes 0-1
X'1500'
Select Input Media Source Order Code
Byte 2
X'00'
Front Paper Source
X'01'
Rear Paper Source (if configured)
X'FF'
Printer Default Bin
Set Media Size (SMS)
The Set Media Size subcommand specifies the size of the physical medium.
Refer to your printer's User’s Guide for information on setting operator media size input.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
115
Figure 14. Using the Set Media Size Command to Specify the Physical Medium
The data field for the Set Media Size subcommand has the following format:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0
0
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
01
Unit Base (10 cm.)
5A0-7FFF
Units per Base Value (per 10 in.)
1626-7FFF
Units per Base Value (per 10 cm)
000A-4A40
X-Extent of the Physical Medium in Units
FFFF
Use Current MPP
000A-7FFF
Y-Extent of the Physical Medium in Units
FFFF
Use Current MPL
1-2
1-2
3-4
3-4
5-6
5-6
Obtain Printer Characteristics (OPC)
This subcommand is a host request for information about the current printer environment characteristics.
The printer responds by placing the requested information in the Special Data (SD)area of a subsequent
Acknowledge Reply. The printer reply is a series of self-defining fields describing the printer
characteristics. The OPC data is returned in more than one response buffer. The self-defining fields
contain specific information about the printer characteristics. If the ARQ flag was not set on for the XOH
command containing this order, then this order is equivalent to a No Operation.
Acknowledge Reply for Obtain Printer Characteristics:
Length
D6FF
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
The following charts describe the self-defining data fields.
116
Programmer Manual
DATA
Acknowledge Type and Counters:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0
0
06
Acknowledgement Type (4 byte)
1-4
1-4
XXXXXXXX
Page/Copy Counters
Printable Area Self-Defining Field: The page extents are set at initialization time to reflect the operator
panel settings. The Set Media Size command can change the page extents. For 4247 mode and all
emulation modes with one or two tractors installed:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0018
Length of this Field
2-3
2-3
0001
Printable Area ID
Media Source ID (See notes)
4
4
00
Front Continuous Forms
01
Rear Continuous Form
5
5
00
Reserved
6
6
00
00 Unit Base (10 in.)
7
7
00
Reserved
8-9
8-9
3840
Units per Base Value (Decimal 14400 per 10 in.)
10-11
A-B
XXXX
Current Forms X-Extent
12-13
C-D
XXXX
Current Forms Y-Extent
14-15
E-F
0000
Printable Area X-Offset
16-17
10-11
0000
Printable Area Y-Offset
18-19
12-13
XXXX
Printable Area X-Extent (from Page Extent)
20-21
14-15
XXXX
Printable Area Y-Extent from Page Extent
22-23
16-17
XX00
Input Media Source Characteristics
Bit 0
0 =No Duplex
Bit 1,2
01=Continuous Forms
Bit 3
1 =Media Source Available
Bit 4
0 =Reserved (Always 0)
Bit 5
0 =Reserved (Always 0)
Bit 6
0 =Reserved (Always 0)
Bit 7
0 =Reserved (Always 0)
Note: The Printable Area Self-Defining Field is returned once for each installed media source; that is, front
and rear tractor.
Symbol-Set Support Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0046
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0002
Symbol Set Support ID
4
4
10
Length of Self-Defining Parameter
5
5
01
Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch NLQ)
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
117
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
6
6
14
X-Box Size in Pels (20)
7
7
12
Y-Box Size in Pels (18)
8
8
00
Reserved
9
9
02
Repeating Group Length
10-11
A-B
000B
10 CPI Courier (NLQ)
12-13
C-D
0055
12 CPI Courier (NLQ)
14-15
E-F
00DF
15 CPI Courier (NLQ)
16-17
10-11
0013
10 CPI OCR-A (NLQ)
18-19
12-13
0003
10 CPI OCR-B (NLQ)
20
14
0C
Length of Self Defining Parameter
21
15
01
Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch DP Text)
22
16
14
X-Box Size in Pels (20)
23
17
09
Y-Box Size in Pels (9)
24
18
00
Reserved
25
19
02
Repeating Group Length
26-27
1A-1B
000B
10 CPI Courier (DP Text)
28-29
1C-1D
0055
12 CPI Courier (DP Text)
30-31
1E-1F
00DF
15 CPI Courier (DP Text)
32
20
0E
Length of Self Defining Parameter
33
21
01
Fixed Box Size Support (Fixed Pitch DP Text)
34
22
A0
X-Box Size in Pels (20)
35
23
09
Y-Box Size in Pels (9)
36
24
00
Reserved
37
25
02
Repeating Group Length
38-39
26-27
001A
10 CPI Gothic (DP)
40-41
28-29
0057
12 CPI Gothic (DP)
42-43
2A-2B
00DE
15 CPI Gothic (DP)
44-45
2C-2D
0190
16.7 CPI Gothic (DP)
46
2E
0C
Length of Self Defining Parameter
47
2F
02
Variable Box Size Support (PSM NLQ)
48
30
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
49
31
00
Reserved
50-51
32-33
0960
Units per Unit Base (2400)
52
34
FF
Maximum X-Box Size in Pels (255)
53
35
12
Y-Box Size in Pels (18)
54
36
00
Reserved
55
37
02
Repeating Group Length
56-57
38-39
00A0
PSM Essay (NLQ)
58
3A
0C
Length of Self-Defining Parameter
59
3B
02
Variable Box Size Support (PSM DP Text)
60
3C
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
118
Programmer Manual
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
61
3D
00
Reserved
62-63
3E-3F
0960
Units per Unit Base (2400)
64
40
FF
Maximum X-Box Size in Pels (255)
65
41
09
Y-Box Size in Pels (9)
66
42
00
Reserved
67
43
02
Repeating Group Length
67-68
44-45
00A0
PSM Essay (DP Text)
Image/Coded-Font Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
000A
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0003
Image/Coded-Font Resolution ID
4
4
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
5
5
00
Reserved
6-7
6-7
05A0
X Pels per Base Value (Decimal 1440 per 10 in.)
8-9
8-9
05A0
Y Pels per Base Value (Decimal 1440 per 10 in.)
Storage Pools Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
000F
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0004
Storage Pools ID
4
4
0B
Length of Self-Defining Parameter
5
5
01
Triplet ID
6
6
00
Storage Pool ID
7-10
7-A
0006D000
Size of Storage Pool when empty
11-14
B-E
00000000
Reserved
Foreground Color Support Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0006
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0005
Foreground Color
4-5
4-5
0008
Black Ribbon
Installed Features Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0006
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0006
Installed Features ID
4-5
4-5
0B00
Continuous Forms Output
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
119
Available Features Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0006
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0007
Available Features
4-5
4-5
0B00
Continuous Forms Output
Resident-Symbol Set Support Self-Defining Field: For Ethernet interfaces:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
00B6
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0008
Resident Symbol Set Support
4
4
6A
Length of this field
5
5
01
Code Page Support
6
6
56
Length of Code Page List
7
7
02
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
8-9
8-9
01A7
CP423 Greek (Old)
10-11
A-B
01A8
CP424 Hebrew (New)
12-13
C-D
01B5
CP437 PC Extended
14-15
E-F
0323
CP089 Hebrew (Old)
16-17
10-11
0366
CP870 Latin 2/ROECE
18-19
12-13
0367
CP871 Icelandic
20-21
14-15
036B
CP875 Greek (New)
22-23
16-17
0402
CP1026 Turkish
24-25
18-19
0100
CP256 International #1
26-27
1A-1B
01F4
CP500 International #2
28-29
1C-1D
0025
CP037 USA/Canada
30-31
1E-1F
0104
CP260 Canadian French
32-33
20-21
0111
CP273 Austrian/German
34-35
22-23
0112
CP274 Belgian
36-37
24-25
0113
CP275 Brazilian
38-39
26-27
0115
CP277 Danish/Norwegian
40-41
28-29
0116
CP278 Finnish/Swedish
42-43
2A-2B
0118
CP280 Italian
44-45
2C-2D
0119
CP281 Japanese English
46-47
2E-2F
011A
CP282 Portuguese
48-49
30-31
011C
CP284 Spanish and Spanish-Speaking
50-51
32-33
011D
CP285 English (UK)
52-53
34-35
0129
CP297 French (Alternate)
54-55
36-37
011E
CP286 Austrian/German (Alternate)
56-57
38-39
0121
CP289 Spanish (Alternate)
58-59
3A-3B
0120
CP288 Finnish/Swedish (Alternate)
60-61
3C-3D
011F
CP287 Danish/Norwegian (Alternate)
120
Programmer Manual
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
62-63
3E-3F
033F
CP831 Portuguese (Alternate)
64-65
40-41
037A
CP890 Yugoslav
66-67
42-43
0458
CP1112 Baltic Multilingual
68-69
44-45
0462
CP1122 Estonian
70-71
46-47
0474
CP1140 USA/Canada + euro
72-73
48-49
0475
CP1141 Austrian/German + euro
74-75
4A-4B
0476
CP1142 Danish/Norwegian +euro
76-77
4C-4D
0477
CP1143 Finnish/Swedish + euro
78-79
4E-4F
0478
CP1144 Italian + euro
80-81
50-51
0479
CP1145 Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro
82-83
52-53
047A
CP1146 English UK + euro
84-85
54-55
047B
CP1147 French + euro
86-87
56-57
047C
CP1148 International 5 / Beligian New + euro
88-89
58-59
047D
CP1149 Icelandic + euro
90-91
5A-5B
039C
CP924 Latin 9 ISO 8859 +euro
92
5C
12
Length of Font ID List
93
5D
02
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
94-95
5E-5F
000B
10 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
96-97
60-61
0055
12 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
98-99
62-63
00DF
15 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
100-101
64-65
001A
10 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
102-103
66-67
0057
12 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
104-105
68-69
00DE
15 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
106-107
6A-6B
0190
16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
108-109
6C-6D
00A0
PSM ESSAY (DP Text and NLQ)
110
6E
28
Total Length of CP List
111
6F
01
CP Support
112
70
16
Length of CP List
113
71
02
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
114-115
72-73
0122
CP290 Japanese Katakana
116-117
74-75
01A4
CP420 Arabic
118-119
76-77
0346
CP838 Thai
120-121
78-79
0370
CP880 Cyrillic (Old)
122-123
7A-7B
0401
CP1025 Cyrillic Multinational
124-125
7C-7D
03EA
CP1002 DCF Compatibility (Release 2)
126-127
7E-7F
0125
CP293 APL (4224 Compatibility)
128-129
80-81
0136
CP310 APL
130-131
82-83
0341
CP833 Korean
132-133
84-85
0449
CP1097 Farsi
134
86
10
Length of Font ID List
135
87
02
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
121
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
136-137
88-89
000B
10 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
138-139
8A-8B
0055
12 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
140-141
8C-8D
00DF
15 CPI Courier (DP Text and NLQ)
142-143
8E-8F
001A
10 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
144-145
90-91
0057
12 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
146-147
92-93
00DE
15 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
148-149
94-95
0190
16.7 CPI Gothic (Fast Draft and DP)
150
96
0C
Total Length of CP List
151
97
01
CP Support
152
98
04
Length of CP List
153
99
02
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
154-155
9A-9B
0154
CP 340,OCR (4224 compatibility)
156
9C
06
Length of Font ID List
157
9D
02
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
158-159
9E-9F
0013
OCR-B Quality
160-161
A0-A1
0003
OCR-A Quality
162
A2
0A
Total Length of CP List
163
A3
01
CP Support
164
A4
04
Length of CP List
165
A5
02
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
166-167
A6-A7
037C
CP 892,OCR-A
168
A8
04
Length of Font ID List
169
A9
01
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
170-171
AA-AB
0013
OCR-A Quality
172
AC
0A
Total Length of CP List
173
AD
01
CP Support
174
AE
04
Length of CP List
175
AF
02
Length of CP Repeating Group Entry
176-177
B0-B1
037D
CP 893,OCR-B
178
B2
04
Length of Font ID List
179
B3
02
Length of Font ID Repeating Group Entry
180-181
B4-B5
0003
OCR-B Quality
Print Quality Support Self-Defining Field: These values apply if Host Fast Draft is disabled in the
printer configuration menu:
Note: Host Fast Draft is only available for the 4247 Z03 printer model.
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0007
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0009
Print Quality ID
4
4
01
DP Quality
122
Programmer Manual
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
5
5
56
DP Text Quality
6
6
AB
NLQ
These values apply if Host Fast Draft is enabled in the printer configuration menu:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0008
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
0009
Print Quality ID
4
4
01
Fast Draft Quality
5
5
2B
DP Quality
6
6
56
DP Text Quality
7
7
AB
NLQ
XOA RRL RT & RIDF Support Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0006
Length
2-3
2-3
000A
RRL Resource Type Self Defining Field
4-5
4-5
FF00
All Resources as Host Assigned Resource ID
Common Bar Code Type Self-Defining Field:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0007
Length of this field
2-3
2-3
000E
RRL Resource Type Self Defining Field
4
4
0D
Codabar Modifier Byte Options X'01' and X'02'
5
5
11
Code 128 Modifier Byte Options X'02'
6
6
18
POSTNET Modifier Byte Options X'00' - X'03'
Product Identifier Self-Defining Field: If the printer is in 4247 native or 4230 Emulation Mode:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
003C
Length
2-3
2-3
0013
Product Identifier
4
4
38
Length of this ID
5-6
5-6
0001
4247 with Page Counter Fix ID
7-12
7-C
F0F0F4F2F4F7 Device Type
13-15
D-F
E5F0F3
Model Number
16-18
10-12
C9C2D4
Manufacturer
19-20
13-14
F0F1
Plant of Manufacture
21-32
15-20
XX...XX
Sequence Number
33-34
21-22
0000
Tag
35-43
23-2B
XX...XX
EC Level
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
123
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
44-59
2C-3B
XX...XX
Device Specific
If the printer is in 4224 emulation mode:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
003F
Length
2-3
2-3
0013
Product Identifier
4
4
03
Length of this Field
5-6
5-6
0000
4224 with Page Counter Fix ID
7
7
38
Length of this Field
8-9
8-9
0001
4224 Product Identifier Parameter ID
10-15
A-F
F0F0F4F2F4F7 Device Type
16-18
10-12
E5F0F3
Model Number
19-21
13-15
C9C2D4
Manufacturer
22-23
16-17
F0F1
Plant of Manufacture
24-35
18-23
XX...XX
Sequence Number
36-37
24-25
0000
Tag
38-46
26-2E
XX...XX
EC Level
47-62
2F-3E
XX...XX
Device Specific
Execute Order Any State (XOA)
Length
D633
Subcommand
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
Subcommand Data
The Execute Order Any State command identifies a set of subcommands (orders) that take effect
immediately, regardless of the current printer command state. This command is valid in any state.
Each data field contains a two byte order (subcommand), followed by a zero or more bytes of parameters
for that order. There is only one subcommand for a single XOA command.
The valid orders for the XOA command are:
Order
Description
1000
Activate Printer Alarm (APA)
F200
Discard Buffered Data (DBD)
F400
Request Resource List (RRL)
F600
Exception Handling Control (EHC)
F800
Print Quality Control (PQC)
124
Programmer Manual
Activate Printer Alarm (APA)
The XOA Activate Printer Alarm (APA) subcommand signals the printer to activate the alarm mechanism.
As long as the printers alarm function is enabled, the alarm will be turned on in response to this command.
It will remain on until Stop is pressed.
After processing this command, the printer continues to process the incoming IPDS data stream. If
synchronization of actions is desired, the application must ensure if the appropriate commands are sent to
the printer.
Discard Buffered Data (DBD)
The XOA Discard Buffered Data (DBD) subcommand deletes all buffered data from the printer storage and
returns the printer to home state. Any data currently being received is deleted. If this order is syntactically
correct, no exceptions can result from its execution. The DBD order does not affect completely received
resources, such as fonts, page segments, and overlays; however, if the printer is in any resource state, the
printer deletes the partial resource before returning to home state. If the printer is in Ordered Page Mode,
the subcommand prints all buffered data to the point of the command, does a page eject, and returns to
Home State.
The DBD order is a synchronizing command. Any command following a synchronizing command is not
processed until all preceding commands have been completely processed. Also, the ACK of the DBD order
is not returned until DBD processing is complete.
Request Resource List (RRL)
This subcommand is a request from the host application program for the printer to identify resources
currently allocated in the printer. The printer responds by placing the requested information in the Special
Data (SD) area of a subsequent Acknowledge Reply.
The subcommand and subcommand data field has the following format:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
F400
RRL Order Code
2
2
FF
Device Defined Ordering
3-4
3-4
XXXX
Entry Continuation Indicator (See Note 1)
5
5
03 - FF
Entry Length
6
6
7
7
Resource Type Requested (See Note 2)
01
Single Byte Fonts
04
Page Segments
05
Overlays
FF
All Resources
00
Resource ID Format
Host-Assigned Resource ID
8-9
8-9
XXXX
Resource ID (See Note 2)
Notes:
1. If the entire resource list does not fit in the Special Data Area of the Acknowledge Reply, continuation is
necessary which the 4247 Printer will indicate using the Acknowledgement Continuation bit in the flag byte of the
Acknowledge Reply. If the host requests Acknowledgement Continuation by sending a command with ARQ bit
and the Continuation bit set, the printer will complete the RRL reply using Acknowledgement Continuation. If the
host requests RRL continuation (by sending an RRL command with nonzero values in bytes 3 and 4), the printer
will use continuation, the printer will default to RRL continuation.
2. For overlays, segments, and symbol sets, this is their two byte ID. This field is omitted when the resource type
equals All.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
125
Acknowledge Reply for Request Resource List:
Length
D6FF
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The format of the resource list returned with the Acknowledge Reply is as follows:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0
0
FF
Unordered List
1
1
01
End of List
06
Length of this Entry
2
2
3
3
Resource Type
00
Resource Size equals 0. The queried Resource Type, ID
Format, or ID is unknown, unsupported, or inconsistent.
01
Deletable Single Byte Coded Font
04
Deletable Overlays
05
Resource Size equals 0
FF
The List Query requested is not supported.
01
Resource ID Format (RIDF)
Host-Assigned Resource ID
4
4
5-6
5-6
Resource Size Indicator
00
Resource Not Present
01
Resource Present
XXXX
Resource ID
Note: Bytes 2 - 6 repeat for each resource type.
Exception Handling Control (EHC)
An exception (error) exists when the printer detects an invalid or unsupported command, control, or
parameter value in the data stream received from the host. The IPDS structure provides Alternate
Exception Action (AEA) when the printer receives a valid parameter value, but the printer does not support
this value. The Exception Handling Control subcommand allows the host control of exception handling by
the printer. This subcommand specifies the action the printer is to take with respect to the reporting and
processing of exception (error) conditions. The format of the EHC subcommand is:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
F600
EHC Order Code
2
2
Bit 0
126
Exception Reporting
Bit 0
Programmer Manual
Undefined Character Check
0
Do Not Report Exceptions
1
Report Exceptions
Decimal
Bit 1
Hex
Value
Bit 1
Description
Page Position Check
0
Do Not Report Exceptions
1
Report Exceptions
Bit 2-6
Bit 2-6
Reserved
Bit 7
Bit 7
All other Errors
3
0
Do Not Report Exceptions
1
Report Exceptions
3
Bit 0-6
Bit 0-6
Bit 7
Bit 7
4
Reserved
0
Take Alternate Exception Action and Continue
1
Do Not Take Alternate Exception Action, Proceed per Byte 4
4
Bit 0-5
Bit 0-5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Alternate Exception Action
Bit 7
Exception Presentation Processing
Reserved
0
No Page Continuation
1
Page Continuation (Skip and Continue Action)
0
Discard Page
1
Print to point of exception
Exception Reporting: Byte 2 of the EHC subcommand handles exception reporting. Bits 0, 1, and 7 of
this byte may be set to report or not report exceptions as defined below. If the exception has no Alternate
Exception Action or the printer is told not to take the Alternate Exception Action, the exception is always
reported.
v Bit 0: Report Undefined Character Check
When this bit is set to 1, an undefined data character in a Write Text, Write Graphics, or Write Bar Code
command causes the printer to report an error to the host program. When this bit is set to 0, the printer
does not report Undefined Character Check errors.
v Bit 1: Report Page Position Check
Printing occurs only where the physical medium and the logical page overlap. When bit 1 is set to 1, an
attempt to print outside the overlap of the logical page and the physical medium causes the printer to
report an error. If bit 1 is set to 0, the printer does not report Position Check errors.
v Bits 2-6: Reserved
v Bit 7: Report all other exceptions
If this bit is set to 1, the printer reports all exceptions other than those defined by bits 0-1. If this bit is
set to 0, the printer does not report errors other than those specified above.
If the printer is in home state or the application requests an Acknowledge Reply in an IPDS command, the
printer reports exceptions with a Negative Acknowledge Reply (NACK). If an exception occurs within a
page, overlay, or page segment, the printer reports the NACK instead of sending a positive
acknowledgment of the page, overlay, or page segment.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
127
The first asynchronous NACK is the only one reported, even though other synchronous NACKs may be
detected before the first NACK is reported. If the printer has a pending exception (the exception has
occurred but has not yet been reported), the printer reports the exception when exception handling control
directs.
Alternate Exception Action: Byte 3 of the EHC subcommand controls Alternate Exception Actions.
v Bits 0-6: Reserved
v Bit 7: Alternate Exception Action (AEA) control
This bit defines how printer processing continues when a data stream error occurs.
If the bit is set to 0, the printer continues processing with the Alternate Exception Action. If the error has
no Alternate Exception Action defined, the printer continues as though this bit contained a 1.
If this bit is set to 1 or no AEA is defined, the printer reports the error regardless of the value in the
Exception Reporting byte above. The printer continues processing as defined by the contents of the
Exception Presentation Processing byte below.
Exception Presentation Processing: Byte 4 of the EHC subcommand defines what the printer does
when exceptions occur in any state except home state.
v Bits 0-5: Reserved
v Bit 6: Page Continuation
If bit 6 is 0, the printer does the following:
– Terminates processing of the page, overlay, or page segment data
– Prints as much of the previously processed data as possible
– Enters home state.
If bit 6 is set to 1, the printer ignores bit 7 (Error Page Print) after taking a skip and continue action. The
printer remains in the current state and treats subsequent commands as No Operation (NOP) until it
encounters either the next valid command or a terminating condition.
1. Skip and Continue Action
Skip and Continue Actions are attempts by the printer to skip the remainder of the IPDS block
containing the exception and to print subsequent blocks or text on the page (if any).
The printer treats all subsequent commands other than Any State commands (NOP, SHS, STM, and
XOA) as No Operation (NOP) commands until it encounters either the next valid command or a
terminating condition. The printer remains in page, page segment, or overlay state. If the printer is in
a block state, the End command is the next valid command that returns the printer to page, page
segment, or overlay state. When the next valid command is encountered, the printer begins normal
processing again. The exception that caused the skip and continue action is reported when the end
of the page is reached, when an XOA command sets home state, or when a command with an ARQ
is received. The following conditions determine the next valid command:
– If the exception occurs in a Write Text command, a Load Font Equivalence command, or an
Include Page Segment command, the next valid command is End Page, Set Home State, or
XOA Discard Buffered Data.
– If the exception occurs in a block state, the next valid command is End.
– If the exception occurs in an Any-state command, the next valid command is the command that
follows.
– If the exception occurs in any other command, the next valid command is one of the following (if
supported):
- Write Text
- Include Overlay
- Include Page Segment
- Write Text Control
- Write Image Control
- Write Image Control 2
- Write Bar Code Control
128
Programmer Manual
- Write Graphics Control
- End Page
- Set Home State
- XOA Discard Buffered Data
- Load Font Equivalence.
If the following terminating conditions occur, the printer returns to home state and reports the
indicated exception:
– An asynchronous exception occurs such that the printer cannot recover without host intervention.
The asynchronous exception is reported and the exception that caused the skip and continue
action is discarded.
– A command is received with the ARQ flag set on. The exception that caused the skip and
continue action is reported.
– A command is received with a length outside the valid IPDS range. The exception that caused
the skip and continue action is reported.
– A command is received that violates the IPDS state diagram. The exception that caused the skip
and continue action is reported.
During skip and continue actions, Any-state commands are treated as follows:
– SHS and XOA-DBD are next valid commands in all cases. They are processed, the skip and
continue action processing is terminated, the exception is reported, and normal command
processing resumes.
– Any-state commands with the ARQ bit set on are terminating conditions. They are not processed;
they terminate skip and continue processing, the exception is reported, and the printer returns to
home state.
– All other Any-state commands are processed as normal. However, subsequent non-Any-state,
non-next valid commands are skipped.
Exceptions detected in included overlays or page segments are treated as though the commands
were received as part of the page.
v Bit 7: Error Page Print
If both bits 6 and 7 are set to 1, bit 7 is ignored. If bit 6 is 0 and bit 7 is 1, the printer prints as much of
the page as possible and returns to home state.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
129
Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 1 of 3)
130
Programmer Manual
Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 2 of 3)
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
131
Figure 15. Exception Handling Control (Part 3 of 3)
Print Quality Control (PQC)
The Print Quality Control subcommand allows the host to specify the desired print quality without changing
fonts (see notes). The quality selection (from the PQC subcommand) specifies the quality for printing text
associated with fonts selected by the Set Coded Font Local (SCFL) command and defined by the Load
Font Equivalence (LFE) command. A PQC specifying a print quality compatible with the desired font
should precede the SCFL command. The PQC has no effect when the default font (defined by the offline
operator panel selection) is in use.
The following bytes contain the print quality selection, as shown:
Byte
Value
Description
Bit 0-1
F800
PQC Order Code
Bit 2
00
Reserved
01 - 55
DP
56 - AA
DP Text
AB - FE
NLQ
FF
Depends on Operator Panel setting
Note: For model X03 or for model Z03 with Host Fast Draft disabled.
132
Programmer Manual
The following bytes contain the print quality selection, as shown:
Byte
Value
Description
Bit 0-1
F800
PQC Order Code
Bit 2
01 - 2A
Fast Draft Quality
2B - 55
DP
56 - AA
DP Text
AB - FE
NLQ
FF
Depends on Operator Panel setting
Note: Model Z03 only with Host Fast Draft enabled.
For printing multiple-density selections of graphics and bar codes, the following values are valid if bar
code/graphics density is set to computer selected:
Byte
Value
Description
Bit 0-1
F800
PQC Order Code
Bit 2
01 - 55
Low-Density Graphics/Bar Codes
56 - FE
High-Density Graphics/High-Contrast Bar Codes
FF
Depends on Operator Panel setting
Notes:
1. A PQC command can result in a font change in order to provide the desired quality level.
2. The printer changes fonts to satisfy quality selections for all supported code pages except OCR (340),
OCR-A (892), or OCR-B (893). It will not change the selected code page to provide a requested
quality.
Text Function Set Commands
The text function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting text information on a logical
page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the text
function set:
Command
Code
Description
LE
D61D
Load Equivalence
WT
D62D
Write Text
The following pages describe the text function set commands.
Load Equivalence (LE)
Length
D61D
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
This command permits Begin and End suppression controls imbedded in data stored within the printer to
reference different external values. For example, internal suppression values of 06, 07, and 09 (from a
Begin Suppression control) can map to an external value of 02 from a Load Copy Control command, if the
printer previously has received an appropriate Load Equivalence command. Thus, the printer can use a
single Load Copy Control suppression pair for more than one suppression value (see “Begin Suppression
(BSU)” on page 137).
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
133
If a Load Copy Control command refers to a suppression identifier that has not been specified as an
external value in an LE command, the identifier (external value) will map to itself. This is the only case
where the identifier will map to itself unless specified.
This mapping remains in effect until the printer receives another Load Equivalence command, at which
time its values will totally replace this mapping.
This command consists of a two-byte parameter followed by a list of 0 to 127 four-byte entries in the
following format:
Decimal
Hex
Description
0-1
0-1
Mapping Type - X'0100' Is the Only Valid Value, Indicating Suppression
Equivalence Mapping.
2-3
2-3
Internal Value - Value of the Stored Parameter that the Begin Suppression and
End Suppression Controls use. Valid Values are from 1 to 255 (X'1' to X'FF').
4-5
4-5
External Value - Value that the Load Copy Control Command uses. This Is the
Value for Referencing the Internal Value. Valid Values are from 1 to 127 (X'1' to
X'7F').
Notes:
1. Additional entries, each four bytes long, can follow this entry, using the same format as bytes 2
through 5.
2. The mapping of one internal ID to more than one external ID is an error.
Write Text (WT)
Length
D62D
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
One or More Text Controls and Text Characters.
The Write Text command writes text presentation data to the printer. This command is only valid if the
printer is in the overlay, page, or page segment state.
The DATA field in this command can contain one or more text controls and text characters. A text control
begins with the text control escape sequence introducer, 2BD3. The format for this control is:
2BD3
Length
Control
Parameters
The length field of each text control is a one-byte value that gives the number of bytes in the text control.
This length value includes the length field itself but excludes the 2BD3 introducer. Multiple text controls
without intervening character data can chain together. Bit 7 (the least significant, or rightmost bit) of the
control field is the chain bit. If this bit is on, the following text control is chained to the previous control.
That is, chaining allows one escape sequence introducer for multiple text controls. With chaining, the first
text control contains the X'2BD3' introducer, and each subsequent text control starts with its own length
field, followed by its control field and any parameters for that control. The last text control in the chain
must have the chain bit off.
A Write Text command can span to another Write Text command. That is, if a Write Text command ends
after the control sequence has begun (the 2B has been received), and before all of the control sequence
parameters have been received, this Write Text command spans to the next Write Text command.
Spanning also occurs if a Write Text command ends between chained controls. Between the spanned
Write Text commands, only STM, XOA, and NOP commands are valid. All other commands received at
this time result in an error. The printer uses the following controls with the Write Text command:
134
Programmer Manual
Control
Description
Control
Description
CO (C1)
Set Inline Margin (SIM)
F4 (F5)
End Suppression (ESU)
C2 (C3)
Set Intercharacter Adjustment (SIA)
E4 (E5)
Draw I-Axis Rule (DIR)
D0 (D1)
Set Baseline Increment (SBI)
E6 (E7)
Draw B-Axis Rule (DBR)
C6 (C7)
Absolute Move Inline (AMI)
EE (EF)
Repeat String (RPS)
D2 (D3)
Absolute Move Baseline (AMB)
DA (DB)
Transparent Data (TRN)
C8 (C9)
Relative Move Inline (RMI)
F8 (F9)
No Operation (NOP)
D4 (D5)
Relative Move Baseline (RMB)
C4 (C5)
Set Variable Space Increment (SVI)
D8 (D9)
Begin Line (BLN)
74 (75)
Set Text Color (STC)
F0 (F1)
Set Coded Font Local (SCFL)
72 (73)
Overstrike (OVS)
F6 (F7)
Set Text Orientation (STO)
76 (77)
Underscore (USC)
F2 (F3)
Begin Suppression (BSU)
78 (79)
Temporary Baseline Move (TBM)
Note: The controls shown in parenthesis are the text controls with their corresponding chain bit on.
Set Inline Margin (SIM)
2BD3
04
C0 (C1)
P1P2
Description: This control specifies the position of the inline margin in the (I) direction, when the printer
performs a Begin Line command. Receipt of this control does not change the current print position.
Parameters P1P2 form a two-byte value that specifies the margin in units. All values between 0 and
X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF' causes the printer to use the value in the LPD command.
Note: Values as large as X'7FFF' are valid but might be off the page.
Set Intercharacter Adjustment (SIA)
2BD3
04
C2 (C3)
P1P2
05
C2 (C3)
P1P2P3
or
2BD3
Description: This control specifies additional inline adjustment between graphic characters.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies an additional increment or decrement in the inline
direction between text characters in units. All values between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF'
causes the printer to use the value in the LPD command.
Parameter P3 is a direction parameter and is optional. This parameter identifies whether the adjustment is
an increment or a decrement. If P3 has a value of 0 or X'FF', the adjustment is an increment. If P3 has a
value of 1, the adjustment is a decrement. If this parameter is missing, the default is an increment.
Set Baseline Increment (SBI)
2BD3
04
D0 (D1)
P1P2
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
135
Description: This control specifies a distance, which the printer adds to the current baseline coordinate
when the printer performs a Begin Line control.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the baseline increment in units. All values between
X'8000' and X'7FFF' are valid. A value of X'FFFF' causes the printer to use the value in the LPD
command.
Absolute Move Inline (AMI)
2BD3
04
C6 (C7)
P1P2
Description: This control moves the inline coordinate in the I direction. The move is to an absolute
position on the inline (I) axis.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the new inline coordinate in units. All values
between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid.
Notes:
1. Values as large as X'7FFF' are valid but might be off the page.
2. Several Absolute Move Inline controls used in a single line reduce throughput. If possible, replace
Absolute Move Inline controls with spaces, or combine multiple Absolute Move Inline controls into a
single Absolute Move Inline control.
Absolute Move Baseline (AMB)
2BD3
04
D2 (D3)
P1P2
Description: This control moves the baseline coordinate in the B direction. The move is to an absolute
position on the baseline (B) axis.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the new baseline coordinate in units. All values
between 0 and X'7FFF' are valid.
Note: Baseline coordinate values that require a negative baseline displacement in order to print results in
an error if the LPD command specifies ordered printing.
Relative Move Inline (RMI)
2BD3
04
C8 (C9)
P1P2
Description: This control moves the inline coordinate relative to the current line coordinate position.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the displacement value in units. All values between
X'8000' and X'FFFF' are valid. Negative values are in twos-complement form.
Notes:
1. Values as large as X'FFFF' are valid but might be off the page.
2. Several Relative Move Inline controls used in a single line reduce throughput. If possible, replace
Relative Move Inline controls with spaces, or combine multiple Relative Move Inline controls into a
single Relative Move Inline control.
Relative Move Baseline (RMB)
2BD3
136
04
Programmer Manual
D4 (D5)
P1P2
Description: This control moves the baseline coordinate relative to the current baseline coordinate
position.
Parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the displacement value in units. All values between
X'8000' and X'FFFF' are valid.
Note: Baseline displacement values that require a negative baseline displacement in order to print results
in an error if the LPD command specifies ordered printing.
Begin Line (BLN)
2BD3
02
D8 (D9)
Description: This control moves the inline and baseline coordinates to the first position on the next line.
The inline margin sets the inline coordinate. The baseline coordinate increases by the value in the Set
Baseline Increment control.
Set Coded Font Local (SCFL)
2BD3
03
F0 (F1)
P1
Description: This control selects a previously assigned font, pitch, and code page. Load Font Equivalence
commands assign a local font identifier (LFID) to a specified font, pitch, and character set. The SCFL
control then specifies the LFID (in parameter P1) to use for printing. A Print Quality Control subcommand
specifying a print quality that is compatible with the LFID (defined by a previous Load Font Equivalence
command) must precede the SCFL control to provide the desired font and quality selections. Parameter
P1 is the LFID selection. Valid values for this parameter are 01 to X'FF'. A value of X'FF' specifies the LPD
value.
Set Text Orientation (STO)
2BD3
06
F6 (F7)
P1-P4
Description: This control can be set to print right-to-left by selecting 180, 90 (X'5A00', X'2D00') degree
orientation. The 4247 Printer forces an inline sequence of 180 degrees for the default font to maintain
upright printing when right-to-left printing is selected. The only valid values are 0 and 180 degrees for the
inline direction and 90 degrees for the baseline direction. The Logical Page Descriptor command can also
be used to select right-to-left printing.
Parameters P1P2 specify the inline direction and must be a value of X'0000', X'5A00', or X'FFFF'.
Note: If the inline direction is set to 180 degrees, only fonts with 180 degree character rotation can be
used or else error 023F02 is flagged.
X'5A00' is an orientation of 180 degrees used to print in a right-to-left direction. X'FFFF' specifies to use
the inline direction from the LPD command. Parameters P3P4 specify the baseline direction and must be a
value of X'2D00' or X'FFFF'. X'FFFF' specifies to use the baseline direction value from the LPD command.
Refer to the description of the LFE command for supported combinations of LFE character rotation and
STO.
Begin Suppression (BSU)
2BD3
03
F2 (F3)
P1
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
137
Description: This control marks the beginning of a string of text that the printer can suppress from the
printed output.
Parameter P1 is a one byte suppression identifier. Valid values are from 1 to X'FF'. An End Suppression
control, with the same suppression identifier, must follow the Begin Suppression control. An error results
when BSU-ESU text controls are not paired properly or have different suppression IDs.
Suppression of the text output occurs only when activated by a Load Copy Control with a matching
suppression ID.
For additional information about suppression, see Suppression ID in the “Load Copy Control (LCC)” on
page 110.
End Suppression (ESU)
2BD3
03
F4 (F5)
P1
Description: This control marks the end of a string of text that the printer can suppress from the printed
output.
Parameter P1 is a one byte suppression identifier. Valid values are from 1 to X'FF'. A string of suppressed
text starts with a Begin Suppression control and ends with an End Suppression control having the same
suppression identifier.
Draw I-Axis Rule (DIR)
2BD3
04 or 07
E4 (E5)
P1-P5
Description: This control specifies the dimensions of a horizontal rule (line) extending from the current
print position. The current position does not change as a result of this control. The rule is not drawn until
the current position advances vertically (as a result of other controls).
Parameters P1P2 specify the length of the rule in the inline direction in units. Valid values are from X'8000'
to X'7FFF'. Negative values are in twos-complement form.
Parameters P3, P4, and P5 are optional, as a group. That is, either all three parameters are omitted or all
three must be included together. Parameters P3P4 specify the width of the rule in the baseline direction in
units. Valid values are from X'8000' to X'7FFF'. Also valid is X'FFFF'' which selects the printer default of 5
pels wide.
Parameter P5 is ignored by the 4247 Printer.
Draw B-Axis Rule (DBR)
2BD3
04 or 07
E6 (E7)
P1-P5
Description: This control specifies the dimensions of a vertical rule (line) extending from the current print
position. The current position does not change as a result of this control. The rule is not drawn until the
current position advances vertically (as a result of other controls).
Parameters P1P2 specify the length of the rule in the baseline direction in units. Valid values are from
X'8000' to X'7FFF'. Parameters P3, P4, and P5 are optional, as a group. That is, either all three
parameters are omitted or all three must be included together.
138
Programmer Manual
Parameters P3P4 specify the width of the rule in the inline direction in units. Valid values are from X'8000'
to X'7FFF'. Negative values are in twos-complement form. Also valid is X'FFFF'. This selects the printer
default of 5 pels wide.
Parameter P5 is ignored by the 4247 Printer.
Repeat String (RPS)
2BD3
04-FF
EE (EF)
P1-Pn
Description: This control contains a string of coded graphic characters that repeats on the current line.
Parameters P1P2 specify the repeat length. This is the total length of the generated string.
Parameters P3 through Pn are the repeat data. The data specified in bytes P3 through Pn repeats until
the output equals the repeat length specified in parameters P1P2. The data field can be a maximum of
253 bytes. The printer does not check the data for the control sequence introducer (X'2B'). If the repeat
length is zero, this control is a no-op. If the count equals 04, but the repeat length is greater than zero, an
error occurs.
Transparent Data (TRN)
2BD3
02-FF
DA (DB)
P1-Pn
Description: This control marks the beginning of a string of coded characters, which the printer does not
check for an embedded X'2B' escape sequence. The inline position increments for each position in the
string.
Parameters P1 through Pn are the graphic characters. The data field can be a maximum of 253 bytes.
No Operation (NOP)
2BD3
02-FF
F8 (F9)
P1-Pn
Description: This control specifies a string of bytes that the printer ignores. The printer ignores all
parameter data. The data field can be a maximum of 253 bytes.
Set Variable Space Increment (SVI)
2BD3
04
C4 (C5)
P1P2
Description: The Variable Space Increment is a two byte positive value that defines the width of the
variable space character in units. Parameters P1P2 are the width value. Valid values are 0 to X'7FFF'.
X'FFFF' equals the printer default. The variable space character is X'40' for EBCDIC code pages and X'20'
for ASCII code pages.
Set Text Color (STC)
2BD3
04 or 05
74 (75)
P1-P3
Description: This control specifies the color attributes for text.
Parameters P1P2 are the color attributes, as shown:
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
139
Hex
Color
Hex
Color
0000
Black (Default)
0008
Black
FF00
Black
FFFF
Use Current Default
FF07
Black (Default)
Note: For Limited Simulated Color Support, all valid but unsupported color values for text data are
accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of unsupported color
exceptions. In the 4247 Printer, simulation of Color of Medium is done by printing in Color of
Medium except where not possible because of different resolutions when text overlays graphics,
image, or barcode. For actual colors, all valid colors not listed in the above table are simulated in
the 4247 Printer by printing in black.
Parameter P3 is the precision parameter. This parameter is optional and has the following meaning:
00
If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer reports an exception.
Printing is in the default color if alternate exception action is invoked.
01
If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer does not report an
exception, regardless of the EHC, and printing is in the default color.
FF
If the color is not supported or cannot be printed as requested, the printer reports an exception.
Printing is in the default color if alternate exception action is invoked.
Overstrike (OVS)
2BD3
05
72 (73)
P1-P3
Description: This control identifies text that the printer overstrikes with a specified character. The
overstrike character prints using the font and character set that is active when the printer receives the
Overstrike command.
Parameter P1 is the bypass identifier. This parameter controls white space to be overstruck, depending on
its value, as shown:
Bits 0-3
Reserved
Bit 4
0 Overstrike white space from Relative Move Inline
1 Bypass white space from Relative Move Inline
Bit 5
0 Overstrike white space from Absolute Move Inline
1 Bypass white space from Absolute Move Inline
Bit 6
0 Overstrike white space from Space or Variable Space Character
1 Bypass white space from Space or Variable Space Character
Bit 7
0 Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 according to their set values
1 No Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 as if their values were set to 0.
Note: If bit 7 is on, the printer treats all other bits in byte P1 as zeros, regardless of their values.
The printer ignores parameter P2 for this control. Parameter P3 is the overstrike character.
140
Programmer Manual
An OVS command with a bypass value of 00 ends overstrike mode.
Underscore (USC)
2BD3
05
76 (77)
P1-P3
Description: This control identifies text the printer underscores at the baseline of the current line. The
underscore prints using the same print quality as the text.
Parameter P1 is the bypass identifier. This parameter controls underscoring of white space, depending on
its value, as shown:
Bits 0-3
Reserved
Bit 4
0 Underscore white space from Relative Move Inline
1 Bypass white space from Relative Move Inline
Bit 5
0 Underscore white space from Absolute Move Inline
1 Bypass white space from Absolute Move Inline
Bit 6
0 Underscore white space from Space or Variable Space Character
1 Bypass white space from Space or Variable Space Character
Bit 7
0 Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 according to their set values
1 No Bypass Treat Bits 0-6 as if their values were set to 0.
X'FF'
No bypass in effect.
Note: If bit 7 is on, the printer treats all other bits in byte P1 as zeros, regardless of their values.
A USC command with a bypass value of 00 ends underscore mode.
Temporary Baseline Move (TBM)
2BD3
03 or 06
78 (79)
P1-P4
Description: This control changes the position of the sequential baseline without change to the
established baseline. This control also stops and starts both subscript and superscript printing.
Parameter P1 is the direction parameter. Its values are:
00
Do not change baseline
01
Return to established baseline
02
Shift baseline away from the I axis (subscript) one additional temporary baseline
increment, per parameters P3 and P4
03
Shift baseline towards the I axis (superscript) one additional temporary baseline increment,
per parameters P3 and P4.
Parameter P2 is the precision parameter. Its values are:
00
Baseline shift is not simulated and the active font is used.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
141
01
A substitute font with characteristics identical to the current font may be used to simulate
baseline shift (superscript/subscript).
FF
Same as 00.
Note: When subscript or superscript is active, double high printing will not occur.
Parameters P3 and P4 are the temporary baseline increments. Its values are:
0000 - 7FFF
Temporary Baseline Increment
FFFF
Half the current baseline increment.
Image Function Set Commands
The image function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting image data on a logical
page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the image
function set:
Command
Code
Description
WIC
D63D
Write Image Content
WI
D64D
Write Image
END
D65D
End
Write Image Control (WIC)
Length
D63D
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Write Image Control command causes the printer to enter the image block state. The command
sequence that follows directs an image presentation block area on the current page, overlay, or page
segment that is being constructed.
The parameters of this command define the input and output size of the image array and the necessary
information for interpreting the input data.
In the page state, the printer checks all the Write Image Control command parameter values for validity. If
the parameters are not within the valid ranges, an exception condition exists.
An image cannot print outside the page without an error. If any part of the image extends beyond the
physical or logical page, no image prints and an exception occurs.
The DATA field bytes have the following meaning for this command:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
1 - 7FFF
Output - Pels per Scan Line
2-3
2-3
1 - 7FFF
Output - Number of Scan Lines
4-5
4-5
1 - 7FFF
Input - Pels per Scan Line
6-7
6-7
1 - 7FFF
Input - Number of Scan Lines
8
8
00
No Compression Algorithm
9
9
00
Pel Data Format - One Bit per Pel
10-11
A-B
0101
No Magnification
0202
Scale by 2, Both X and Y
142
Programmer Manual
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
12-13
C-D
0000
Zero Degrees Scan Line Direction
14-15
E-F
2D00
90 Degrees Scan Line Sequence Direction
16
10
Coordinate Type (See note 1)
00
Absolute I, Absolute B
20
Absolute I, Relative B
40
Relative I, Absolute B
60
Relative I, Relative B
AD
Absolute X, Absolute Y
17-19
11-13
FF8000 - 7FFF
First Pel X or I Coordinate
20
14
00
Reserved
21-23
15-17
FF8000 - 7FFF
First Pel Y or B Coordinate
24-25
18-19
0000, 0008,
FF00, FF07,
FF08
Color - Same as Text and Graphics Color Values (See note 2)
Notes:
1. Only A0 can be used if the text is set to 180/90 degrees.
2. The 4247 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values for
image data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of
unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',
X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.
Coordinate Type: Can be either an absolute or a relative value. Absolute values specify a location on the
logical page relative to the reference coordinates. Relative values specify a location on the logical page
relative to the current coordinates.
If byte 10 equals X'00', the 4247 Printer uses the absolute values of I and B, as specified in bytes 11
through 13 and bytes 15 through 17 of this command. These values are the text inline and text baseline
coordinates, respectively.
If byte 10 equals'X'20', the 4247 Printer uses the absolute value of I and the relative value of B. The
absolute I value is the text inline coordinate (bytes 11 through 13 of this command); the relative B value is
the sum of the current text baseline coordinate and the value specified in bytes 15 through 17 of this
command.
If byte 10 equals X'40', the 4247 Printer uses the relative value of I and the absolute value of B. The
relative I value is the sum of the current text inline coordinate and bytes 11 through 13 of this command;
the absolute B value is the text baseline coordinate, specified in bytes 15 through 17 of this command.
If byte 10 equals X'60', the 4247 Printer uses the relative value of I and the relative value of B. The
relative I value is the sum of the current text inline coordinate and bytes 11 through 13 of this command;
the relative B value is the sum of the current text baseline coordinate and bytes 15 through 17 of this
command.
If byte 10 equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the block
is within a page, WIC bytes 11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and
Y-coordinate origin specified in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default
coordinates if no LPP command is received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an
LCC command, WIC bytes 11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
143
Ym-coordinate origin. When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an IO command, WIC bytes
11 through 13 and 15 through 17 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified
in the IO command.
Bytes C through D must equal 0 degrees scan line direction and bytes E through F must equal 90 degrees
scan line sequence direction. The Coordinate Type byte 10 is not used to modify the image direction.
Write Image (WI)
Length
D63D
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
This command transmits a block of image data to the printer. A sequence of one or more Write Image
commands follows the Write Image Control command and terminates with an End command.
The total number of bits of image is equal to the product of the number of source scan lines and the
number of bits on each scan line. Thus, the number of bytes sent is:
(Bytes 4 through 5 x bytes 6 through 7 of the WIC command) divided by 8
Note: If this calculation yields a fractional remainder, round the result to the next whole number. The
DATA parameter bytes contain the image bit string.
End (END)
For a description of the End control, see “End (END)” on page 114.
Graphics Function Set Commands
The graphics function set contains the commands and data controls for presenting graphic pictures on a
logical page, page segment, or overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are the
graphics function set:
Command
Code
Description
WGC
D684
Write Graphics Content
WG
D685
Write Graphics
END
D65D
End
Graphics is a data type the printer uses to present line art picture drawings in a graphics block area on a
page. A sequence of drawing orders produce arcs, lines, fillets, character strings, markers, and other
elements that define the drawing. These orders, grouped into one or more segments, present the picture.
The control unit sends a Write Graphics Control command to the printer to establish the control
parameters and initial drawing conditions for presenting the picture data. The picture segments themselves
are sent to the printer as data in one or more Write Graphics commands.
Knowing how the graphics picture is developed allows an understanding of the relationship between the
Write Graphics command and the Write Graphics Control command. The following pages explain the
drawing order coordinates, the graphic medium presentation space, and the graphic block area.
Drawing Order Coordinate System
The drawing orders specify graphics in an abstract space rather than directly on the page. This allows
repositioning graphics on a page without changing the drawing orders. Coordinates (Graphics X and Y)
specify the position of the graphic.
144
Programmer Manual
Note: The Graphics X and Y coordinates are not the same as the media X and Y coordinates. The
horizontal axis is Graphics X; the vertical axis is Graphics Y. The intersection of the Graphics X and
Y axes is coordinate (0,0). The horizontal axis is positive to the right of center and negative to the
left of center. The vertical axis is positive to the top of center and negative to the bottom of center.
Therefore, both positive and negative values are valid. Negative values are specified in
twos-complement form.
All coordinates are in coordinate units, called drawing units that are the same as units in the Graphics
Data Descriptor (GDD) structured fields. Figure 6-27 shows the Graphics X and Y coordinate system.
Figure 16. The Graphics X and Y Coordinate System
Graphic Medium Presentation Space
The graphic medium presentation space is an abstract coordinate space where graphics are composed. It
is a conceptual structure defined by the limits of the coordinate space as shown in Figure 17 on page 146.
Units are defined in “Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD)” on page 151.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
145
Figure 17. The Graphic Medium Presentation Space and Its Limits
Graphic Window
The graphic window is a user-defined, rectangular area within the graphic medium presentation space.
This area is the source from where information is selected for printing. Figure 18 illustrates the relationship
of the graphic window to the graphic medium presentation space.
Figure 18. The Graphic Window within the Graphic Medium Presentation Space
Graphic Block Area
The graphic block area is the part of the current physical medium in which the graphics is printed.
The graphic block area can overlap other output (such as text or images) specified earlier for the same
page. Likewise, subsequent output specified by other commands for the same page can overlap the
graphic block area. Figure 19 on page 147 shows the graphic block area and its relationship to the
physical medium.
146
Programmer Manual
Figure 19. The Graphic Block Area on the Physical Medium
Positioning the Graphic Window in the Graphic Block Area
As mentioned previously, the graphic window can be any size within the graphic presentation space limits.
The graphic block area size can be the entire physical Medium or a portion of the physical medium.
The Write Graphics Control command, described in detail in “Write Graphics Control (WGC)” on page 148,
specifies the mapping of the graphic window to the graphic block area.
The term mapping refers to the transformation of an abstract space into its size and position on the
physical medium. There are three ways to map the abstract space. They are scale-to-fit, center-and-trim,
and position-and-trim mapping. These mapping methods are described in detail in “Area Mapping Control
Options” on page 153.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
147
Write Graphics Control (WGC)
Length
D684
GAP
GOC
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
GDD
The Write Graphics Control command causes the printer to enter the graphics block state. The parameters
of this command define the size, placement, and orientation of the graphic block area and establish the
initial conditions for interpreting the graphic data. Receiving the End command in the graphic block state
terminates the processing of the graphic data.
The Write Graphics Control data consists of three consecutive structured fields:
v The Graphic Area Position control defines the position of the graphics picture on the page.
v The Graphic Output Control (GOC) defines the size of this picture on the page.
v The Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD) defines the size of the graphics window and the default
characteristics of the graphics picture.
Each structured field contains a two byte length field, then a two byte structured field ID, and finally a data
field.
Note: The quality of the graphics output is affected by the graphics mode and direction parameter values
selected at the operator panel (see the User’s Guide for your model printer), and by the Print
Quality Control command (see “Print Quality Control (PQC)” on page 132).
Graphic Area Position Control (GAP)
GAP
GOC
GDD
Length
ID
DATA
The Graphic Area Position Control structured field is the first structured field in the DATA portion of the
Write Graphics Control command. This field defines the position and orientation of the graphic block area.
The top left corner of the graphic block area is defined relative to the reference coordinate system.
The format of the GAP field is:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
000B - (n + 1)
Length of this Field
2-3
2-3
AC6B
Structured Field ID
4-5
4-5
8000 - 7FFF
X Coordinate Position or Inline Coordinate Position of the
Graphic Block Area in Units (Position of the Top Left Corner)
6-7
6-7
8000 - 7FFF
Y Coordinate Position or Baseline Coordinate Position of the
Graphic Block Area in Units (Position of the Top Left Corner)
8-9
8-9
0000
When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate
system with the inline orientation system equal to 0 degrees,
you must use the 0 degree orientation for graphics.
5A00
When you use the I,B reference system and the inline
orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 degree
orientation for graphics.
148
Programmer Manual
Decimal
Hex
10
A
11-n
B-n
Value
Description
Reference Coordinate System:
00
Absolute I, Absolute B
20
Absolute I, Relative B
40
Relative I, Absolute B
60
Relative I, Relative B
A0
Absolute X, Absolute Y
Reserved
Figure 20 shows the Graphic Block Area Position control specifying the top left reference point for the
graphic block area.
Figure 20. Graphic Block Area Position Control and the Graphic Block Area
Byte A of the GAP specifies the reference coordinate system. The reference coordinate system used for
determining the top left corner of the graphic block area can be either the media X,Y or the I,B coordinate
system.
If byte A equals X'00', the absolute I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4 and 5
specify the text inline coordinate. GAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the text baseline coordinate.
If byte A equals X'20', the absolute I and relative B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4
and 5 specify the text inline coordinate. GAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text baseline coordinate
position used prior to graphics.
If byte A equals X'40', the relative I and absolute B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4
and 5 add to the last text inline coordinate position used prior to graphics. GAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the
text baseline coordinate.
If byte A equals X'60', the relative I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. GAP bytes 4 and 5
add to the last text inline coordinate position used prior to graphics. GAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text
baseline coordinate position used prior to graphics.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
149
If byte 10A equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the
block is within a page, GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate
origin specified in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default coordinates if no LPP
command was received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an LCC command,
GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and Ym-coordinate origin. When the block
is within an overlay that is invoked using an IO command, GAP bytes 4 through 7 specify the offset from
the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified in the IO command.
When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate system with the inline orientation equal to 0
degrees, you must use the 0 degree orientation for graphics.
When you use the I,B reference system and the inline orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180
degree orientation for graphics.
Graphic Output Control (GOC)
GAP
GOC
GDD
Length
ID
DATA
The Graphic Output Control structured field is the second structured field in the DATA portion of the Write
Graphics Control command. This field specifies the size of the graphic block area and a mapping option
for placing the graphic window into the graphic block area. This field is optional and does not need to be in
the Write Graphics Control command. If the GOC field is not present, the printer uses:
v The mapping option X'30' (where offset equals zero)
v X offset and Y offset equals zero
v Graphics block size equals the graphics medium presentation space window size defined in the GDD
self-defining field.
The format of the GOC field is:
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
0010 - (n + 1)
Length of this Structured Field
2-3
2-3
A66B
Structured Field ID
4
4
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
01
Unit Base (10 cm)
05A0 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note 1)
1626 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note 1)
1 - 7FFF
Width of Graphic Block Area in Units
FFFF
Use Value From LPD Command
1 - 7FFF
Height of Graphic Block Area in Units
FFFF
Use Value From LPD Command
5-6
7-8
9-10
11
5-6
7-8
9-A
B
Area Mapping Control Option (See Note 2)
10
Scale-to-Fit
20
Center-and-Trim
30
Position-and-Trim
12-13
C-D
8000 - 7FFF
X Offset in Units (See Note 3)
14-15
E-F
8000 - 7FFF
Y Offset in Units (See Note 3)
150
Programmer Manual
Decimal
Hex
16-17
10-n
Value
Description
Reserved
Notes:
1. For bytes 5 through 6 (units per base value), 14400/10 in. is supported precisely. Multiples of 14400/10 in. are
also supported. If byte 4 specifies units in centimeters and byte B specifies 20 (center-and-trim) or 30
(position-and-trim), then bytes 5 through 6 must be equivalent to a supported value such as X'1626' or X'2C4C'.
2. See “Area Mapping Control Options” on page 153.
3. The printer ignores the X and Y offset fields unless byte B equals X'30'. These values are the offset of the top left
corner of the graphic window relative to the top left corner of the graphic block area.
Figure 21 shows the Graphic Output Control parameters specifying the size of the graphic block area.
Figure 21. Graphic Output Control and the Graphic Block Area
Graphic Data Descriptor (GDD)
GAP
GOC
GDD
Length
ID
DATA
The Graphic Data Descriptor is the last structured field in the DATA portion of the Write Graphics Control
command. This field specifies the parameters for the graphic window in the graphic medium presentation
space (GPS) and sets the drawing default conditions. The graphic window limits define the range of
drawing order coordinate values that map to the graphic block area.
Without causing an error, the drawing orders can specify GPS coordinates in the X'8000' to X'7FFF' range.
The specified GDD graphic window limits select the part of the drawing order’s picture to consider for
mapping to the output area.
The format of the GDD field is:
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
151
Decimal
Hex
Value
Description
0-1
0-1
001C - (n + 1)
Length of this Structured Field
2-3
2-3
A6BB
Structured Field ID
4
4
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
01
Unit Base (10 cm)
5
5
00
Reserved
6-7
6-7
05A0 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note)
1626 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note)
05A0 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 in.) (See Note)
1626 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 cm) (See Note)
8-9
8-9
10-13
A-D
00000000
Reserved
14-15
E-F
8000 - 7FFF
X Left Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units
16-17
10-11
8000 - 7FFF
X Right Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units
18-19
12-13
8000 - 7FFF
Y Top Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units
20-21
14-15
8000 - 7FFF
Y Bottom Limit of the Graphic Window in GPS coordinate units
22-25
16-19
00000000
Reserved
26-27
1A-1B
0000
Graphics Flags - Ignored
28-n
1C-n
Initial Graphic Default Conditions - Self-Describing Instructions
that Set the Drawing Defaults for the Picture (See Note)
(Optional field)
Note: See “Self-Describing Instructions” on page 156. Figure 22 on page 153shows the Graphic Data Descriptor
control parameters specifying the size of the graphic window.
152
Programmer Manual
Figure 22. Graphic Data Descriptor and the Graphic Medium Presentation Space
Area Mapping Control Options
Byte B in the GOC data field is the area mapping control option byte. The option values are:
v 10 - Scale to fit
v 20 - Center and trim
v 30 - Position and trim.
Scale to Fit Mapping: The center of the graphic window is mapped to the center of the graphic block
area and the graphic data is scaled by the printer (to a printer-supported unit per unit base) so that the
picture within the graphic window fits entirely within the output area at the closest maximum scale.
Figure 23 on page 154 shows the result of scale-to-fit mapping. For this example, the graphic window is
shown larger than the graphic block area. The parameters in the Graphic Data Descriptor specify the size
of the graphic window (in GPS coordinate units). The parameters in the Graphic Area Position and the
Graphic Output Control specify the size and location of the graphic block area on the physical medium.
If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, as shown in this example, the graphic window
is proportionally reduced to fit in the graphic block area. That is, the entire graphic drawing contained
within the graphic window appears in the graphic block area, reduced in size to fit in the graphic block
area.
This size reduction is done to scale, keeping the same proportions as the original graphic drawing.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
153
Notes:
1. The printer will not rescale graphics image data. If the image data does not fit within the output area,
clipping of the image data occurs.
2. Graphics markers are not scaled; they are always 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144-in.]) square. If markers are
drawn close to the boundary of a page and the page is then scaled down, the center points of the
markers are scaled closer to the boundary of the page but the marker size is still the same. The
markers may be clipped from the page if the scaling factor scales the centers of the markers too close
to the edge.
Figure 23. Scale-to-Fit Mapping
Center and Trim Mapping: The center of the graphic window is mapped to the center of the graphic
block area and the graphic data is presented at the specified scale. Any portion of the picture that goes
outside the graphic block area is clipped to the graphic block area boundary. Figure 24 on page 155
shows the result of center-and-trim mapping. For this example, the graphic window is shown smaller than
a previously defined graphic picture. This picture is to be placed on the physical medium. The parameters
in the Graphic Data Descriptor specify the size of the graphic window (in graphic medium presentation
space (GPS) units). The parameters in the Graphic Area Position and the Graphic Output Control specify
the size and location of the graphic block area on the physical medium.
If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, as shown in this example, a portion of the
graphic picture is eliminated. The centers of the graphic window and the graphic block area coincide, and
the boundaries of the graphic block area determine the limits of the graphic picture. Any portion of the
graphic picture extending beyond the graphic block area will not be drawn on the page.
154
Programmer Manual
Figure 24. Center-and-Trim Mapping
Position and Trim Mapping: The upper left-hand corner of the graphic window is mapped to the graphic
block area using the specified offset and presented at the specified scale. Any portion of the picture that
goes outside the graphic block area is clipped to the area boundary. Figure 25 on page 156 shows the
result of position-and-trim mapping. For this example, the graphic window is shown smaller than a
previously defined graphic picture. This picture is to be placed on the physical medium. The parameters in
the Graphic Data Descriptor specify the size of the graphic window. The parameters in the Graphic Area
Position and the Graphic Output Control specify the size and location of the graphic block area on the
physical medium.
If the graphic block area is smaller than the graphic window, a portion of the graphic picture is eliminated.
The top-left corner of the graphic window is either coincident with the top left corner of the graphic block
area, or it is offset from the top left corner of the graphic block area by a distance specified in the Graphic
Output Control. Only the portion of the picture contained within the overlapping areas of the graphic
window and the graphic block area will be drawn. The printer trims (eliminates) the portion of the graphic
picture outside this area.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
155
Figure 25. Position-and-Trim Mapping
Self-Describing Instructions
This portion of the Graphic Data Descriptor structured field contains zero or more self-describing
instructions that set the drawing defaults for the graphics picture. The general format of a self-describing
instruction is:
21
Length
Set
Mask
Default
Data
The first byte, 21, indicates that the following parameter is a Set Current Defaults instruction.
The Length byte is the length of the following data. If this value equals 4, the printer uses the standard
default values.
The Set byte indicates the type of attribute or parameter this instruction is specifying.
The bits 0 through 15 in the Mask bytes correspond to attribute items within the indicated set. The
individual set descriptions explain the meanings of these bits. When a mask bit equals one, the value of
the default byte selects one of two options. See the default byte description for details. When a mask bit
equals zero, the default does not change and the data does not include the value for the corresponding
attribute.
The Default byte has a value of either 0F or 8F. A value of 0F sets all indicated items to their standard
default values. A value of 8F and a mask bit equal to one requires the appropriate data for a new default
to be defined in the data field for the corresponding attribute. Unreferenced data bytes not addressed by
the mask field are ignored.
156
Programmer Manual
The Data bytes contain immediate data that specifies values for the attributes in this instruction. If the
Default byte is 0F, these Data bytes are not present.
The Set byte specifies one of the following attributes or parameters:
Set Value
Description
00
Drawing Attributes
01
Line Attributes
02
Character Attributes
03
Marker Attributes
04
Pattern Attributes
0B
Arc Parameters
The following charts explain the meaning of the mask bits for each of the Set instructions. Refer to the
drawing order descriptions for supported attribute values.
Drawing Attributes Set (Set = 00):
Mask Bit
Item Name
Length
(Bytes)
0
Color
2
1-15
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
-
Line Attributes Set (Set = 01):
Mask Bit
Item Name
Length
(Bytes)
0
Line Type
1
1
Line Width
1
2-15
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
Character Attributes Set (Set = 02):
Mask Bit
Item Name
Length
(Bytes)
0
Angle X, Y
4
1
Cell size CW, CH
4
2
Direction
1
3
Precision
1
4
Symbol Set
1
5
Shear X, Y
4
6-15
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
Marker Attributes Set (Set = 03):
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
157
Mask Bit
Item Name
Length
(Bytes)
0-1
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
2
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
3
Precision
1
4
Symbol Set
1
5-6
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
7
Marker Symbol
1
8-15
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
Pattern Attributes Set (Set = 04):
Mask Bit
Item Name
Length
(Bytes)
0-4
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
5-6
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
7
Pattern Symbol
1
8-15
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
Arc Parameters Set (Set = 0B):
Mask Bit
Item Name
Length
(Bytes)
0
P Value
2
1
Q Value
2
2
R Value
2
3
S Value
2
4-15
Reserved (Mask Bits = 0)
–
If the self-describing instructions do not specify a current default, the printer uses the standard graphic
default for that parameter. The standard default values for the graphic segments are:
Description
Value
Color
Black
Line Type
Solid
Line Width
Normal
Character Angle
No Rotation
Character Cell
Standard Size (19 Dots Hight by 21 Dots Wide in 1/144 in. Units)
Character Direction
Left to Right
Character Set
Current Set (through the operator panel)
Character Font
NLQ Courier
Marker Symbol
Cross
Pattern Symbol
Solid Shading
Current Position
X, Y = 0, 0
158
Programmer Manual
Description
Value
Arc Parameters
P = Q = 1, R = S = 0
Foreground Mix
Overpaint
Background Mix
Leave Alone
Character Precision
Character Precision
Marker Precision
Character Precision
Marker Symbol Set
Resident Set in Printer
Note: Standard NLQ text character images (18 1/144 in. high by 20 1/200 in. wide) map to the standard
size graphics character so that their upper left corners are coincident.
Write Graphics (WG)
Length
D685
BSI
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
One or More Drawing Orders
The Write Graphics command transmits graphic data to the printer. The data in this command consists of
picture segments that contain the drawing orders that define the picture in the graphic medium
presentation space. Any number of Write Graphics commands may follow the Write Graphics Control
command.
The Write Graphics command has a data length restriction of 32K. Within this data-length limit, the Write
Graphics command can transmit partial segments, full segments, multiple segments, or any combination of
these. Segments and drawing orders must be transmitted in the order in which they are to take effect.
When the printer encounters a partial segment, the printer expects the next graphics data to be the
remainder of the segment. This condition is called graphics spanning. For a spanned segment, the
segment length is the length of the entire segment before spanning. The Write Graphics command length
is the actual number of bytes being transmitted in the current command.
The valid sequence for graphics spanning is as follows:
v Write Graphics command with zero or more segments, followed by the start of a partial segment
v Zero or more XOA, NOP, or STM commands
v A new Write Graphics command with a continuation of the partial segment, followed by zero or more
segments.
All segments are run in deferred mode; drawing orders are included in the picture as they are received.
The printer does not retain or store the segments. Receipt of the first segment starts the drawing process.
Begin Segment Introducer (BSI)
BSI
One or More Drawing Orders
The Begin Segment Introducer precedes all of the drawing orders that are together in the graphic
segment. The following chart shows the format of the BSI:
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
0
0
70
Begin Segment Command
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
159
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
1
1
0C
Length of the Following Parameters in BSI
2-5
2-5
NAME
Name of Segment (Printer ignores this field)
6
6
00
Reserved
7
7
Bit 0-2
Reserved (Must be Zeros)
Bit 3
Prologue Flag
0 - No Prologue
1 - Prologue
Bit 4
Reserved
Bit 5-6
Segment Flags
00 - New Segment (Reinitialize Current Drawing Attributes)
11 - Append This Segment to the Previous Segment (Do Not
Reinitialize Current Drawing Attributes)
Bit 7
Reserved
8-9
8-9
LEN
Length of Created Segment
10-13
A-D
NAME
Predecessor/Successor Name (The Printer Ignores This Field)
14-n
E-n
ORDER
Drawing Order or Orders (The Number of Bytes in This Field
Must Equal the Length Field, Bytes 8-9)
If bit 3 of byte 7 is on, a prologue is the first sequence of drawing orders in a new segment. The prologue,
if present, is always at the beginning of a new segment's data and ends by an End Prologue order within
the same segment.
If bits 5 and 6 of byte 7 are zero, the drawing attributes are re-initialized to the current default values. If
bits 5 and 6 of byte 7 are equal to 11, this segment appends to the previous segment and the current
drawing attributes do not reinitialize.
Drawing Orders: One or more drawing orders follow each Begin Segment Introducer. The format of a
drawing order is:
Order Code
Order Code
Parameter(s)
Order Code
Length
Parameter(s)
The order code specifies the type of graphics to print or the assigned drawing attribute.
The Length field, if present, is a one byte value that specifies the length of the drawing order following this
byte. See the specific drawing orders for information about the length field.
The parameter bytes contain the specific characteristics for the drawing order. For information about the
parameters, see the specific drawing orders, following this description.
160
Programmer Manual
Code
Drawing
Code
Drawing
00
No Operation
33
Set Character Cell Size
01
Comment
34
Set Character Angle
04
Reserved (Treated as a No-op)
38
Set Character Set
08
Set Pattern Set
39
Set Character Precision
0A
Set Color (Graphics)
3A
Set Character Direction
0C
Set Mix
3B
Set Marker Precision
0D
Set Background Mix
3C
Set Marker Set
11
Set Fractional Line Width
3E
End Prologue
18
Set Line Type
43
Reserved (Treated as a No-op)
19
Set Line Width
60
End Area
21
Set Current Position
68
Begin Area
22
Set Arc Parameters
71
End Segment (Treated as a No-op)
26
Set Extended Color
81
Line at Current Position
28
Set Pattern Symbol
82
Marker at Current Position
29
Set Marker Symbol
83
Character String at Current Position
85
Fillet at Current Position
C1
Line
87
Full Arc at Current Position
C2
Marker
91
Image at Current Position
C3
Character String
92
Image Data
C5
Fillet
93
End Image
C7
Full Arc
A1
Relative at Current Position
D1
Begin Image
E1
Relative Line
The following sections describe the drawing orders.
No Operation
00
Description: This order is a no-operation; it has no effect on the graphic medium presentation space or
any attribute or any current parameter.
Comment
01
L1
P1...Pn
Description: This order is a no-operation; it has no effect on the graphic medium presentation space or
any attribute or any current parameter. This order can appear anywhere within the segment.
L1 is the length byte. This byte is a value between 1 and 255 and specifies the number of data bytes that
follow. Parameters P1 to Pn are the data bytes. The printer ignores the data within the order. However,
there must be at least one data byte within this order.
Segment Characteristics
04
L1
P1...Pn
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
161
Description: This order is for compatibility with existing products and is a No Operation order.
Set Pattern Set
08
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the current pattern set attribute. Parameter byte P1 has the
following value:
00
Pattern default
Set Color
0A
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the current graphic color attribute. The color for non-graphics (for
example, text) does not change with this order. The color attribute applies to all following graphic drawing
orders until another Set Color order or Set Extended Color order occurs or until a new graphic segment
initializes the graphic attributes. This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
Parameter P1 specifies the color, as follows:
Hex
Color (See note)
00
Current Default
07
Black
08
Color of Medium
Note: The 4247 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values
for graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of
unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'01' through X'06') are
simulated by printing in black.
If the color requested is not available, the printer uses black. If this occurs, the Exception Handling
Control determines whether to report this condition. The EHC also determines whether to continue
with the Write Graphics command.
For all color selections except the color of the medium, graphics prints in black. These selections
overpaints previous graphics (if of a different color) by changing the color of the dots to print. For a
color of medium selection, following graphics overpaints previous graphics by deleting (erasing) the
dots to print.
Set Mix
0C
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the current mix attribute. The mix controls the way that the
printer combines the color of the foreground with the color of the medium presentation space. Parameter
byte P1 contains the value of the current mix attribute. The only valid values for this byte are:
00
Use the default (overpaint)
02
Overpaint - The color attribute value of the foreground replaces the color attribute value of the
graphics medium presentation space.
162
Programmer Manual
Set Background Mix
0D
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the background mix. The background mix controls the way the
printer combines the color of the background with the color of the graphics medium presentation space.
Parameter byte P1 contains the value of the current mix attribute. The only valid values for this byte are:
00
Use the default (leave alone)
05
Leave Alone - The color attribute value of the medium presentation space does not change.
Set Fractional Line Width
11
02
P1
P2
Description: The Set Fractional Line Width order sets the line width attribute. This order changes only the
line width attribute. The printer uses the last line width received, no matter which order, Fractional Line
Width Order or Set Line Width, sets the line width. Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte sequence that
specifies the line width, as follows:
Hex Value
Line Width
0000
Current Default
0001 - 017FF
Normal Line (One Dot Wide)
0180 - FFFF
Thick Line (Two Dots Wide)
This order aids graphics interchange capability. See also “Set Line Width” on page 164.
Set Line Type
18
P1
Description: The Set Line Type order sets the value of the current line type attribute. This order does not
change any other graphic drawing order attributes.
Parameter P1 specifies the type of line for the graphic output. The following values are valid for P1:
Hex
Line Type
00
Current Default
01
Dotted Line
02
Short Dashed Line
03
Dash-Dot Line
04
Double Dotted Line
05
Long Dashed Line
06
Dash-Double Dot Line
07
Solid Line
08
Invisible Line
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
163
Set Line Width
19
P1
Description: The Set Line Width order specifies the line width for subsequent graphics. This order
changes the fractional line width attribute only. The printer uses the last line width received, no matter
which order, Set Fractional Line Width Order or Set Line Width, sets the line width. Parameter P1 specifies
the width of the line for the graphic output. The following values are valid for P1:
Hex
Line Type
00
Current Default
01
Normal Line (One Dot Wide)
02-FF
Thick Line (Two Dots Wide)
Set Current Position
21
04
P1-P4
Description: This order sets the current graphics position for a subsequent drawing order. The position for
non-graphics (for example, text) does not change.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate in drawing units. Parameters
P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate in drawing units. The printer resolves the
coordinates to the nearest increment of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]).
Set Arc Parameters
Description: This order specifies the parameters for a full arc (circle or ellipse), which the Full Arc orders
use.
The center of this circle or ellipse is the origin (coordinate 0,0). The circle or ellipse is drawn in a
counterclockwise direction. Parameters P1 to P8 form four two byte values that specify the coordinates of
the major and minor axis ends, as follows:
P1P2 - The X coordinate of the major axis end
P3P4 - The Y coordinate of the minor axis end
P5P6 - The X coordinate of the minor axis end
P7P8 - The Y coordinate of the major axis end.
For an ellipse:
(P1P2) x (P5P6) + (P3P4) x (P7P8) = 0
For a circle of radius r, the parameters are:
P1P2 = P3P4 = r, P5P6 = P7P8 = 0
For an ellipse with major axis a and minor axis b, the parameters are:
P1P2 = a, P3P4 = b, P5P6 = P7P8 = 0
For the above ellipse, tilted at an angle A to the X axis, the parameters are:
P1P2 = a cos(A)
P3P4 = b cos(A)
P5P6 = -b sin(A)
P7P8 = a sin(A)
This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
164
Programmer Manual
Set Extended Color
26
02
P1
P2
Description: This order functions the same as the Set Color order except that it specifies a length field
and the color parameter contains two bytes. The color for non-graphics (for example, text) does not
change with this order.This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
This order aids graphics interchange compatibility.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the color, as follows:
Hex
Line Type
0000
Current Default
0008
Black
FF00
Black
FF07
Black
FF08
Color of Medium
Note: The 4247 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values
for graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of
unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',
X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.
For all color selections except the color of the medium, graphics prints in the selected color. These
selections overpaint previous graphics (if of a different color) by changing the color of the dots to be
printed. For a color of medium selection, following graphics overpaints previous graphics by deleting
(erasing) the dots to print.
Set Pattern Symbol
28
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the current shading pattern attribute for subsequent area
shading. For additional information, see “Begin Area” on page 169 and “End Area” on page 168.
Parameter P1 specifies the pattern attribute value. This value determines which particular pattern from the
pattern symbol set the printer uses to shade (fill) the interior of subsequent areas. The pattern attribute
values are:
Hex
Line Type
00
Current Default
01 - 08
Density 1 to Density 8 (Decreasing)
09
Vertical Lines
0A
Horizontal Lines
0B
Diagonal Lines 1 (Bottom Left to Top Right)
0C
Diagonal Lines 2 (Bottom Left to Top Right)
0D
Diagonal Lines 1 (Top Left to Bottom Right)
0E
Diagonal Lines 2 (Top Left to Bottom Right)
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
165
Hex
Line Type
0F
No Shading
10
Solid Shading
40
Blank
Set Marker Symbol
29
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the current marker symbol attribute for subsequent markers. See
“Marker” on page 174 and “Marker at Current Position” on page 170 orders.
Parameter P1 specifies the marker symbol attribute value. This value determines which marker from the
marker symbol set the printer uses for subsequent orders. The following are the marker symbol values:
Hex
Line Type
00
Current Default
01
Cross
02
Plus
03
Diamond
04
Square
05
Six Point Star
06
Eight Point Star
07
Filled Diamond
08
Filled Square
09
Dot
0A
Small Circle
40
Blank
Set Character Cell Size
33
04
P1-P4
21
08
P1-P8
or
Description: This order specifies the size of the character cell for output characters with subsequent
Character String orders. The character cell size for non-graphics (for example, text) does not change with
this order. The Set Character Cell order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
There are two types of formats with this order. The first format has a length of 4 and has four parameter
bytes. The second format has a length of 8 and has eight parameter bytes.
For both formats, parameters P1P2 form a two byte value that specifies the width of the character in
drawing units. Parameters P3P4 form a two byte value that specifies the height of the character in drawing
units.
166
Programmer Manual
For the second format, the width and height of the character cell contain both integer and fractional values.
Parameters P5P6 form a two byte value that specifies the fractional portion of the width of the character in
drawing units. Parameters P7P8 form a two byte value that specifies the fractional portion of the height of
the character in drawing units. There is an implied decimal point between P1P2 and P5P6, and between
P3P4 and P7P8.
The printer pads the standard graphics character cell with spaces to achieve the desired spacing. The
printer also adjusts the character size within the specified cell in integer multiples of the standard size
graphics character. The minimum character image (resulting from graphics mapping) is the standard size
graphics character, even though the scaled character cell may be smaller. In this case, overlapping of
characters may occur.
Note: The printer clips the expanded graphics representation of the last vertical column of a downloaded
NLQ character (see Load Symbol Sets).
Set Character Angle
34
04
P1-P4
Description: This order specifies the angle of the baseline of graphic character strings that print using
subsequent character string orders. The non-graphics (for example, text) character angle does not change
with this order. Angles of 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees are valid. This order does not change any other
graphic drawing order attributes.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate. Parameters P3 and P4 form
a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate. To meet the requirement that the angle be 0, 90, 180, or
270 degrees, either the X or the Y coordinate must equal zero, as follows:
If X > 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is zero degrees (default).
If X = 0 and Y > 0, then the angle is 90 degrees.
If X < 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is 180 degrees.
If X = 0 and Y < 0, then the angle is 270 degrees.
If X = 0 and Y = 0, then the angle is zero degrees.
If neither the X nor the Y coordinate is zero, the printer uses the current default for this drawing order.
Set Character Set
38
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the current character set attribute. The character set specified by
this command must use an NLQ font if printing high-density graphics or a DP font if printing low-density
graphics. Downloaded DP characters are not supported in graphics.
Parameter P1 specifies the local character set identifier. A value of 0 or X'FF' selects the current drawing
default. A value of X'01' to X'FE' selects a local ID for the character set. This local ID is mapped to a
global font ID by the Load Font Equivalence command. See “Load Font Equivalence (LFE)” on page 107.
Set Character Precision
39
P1
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
167
Description: This order sets the value of the current character precision attribute. Parameter P1 specifies
the type of precision. Precision 2 (character precision) is the only valid type of precision for this printer. P1
must equal 01 or 02. P1 set to X'00' is the current default.
Set Character Direction
3A
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the character direction attribute. Subsequent strings that print
using the Character String order will print in the direction specified relative to the character baseline angle.
See “Set Character Angle” on page 167. The character direction for non-graphics (text) does not change
with this order. This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes.
Parameter P1 specifies the direction, as shown:
Hex
Line Type
00
Current Default
01
Left to Right
02
Top to Bottom
03
Right to Left
04
Bottom to Top
Set Marker Precision
3B
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the current marker precision attribute. Parameter P1 specifies
the type of precision. Precision 2 (character precision) is the only valid type of precision for this printer. P1
must equal 01 or 02.
Set Marker Set
3C
P1
Description: This order sets the value of the current marker symbol set attribute. Parameter P1 specifies
the local character set identifier. This printer only uses the default marker set. Thus, P1 must equal 00.
End Prologue
3E
P1
Description: This order ends the prologue section of a segment. It is only valid if the prologue flag bit is
on in the Begin Segment Introducer (BSI). When the BSI prologue flag bit is on, only the following orders
are valid before the End Prologue order:
v Comment
v No Operation
v Segment Characteristics
v All Set Attribute type orders.
End Area
80
168
L1
Programmer Manual
P1-Pn
Description: This order indicates the end of the boundary of an area specified with a Begin Area order.
This order does not change any other graphic drawing attributes. However, orders between a Begin
Area/End Area pair can update the current position.
L1 is the length of the data, P1 to Pn. If no data is present, the length is zero.
Parameters P1 to Pn are optional data bytes, and if present, must be zeros.
Within the area boundaries, one or more closed figures can exist. A figure ends either by an End Area
order or by a order specifying a coordinate that implies the start of a new closed figure. These orders
include a Line, Relative Line, Arc, Full Arc, Fillet, or Set Current Position order.
Each closed figure should close properly; its start and end points should be identical. If not, the figure
closes arbitrarily with a straight line connecting the start and end points.
Begin Area
68
P1
Description: This order indicates the beginning of the boundary of an area that the printer shades. The
area definition must terminate with an End Area order.
The area boundaries consist of one or more closed figures. Each closed figure is made up of a continuous
set of straight lines, full arcs, and fillets defined using the Line at Current Position, Fillet at Current
Position, and Full Arc at Current Position orders. The pattern symbol and the shading color for the area
are the attribute values that are current prior to the Begin Area order. Only the following orders are valid
between a Begin Area and an End Area order:
v Comment
v Line or Relative Line
v Line at Current Position
v Relative Line at Current Position
v Set Arc Parameters
v Full Arc at Current Position
v Full Arc or Fillet
v Fillet at Current Position
v Set Color or Set Extended Color (see note)
v Set Line Type, Set Line Width, or Set Fractional Line Width (see note)
v Set Current Position.
Note: When used between Begin Area and End Area drawing orders, the orders Set Color, Set Extended
Color, Set Line Type, Set Line Width, and Set Fractional Line Width update the values of their
respective current attributes only for the Area boundary, if drawn. These orders do not update their
respective current values for the area fill pattern after an area has begun.
Use of the Line, Relative Line, Full Arc, and Fillet in the non At Current Position form can cause the printer
to arbitrarily close the area figure. The recommended orders to use within an area definition are those in
the At Current Position form.
The printer cannot nest Area orders. The Begin Area order does not change any other graphic drawing
attributes. However, orders between a Begin Area/End Area pair can update the current position.
Parameter P1 is a flag byte that specifies whether boundary lines are to be drawn, as shown:
Bit 0
Reserved
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
169
Bit 1
0 = Do Not Draw Boundary Lines
1 = Draw Boundary Lines
Bits 2-7
Reserved
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, pattern, and pattern set when shading
the area. If boundary lines are drawn, the printer uses the current values of graphics color, line type, and
line width. The printer shades any commented region with an odd number of line crossings from infinity.
This shading uses the current values of pattern symbol, color, mix, and background mix from the Begin
Area order. The printer will not shade regions with an even number of line crossings from infinity. The
printer counts all coincident boundary lines when counting line crossings.
The current position is the last coordinate value of the preceding drawing order. The Set Current Position
order can move the current position to any drawing order coordinate within the limits of the GDD defined
medium presentation space window.
Note: When filled areas are drawn such that some boundaries coincide, it is recommended that they be
drawn with the same value for Parameter P1 so that the area boundary is drawn properly.
Line at Current Position
81
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies one or more connected lines. The printer draws a line from the current
graphics position to the points specified by the first set of X and Y coordinates in the parameters. The
printer then draws additional lines from the previous end point to the next coordinate pair, if additional
coordinates are present.
The printer uses the current attributes for color, mix, line type, and line width in drawing the lines.
L1, the length, specifies the number of bytes following this byte. The value of L1 must be a multiple of
four. If L1 is zero, no line is drawn.
Parameters P1 to Pn, if present, form two byte values that specify the X and Y coordinates of the end
points for a series of connected lines. This order updates the current graphics position to the last line end
point. If the order does not specify any points, the current graphics position does not change. P1 and P2
form a two byte sequence that specifies the X coordinate of the second end point. P3 and P4 form a two
byte sequence that specifies the Y coordinate of the second end point. Additional X and Y coordinates, if
present, are specified in the remaining parameters, following the same format.
Marker at Current Position
82
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies one or more marker symbols, which the printer places at the points
specified by a pair of X and Y coordinates, beginning with the current graphics position. The Set Marker
Symbol order determines the marker that prints.
L1, the length, specifies the number of bytes following this byte. The value of L1 must be a multiple of
four. A value of zero for L1 is valid and results in only one marker symbol being drawn at the current
graphics position.
Parameters P1 to Pn, if present, form two byte values that specify the X and Y coordinates for each
additional marker symbol. The printer draws the first marker symbol at the current graphics position. P1
170
Programmer Manual
and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the second X coordinate. P3 and P4 form a two byte value
that specifies the second Y coordinate. Any remaining parameters specify additional coordinate values for
additional markers, using the same format.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, marker, precision marker set, and
marker symbol for drawing the marker.
This order updates the current graphics position to the value of the last point coordinates. If this order
does not specify any points, the current graphics position will not change.
Note: The marker cell size is constant 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144 in.]). The scaling factor used in defining a
graphics area does not affect the size of the marker. If markers are used near the edge of a defined
graphics area, scaling the graphics may result in the markers being clipped from the printable
graphics area.
Character String at Current Position
83
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order draws a character string, starting at the current graphics position. A previous Set
Character Set order specifies the font to use for drawing the character string. If no previous Set Character
Set order has been processed, the printer uses the drawing default character set.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, and character precision when drawing
the string. The Set Character Cell, Set Character Angle, and Set Character Direction orders determine the
character size, character angle, and character direction, respectively.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the character string. If L1 is zero, no character string is
drawn.
Parameters P1 to Pn, the character string, are one-byte values that specify the code points (characters) of
the character string to be drawn, using the currently active character set.
Fillet at Current Position
85
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies a curved line that the printer draws tangential to a specified set of
connected, imaginary, straight lines. The printer uses the current graphics position for the first point and
the parameter (or parameters) specifies additional points to use.
The printer joins the points specified by imaginary straight lines. The printer then fits a curve to the lines,
as follows:
v The curve is tangent to the first line at the start point and to the last line at its end point.
v If there are intermediate lines, the curve is tangent to these lines at their center points.
L1 specifies the length of the parameter (or parameters) in this order. The value of L1 must be a multiple
of four. A value of zero for L1 is invalid.
The first end point for the imaginary line specifying the fillet is the graphics current position. Parameters P1
to Pn form two byte values that specify additional X and Y coordinates. These coordinates are additional,
sequential end points of the imaginary lines specifying the fillet.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the fillet.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
171
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.
Full Arc at Current Position
87
02
P1
P2
Description: This order specifies a full arc (circle or ellipse) with the center at the current graphics
position. A previous Set Arc Parameters order determines the shape and orientation of the arc. If no Set
Arc Parameters order has been received, then the printer draws an arc using the default values of the arc
parameters.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the scale. P1 specifies the integer portion of
the scale; P2 specifies the fractional portion of the scale (P2 divided by 256). For example, if P2 equals
X'40', the decimal value of P2 is 64. This value (64) divided by 256 equals the fraction one-fourth.
The scale value acts as a multiplier for the arc parameters. For a circle, the radius is P1P2 x r. A previous
Set Arc Parameters order specifies the value of r.
For an ellipse: The major axis is P1P2 x a, the minor axis is P1P2 x b, and a previous Set Arc Parameters
order specifies the values for a and b.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the arc.
This order does not update the current graphics position.
Begin Image at Current Position
91
06
P1-P6
Description: This order defines an image, with the top left corner of the image at the current graphics
position. An image consists of a rectangular region with a resolution of one pel, defined in increments of
0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]). Each pel, therefore, represents one dot in the printed image. One or more
Image Data orders follow the Begin Image at Current Position order. The Image Data orders contain the
image data itself. The Begin Image at Current Position order introduces a graphics image. Only Image
Data, Comment, or No-op orders are valid between Begin Image and End Image orders.
Parameters P1 and P2 are always zero for this order. Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that
specifies the width of the image in increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]). Parameters P5 and P6
form a two byte value that specifies the height of the image in increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144
in.]).
The printer uses the current values of color and mix when drawing the image.
Note: The Begin Image at Current Position order always specifies the width and height of the image in
increments of 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]), not in drawing units.
Image Data
92
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies the image data for all or part of an image introduced by a Begin Image
order. A Begin Image order must precede an Image Data order.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length (in bytes) of the image data that follows. Valid values for
L1 are X'00' through X'FF'.
172
Programmer Manual
Parameters P1 to Pn are values that specify the image dot data, a zero indicating the absence of a dot, a
one indicating the presence of a dot. The dots are 0.18 mm (0.007 in. [1/144 in.]) apart horizontally and
vertically.
The image data is in the form of horizontal scan lines (rows), left to right. Each Image Data order specifies
only one scan line (row) of the image. Therefore, the number of Image Data orders following a Begin
Image order must be equal to the value specified in parameters P5 and P6 (the image height) of the Begin
Image order.
Each of the parameters, P1 to Pn, of the Image Data order specifies eight dots. Therefore, parameter L1
of the Image Data order must equal the image width divided by eight. Parameters P3 and P4 of the Begin
Image order specify the image width. If the image width is not a multiple of eight, the printer ignores any
extra dots specified by bits in the last parameter, Pn.
Note: The image data specified in the Image Data Orders between a Begin Image and End Image pair
must exactly fill the area specified by the width and height of the Begin Image order.
This order does not update the current graphics position.
End Image
93
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order defines the end of an image. A Begin Image order and zero or more Image Data
orders must precede the End Image order.
L1, the length, is a one-byte value that specifies the number of parameter bytes that follow. If no
parameter bytes follow, L1 is zero.
Parameters P1 to Pn are optional. The printer does not use these parameters; if they are present, the
printer discards them.
This order does not update the current graphics position.
Relative Line at Current Position
A1
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies one or more connected straight lines, like the Line at Current Position
order. With this order, the end point of each line is an offset from the previous end point, rather than an
absolute coordinate pair.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field. L1 must be a multiple of two. The
printer will not draw a line if L1 is zero.
Parameters P1 to Pn are signed, twos-complement, one-byte values that specify the offset, in drawing
units. The first line end point is the graphics current position. P1 specifies the X coordinate for the second
point as an offset from the first point. P2 specifies the Y coordinate for the second point as an offset from
the first point. The remaining parameters, if present, specify additional X and Y coordinate values, as
offsets from each previous end point, following the same format.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the line.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last end point. If there are no
offsets in this order, the current graphics position does not change.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
173
Line
C1
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies one or more connected lines.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. The value of L1 must be
a multiple of four and cannot be zero. If L1 equals four, no line is drawn, but the printer updates the
graphics current position to the points specified by parameters P1 to P4.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the first X coordinate point. Parameters P3
and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the first Y coordinate point. Parameters P5 to P8, if present,
specify the second X and Y coordinate points. The printer draws a line from the point specified by the first
pair of coordinates to the point specified by the second pair of coordinates. If additional coordinate pairs
are present, the printer draws additional lines from the previous end point to the next coordinate pair.
This order uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width.
Following this order, the printer updates the graphics current position to the last end point specified in the
order.
Marker
C2
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies one or more marker symbols to place at the points specified by pairs of
coordinates. The specified location is the center of the marker.
A previously specified Set Marker Symbol order determines the marker symbol the printer uses. If no
previous Set Marker Symbol order was processed, the printer uses the current graphics default marker
symbol. The printer uses the current values of color, mix, background mix, marker precision, marker set,
and marker symbol when drawing the markers.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. The value of L1 must be
a multiple of four. If L1 equals zero, the printer does not draw a marker.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate point for the first marker.
Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate point for the first marker.
Parameters P5 to Pn, if present, specify the X and Y coordinate points for additional markers.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last end point.
Note: The marker cell size is constant 3 mm (0.12 in. [17/144 in.]). The scaling factor used in defining a
graphics area does not affect the size of the marker. If markers are used near the edge of a defined
graphics area, scaling the graphics may result in the markers being clipped from the printable
graphics area.
Character String
C3
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order draws a character string starting at the specified location. A previous Set
Character Set order specifies the font to use for drawing the character string. If no previous Set Character
Set order was processed, the printer uses the drawing default character set.
174
Programmer Manual
The printer places the character cell of the first character in the string at the specified graphics position.
The Set Character Cell, Set Character Angle, and Set Character Direction orders determine the character
size, character angle, and character direction, respectively. The printer uses the current values of color,
mix, background mix, and character precision when drawing the string.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. L1 must be greater than
or equal to four. If L1 equals four, the printer does not draw the character string, but the printer updates
the graphics current position to the point specified by parameters P1 to P4.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the starting location.
Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the starting location.
Parameters P5 to Pn, if present, are one-byte values that specify the code points of the character string,
using the currently active character set.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.
Fillet
C5
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies a curved line, which the printer draws tangential to a specified set of
connected, imaginary, straight lines.
The printer joins the points specified in the order by imaginary straight lines. The printer then fits a curve
to the lines. The curve is tangent to the first line at the start point and is tangent to the last line at its end
point. If there are intermediate lines, the curve is tangent to these lines at their center points.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the following parameters. L1 must be a multiple of four
and cannot equal zero. If L1 equals four, the printer does not draw the fillet, but the printer updates the
graphics current position to the point specified by parameters P1 to P4.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the first point. Parameters
P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the first point. Parameters P5 to Pn, if
present, form two byte values that specify the corresponding coordinate values for additional points. If only
two points are specified, the printer draws a straight line.
The printer uses the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the fillet.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last point.
Full Arc
C7
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies a full arc (circle or ellipse) with the center at the specified point. A
previous Set Arc Parameters order determines the shape and orientation of the arc. If no previous Set Arc
Parameters order was processed, the printer draws the arc using the graphics default arc parameters.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate for the center of the arc.
Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate for the center of the arc.
Parameters P5 and P6 form a two byte, unsigned, floating point value that specifies the scale. P5 specifies
the integer portion of the scale; P6 specifies the fractional portion of the scale. There is an implied decimal
point between P5 and P6. Byte P6 represents the fraction given by the value of P6 divided by 256 (see
“Full Arc at Current Position” on page 6-88).
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
175
The scale value acts as a multiplier for the arc parameters, as follows:
For a circle: The radius is P5P6 x r. A previous Set Arc Parameters order specifies the value of r. For an
ellipse: The major axis is P5P6 x a and the minor axis is P5P6 x b.
A previous Set Arc Parameters order specifies the values for a and b. The printer uses the current values
of color, mix, line type, and line width when drawing the arc.
This order does not update the current graphics position.
Begin Image
D1
0A
P1-P10
Description: This order defines an image at the graphics position specified by parameters P1 to P4. An
image consists of a rectangular region defined in increments of 1/144 in. One or more Image Data orders
follow the Begin Image order. The Image Data orders contain the image data itself. The Begin Image order
introduces a graphics image. Only Image Data, Comment, or No-op orders are valid between Begin Image
and End Image orders.
Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate for the start of the image.
Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate for the start of the image.
Parameters P1 to P4 define the location of the top left corner of the image. Parameters P5 and P6 are
always zero for this order. Parameters P7 and P8 form a two byte value that specifies the width of the
image in increments of 1/144 in. Parameters P9 and P10 form a two byte value that specifies the height of
the image in increments of 1/144 in.
The printer draws the image in the current values of color and mix.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the image (parameters P1 to P4).
Notes:
1. The Begin Image at Current Position order always specifies the width and height of the image in
increments of 1/144 in., not in drawing units.
2. By sending the image ordered (immediate) instead of unordered (deferred), the printer uses less
storage.
Relative Line
E1
L1
P1-Pn
Description: This order specifies one or more connected straight lines, like the Line order, except that the
end point of each line is an offset from the previous end point.
L1 is a one-byte value that specifies the length of the parameter field that follows. A value of zero for L1 is
invalid; L1 must be a multiple of 2. If the value of L1 is two, the printer does not draw the line. However,
the printer does update the graphics current position to the point specified by P1 and P2.
Parameters P1 to Pn are signed, twos-complement, one-byte values that specify the offset in drawing
units. Parameters P1 and P2 form a two byte value that specifies the X coordinate of the first end point of
the line. Parameters P3 and P4 form a two byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the first end point
of the line. Parameter P5 is a signed, twos-complement, one-byte value that specifies the X coordinate of
the second end point as an offset from the first end point. Parameter P6 is a signed, twos-complement,
176
Programmer Manual
one-byte value that specifies the Y coordinate of the second end point as an offset from the first end point.
The remaining parameters, if present, specify additional X and Y coordinate values as offsets from the
previous point, following the same format.
The printer draws the line in the current values of color, mix, line type, and line width.
This order updates the current graphics position to the coordinates of the last offset point. If there are no
offset points with this order, the current graphics position does not change.
End (END)
For a description of the End control, see “End (END)” on page 114.
Related Drawing Orders
The following list contains drawing orders that relate to a selected order. That is, when defining parameters
for a specific order, the additional orders in the list are also affected or should be considered.
Table 6. Related Drawing Order
Set Color
Set Extended Color
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Image Data, End Image
Marker, Marker at Current Position
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Line Width
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
177
Table 6. Related Drawing Order (continued)
Set Current Position
Line at Current Position
Fillet at Current Position
Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Image at Current Position
Marker at Current Position
Character String at Current Position
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Arc Parameters
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Set Extended Color
Set Color
Line, Line at Current Position
Fillet, Fillet at Current Position
Begin Area, End Area
Full Arc, Full Arc at Current Position
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Image Data, End Image
Marker, Marker at Current Position
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Pattern Symbol
Begin Area, End Area
Set Marker Symbol
Marker
Marker at Current Position
Set Character Cell Size
Set Character Angle (Related to Cell Size, Not affected by It)
Set Character Direction (Related to Cell Size, Not affected by It)
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Set Character Angle
Set Character Cell Size (Related to Character Angle, Not affected by It)
Set Character Direction (Related to Character Angle, Not affected by It)
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Set Character Direction
Set Character Angle (Related to Character Direction, Not affected by It)
Set Character Cell Size (Related to Character Direction, Not affected by
It)
Character String
Character String at Current Position
End Area
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Pattern Symbol
Begin Area
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Begin Area
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Pattern Symbol
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
End Area
178
Programmer Manual
Table 6. Related Drawing Order (continued)
Line at Current Position
Line, Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Color
Set Extended Color
Set Current Position
Marker at Current Position
Marker
Set Marker Symbol
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Current Position
Character String at Current Position
Character String
Set Character Direction
Set Character Angle
Set Character Cell Size
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Current Position
Fillet at Current Position
Fillet
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Current Position
Full Arc at Current Position
Full Arc
Set Arc Parameters
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Current Position
Begin Image at Current Position
Begin Image
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Image Data
End Image
Set Current Position
Image Data
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
End Image
End Image
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Image Data
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Relative Line at Current Position
Line, Relative Line
Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
179
Table 6. Related Drawing Order (continued)
Line
Line at Current Position
Relative Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Color
Set Extended Color
Marker
Marker at Current Position
Set Marker Symbol
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Character String
Character String at Current Position
Set Character Direction
Set Character Angle
Set Character Cell Size
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Fillet
Fillet at Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Full Arc
Full Arc at Current Position
Set Arc Parameters
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Begin Image
Begin Image at Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Image Data
End Image
Set Current Position
Relative Line
Line
Relative Line at Current Position
Line at Current Position
Set Line Type
Set Line Width
Set Fractional Line Width
Set Current Position
Set Color, Set Extended Color
Bar Code Function Set Commands
The bar code function set contains the commands and controls for presenting bar code information on a
logical page, a page segment, or an overlay area on the physical medium. The following commands are
the bar code function set:
Command
Code
Description
WBCC
D680
Write Bar Code Control
WBC
D681
Write Bar Code
END
D65D
End
The following pages describe the bar code function set commands.
180
Programmer Manual
Write Bar Code Control (WBCC)
Length
D680
BCAP
BCOC
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
BCDD
The Write Bar Code Control command causes the printer to enter the bar code block state in the current
page, overlay, or page segment state. The parameters of this command define the size, placement, and
orientation of the bar code block. Parameters in this command also establish the initial conditions for
interpreting the bar code data.
Note: The quality of the bar code output is affected by the bar code mode and direction parameter values
selected at the operator panel (see the User’s Guide for your model printer), and by the Print
Quality Control command (see “Print Quality Control (PQC)” on page 132).
A bar code block contains one or more bar code symbols with or without human readable interpretation of
the bar encoded information. Because an important application of bar code printing is printing bar code
symbols on labels, means are provided in the function set to repeat symbols. The repeated symbols must
be of the same type, but the length and content of the variable data can be different. General parameters
applying to all the repeated symbols are in a single Write Bar Code Control command. Parameters that
always change or can change from symbol to symbol are in the Write Bar Code command. A separate
Write Bar Code command must be used with the variable bar code data for each symbol.
Upon receiving the Write Bar Code Control command, the printer enters the appropriate bar code block
state. The printer then initializes control for processing bar code symbols in subsequent Write Bar Code
commands. Receiving the End Code in the bar code block state terminates the processing of bar code
data.
The Write Bar Code Control command data contains three consecutive structured fields:
v Bar Code Area Position (BCAP)
v Bar Code Output Control (BCOC)
v Bar Code Data Descriptor (BCDD).
Each structured field contains a two byte length field, then a two byte structured field ID, and finally a data
field.
Note: For more detailed information on bar codes, see Appendix C, “4247 Bar Code and OCR Printing
Options,” on page 323.
Bar Code Area Position (BCAP)
BCAP
Length
BCOC
ID
BCDD
Data
The Bar Code Area Position Control structured field is the first structured field in the DATA portion of the
Write Bar Code Control command. This field defines the origin and orientation of the bar code block
relative to the reference coordinate system. The format of the BCAP field is:
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
0-1
0-1
000B - XXXX
Length of This Field
2-3
2-3
AC6B
Structured Field ID
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
181
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
4-5
4-5
8000 - 7FFF
X Coordinate of Origin of Bar Code Block
6-7
6-7
8000 - 7FFF
Y Coordinate of Origin of Bar Code Block
8-9
8-9
0000
When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate
system with the inline orientation equal to 0 degrees, you must
use the 0 or 90 degree orientation for bar codes.
2D00
Note (2)
5A00
10
11-x
A
B-x
8700
When you use the I,B reference system and the inline
orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 or 270 degree
orientation for bar codes.
00
Absolute I, Absolute B
20
Absolute I, Relative B
40
Relative I, Absolute B
60
Relative I, Relative B
A0
Absolute X, Absolute Y
Reserved
Notes:
1. Any positive or negative value fitting in the two byte field is allowable. Negative values are in
twos-complement form. Figure 6-38 shows the BCAP field specifying the top left reference point, or
origin, for the bar code block, relative to the logical page.
2. Bar codes with a unit/module width of 0.533 mm (0.021 in.) cannot be printed in high speed mode. Bar
codes with a unit/module width of 0.356 mm (0.014 in.) and a wide-to-narrow ratio of 2.5:1 cannot be
printed in high speed mode.
Figure 26. Specifying the Bar Code Block Using the Bar Code Area Position Field
Byte A of the BCAP specifies the reference coordinate system. The reference coordinate system for
determining the top left corner of the bar code area can be either the X,Y or the I,B coordinate system.
If byte A equals X'00', the absolute I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes 4 and 5
specify the text inline coordinate. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the text baseline coordinate.
182
Programmer Manual
If byte A equals X'20', the absolute I and relative B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes
4 and 5 specify the text inline coordinate. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text baseline coordinate
position prior to bar codes.
If byte A equals X'40', the relative I and absolute B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes
4 and 5 add to the last text inline coordinate position prior to bar codes. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 specify the
text baseline coordinate.
If byte A equals X'60', the relative I and B coordinates determine the top left corner. BCAP bytes 4 and 5
add to the last text inline coordinate position prior to bar codes. BCAP bytes 6 and 7 add to the last text
baseline coordinate position prior to bar codes.
If byte A equals X'A0', the current logical page X and Y coordinates determine the origin. When the block
is within a page, BCAP bytes 4-7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate origin specified
in a previously received LPP command (or from the printer default coordinates if no LPP command
received). When the block is within an overlay that is invoked using an LCC command, BCAP bytes 4-7
specify the offset from the Xm-coordinate and Ym-coordinate origin. When the block is within an overlay
that is invoked using an IO command, BCAP bytes 4-7 specify the offset from the X-coordinate and
Y-coordinate origin specified in the IO command.
When you use the X,Y coordinate system or the I,B coordinate system with the inline orientation equal to 0
degrees, you must use the 0 or 90 degree orientation for bar codes.
When you use the I,B reference system and the inline orientation is 180 degrees, you must use the 180 or
270 degree orientation for bar codes.
Bar Code Output Control (BCOC)
BCAP
Length
BCOC
ID
BCDD
Data
The Bar Code Output Control structured field is the second structured field in the DATA portion of the Write
Bar Code Control command. This field specifies the mapping option for the bar code block. This field is
optional and may not be present in the Write Bar Code Control command.
If the BCOC field is not present, the bar code block is equal to the bar code medium presentation space.
The format of the BCOC field is:
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
0-1
0-1
0010 - XXXX
Length of This Structured Field
2-3
2-3
A66B
Structured Field ID
4
4
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
01
Unit Base (10 cm)
05A0 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 in.)
1626 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 cm)
1 - 7FFF
Block Width (X-Extent of Block)
FFFF
Use LPD Value
1 - 7FFF
Block Height (Y-Extent of Block)
FFFF
Use LPD Value
30
Area Mapping Option - Position
5-6
7-8
9-10
11
5-6
7-8
9-A
B
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
183
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
12-13
C-D
8000 - 7FFF
X Offset of Medium Presentation Space Origin in Units
14-15
E-F
8000 - 7FFF
Y Offset of Medium Presentation Space Origin in Units
16-x
10-x
Reserved
Figure 27 shows the BCOC field specifying the size of the bar code block on the logical page.
Figure 27. Specifying the Bar Code Block Size Using the Bar Code Output Control
Bar Code Data Descriptor (BCDD)
BCAP
Length
BCOC
ID
BCDD
Data
The Bar Code Data Descriptor structured field is the last structured field in the DATA portion of the Write
Bar Code Control command. This field specifies the parameters that define the bar code symbols that
print. The format of the BCDD field is:
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
0-1
0-1
001B - XXXX
Length of This Structured Field
2-3
2-3
A6EB
Structured Field ID
4
4
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
01
Unit Base (10 cm)
5
5
6-7
6-7
8-9
184
8-9
Programmer Manual
Reserved
05A0 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 in.)
1626 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 cm)
05A0 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 in.)
1626 - 7FFF
Units per Unit Base (10 cm)
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
10-11
A-B
1 - 7FFF
X-Extent of Medium Presentation Space (Width)
FFFF
Use BCOC bytes 7-8 if BCOC is present. Otherwise, use LPD
value.
1 - 7FFF
Y-Extent of Medium Presentation Space (Height)
FFFF
Use BCOC bytes 9-A if BCOC is present. Otherwise, use LPD
value.
12-13
C-D
14-15
E-F
Reserved
16
10
Bar Code Type
17
11
18
12
19-20
00
Reserved
01
3 of 9 Code
02
MSI
03
UPC - Version A
04
Reserved
05
UPC - Version E
06
UPC - Two Digit Add-On (Magazine)
07
UPC - Five Digit Add-On (Paperback)
08
EAN-8
09
EAN-13
0A
2 of 5 Industrial
0B
2 of 5 Matrix
0C
2 of 5 Interleaved
0D
Codabar
0E-10
Reserved
11
Code 128
12-15
Reserved
16
EAN Two Digit Add On (Magazine)
17
EAN Five Digit Add On (Paperback)
18
POSTNET (See Note 6)
Modifier (See Note 1)
01-FE
Local Font ID (See Note 4)
FF
Printer Default
13-14
Color support (See note 7)
0000
Printer Default (Black)
0008
Black
FF00
Printer Default (Black)
FF07
Color of Medium
FF08
Printer Default (Black)
FFFF
Use Current Default
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
185
Decimal
Hex
21
15
22-23
16-17
24
18
25-26
19-1A
27-x
Content
Description
Unit/Module Width (See Note 2)
0E
0.36 mm (0.014 in.) Width
11
0.43 mm (0.017 in.) Width (Must have 0 in bytes 8-9 of BCAP)
15
0.53 mm (0.021 in.) Width
1C
0.71 mm (0.028 in.) Width
FF
Printer Default
1 - 7FFF
Element Height (See Note 3)
FFFF
Printer Default
1 - FF
Height Multiplier (See Note 3)
Wide-to-Narrow Ratio (See Note 5)
2, 14
2:1
19, 0FA
2.5:1
3, 1E
3:1
FFFF
Printer Default
1B-x
Reserved
Notes:
1. The meaning of byte 11 (modifier byte) is dependent upon the bar code type. For the meaning of this
byte, see “Modifier Byte” on page 188
2. Any bar code can print with a unit/module width of 0.36 mm (0.014 in.). The only bar codes that can
print with a unit/module width of 0.53 and 0.71 mm (0.021 and 0.028 in.) are: Code 128, Codabar,
Code 3 of 9, MSI, 2 of 5 Industrial, 2 of 5 Matrix, and 2 of 5 Interleaved. If an unsupported unit/module
width is specified, the closest smaller supported unit/module width is used. For 0.43 mm (0.017 in.),
bar code block must equal 0 in BCAP bytes 8 - 9.
3. For all bar code types except UPC and EAN, the specified height equals the height of the bar/space
patterns. For UPC and EAN bar codes, the specified height includes the bar/space patterns and the
HRI. If a UPC or EAN bar code specifies a height less than or equal to 190 units at 1440 units per in.,
the height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height and the total height is the specified
height plus the HRI height (180 units at 1440 units per in.).
If UPC supplemental or EAN add-on bar codes specify a zero degree rotation and a height less than
or equal to 460 units at 1440 units per in., the top of the bar/space patterns begins at the symbol
reference point. The height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height, and the total height
equals the specified height plus the HRI height (450 units at 1440 units per in.). Otherwise, the top of
the HRI begins at the symbol reference point and the specified height includes the bar/space patterns
and the HRI.
If UPC supplemental or EAN add-on bar codes specify a 90 degree rotation and a height less than or
equal to 420 units at 1440 units per in., the top of the bar/space patterns begins at the symbol
reference point. The height of the bar/space patterns equals the specified height, and the total height
equals the specified height plus the HRI height (410 units at 1440 units per in.). Otherwise, the top of
the HRI begins at the symbol reference point and the specified height includes the bar/space patterns
and the HRI.
4. Byte 12 selects a Local Font ID, either OCR-A or OCR-B, for use when printing the Human Readable
Information (HRI) beneath the bar code. The list below shows the bar code types that use OCR-A and
those that use OCR-B:
OCR-A
Code 128
Code 3 of 9
186
Programmer Manual
OCR-B
UPC - Version A
UPC - Version E
OCR-A
MSI
2 of 5 Industrial
2 of 5 Matrix
2 of 5 Interleaved
Codabar
OCR-B
UPC - Two Digit Add-On (Magazine)
UPC - Five Digit Add-On (Paperback)
EAN-8
EAN-13
EAN Two Digit Add-On
EAN Five Digit Add-On
5. Wide-to-Narrow ratio is only valid for the following bar code types:
v Code 3 of 9 (X'01')
v MSI (X'02')
v 2 of 5 Industrial (X'0A')
v 2 of 5 Matrix (X'0B')
v Interleaved 2 of 5 (X'0C')
v Codabar (X'0D')
The default ratio for Codabar, Code 3 of 9, and the 2 of 5 types is 2.5:1 for unit/module width of 0.36
and 0.43 mm (0.014 and 0.017 in.), 3:1 for 0.53 mm (0.021 in.), and 2.5:1 for 0.71 mm (0.028 in.) The
default for MSI is always 2:1.
6. BCDD bytes 12 and 15-1A and WBC command byte 0 are not applicable to POSTNET; these bytes
are ignored by the printer as the POSTNET Specification defines values for these parameters.
7. The 4247 Printer provides Limited Simulated Color Support. All architecturally defined color values for
graphics data are accepted and result in simulation of the specified colors without generation of
unsupported color exceptions. All valid colors not listed in the above table (X'0001' through X'0007',
X'0009' through X'0010', and X'FF01' through X'FF06') are simulated by printing in black.
8. If the color requested is not available, the printer uses black.
Figure 28 on page 188 shows the BCDD field specifying the size of the bar code medium presentation
space within the bar code block on the logical page. The bar code medium presentation space must fit
within the bar code block.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
187
Figure 28. Specifying the Bar Code Medium Presentation Space Size. Using the Bar Code Data Descriptor
Modifier Byte: 3 of 9 Code:
01
Print bar code with no printer generated check character.
02
Generate check character and print with bar code.
MSI Code:
01
Print bar code with no printer generated check character.
02
Print bar code with IBM Modulus 10 check digit generated by the printer and put at the end of the
data. This check digit will be the second check digit.
03
Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will also be IBM Modulus 10.
04
Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check
digit equals remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.
05
Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check
digit equals remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.
06
Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check
digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals zero.
188
Programmer Manual
07
Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check
digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals zero.
08
Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be NCR Modulus 11. Check
digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.
09
Print bar code with both check digits generated by the printer and put at the end of the data. The
second check digit will be IBM Modulus 10. The first check digit will be IBM Modulus 11. Check
digit equals 11 minus remainder; check digit of 10 equals error.
UPC Version A:
00
Generate check digit and print standard symbol. Variable data field of Write Bar Code command
contains 11 bytes, first the number system digit, then the 10 article number digits.
UPC Version E:
00
Print bar code; six digits are bar encoded. Ten variable data characters are input. From the ten
input digits, the printer generates both the check digit and the six bar code characters. The printer
does not bar code the check digit. The check digit only assigns odd or even parity to the six bar
encoded digits.
UPC Two Digit Add-On:
00
Print the two supplemental digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command
variable data consists only of the two supplemental digits. The preceding Version A or E symbol
prints under control of separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.
UPC Five Digit Add-On:
00
Print the five supplemental digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command
variable data consists only of the supplemental digits. The preceding Version A or E symbol prints
under control of separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.
EAN-8:
00
Print the bar code symbol. The input variable data is seven digits: two flag digits and five article
identification digits. The seven digits are all bar coded along with a check digit generated by the
printer. The check digit follows the last article identification digit.
EAN-13:
00
Print the bar code symbol. The input variable data is twelve digits — two flag digits and ten article
identification digits, in that order. The first flag digit is not bar encoded. The second flag digit, the
article identification digits, and a check digit generated by the printer are bar encoded. The first
flag digit prints in human readable form at the bottom of the left quiet zone. The first flag digit
governs the A/B number set pattern of the bar/space encoding of the six digits to the left of the
center pattern.
Two of Five Industrial, Two of Five Matrix, Two of Five Interleaved:
01
Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit.
02
Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.
EAN Two Digit Add-On:
00
Print the two add-on digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command variable
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
189
data consists of only the add-on digits. The preceding EAN-13 symbol prints under control of
separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.
EAN Five Digit Add-On:
00
Print the five add-on digits (bar/space pattern and HRI). The Write Bar Code command variable
data consists of only the add-on digits. The preceding EAN-13 symbol prints under control of
separate Write Bar Code Control and Write Bar Code commands.
Codabar:
01
Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit.
02
Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.
Code 128:
01
Print the bar code with no printer generated check digit (4230 and 4224 emulation only)
02
Generate the check digit and print it with the bar code.
Note: Code 128 is normally printed with a check digit.
POSTNET:
00
Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET ZIP Code (5 digit) bar code symbol. The ZIP Code to be
bar encoded is defined as a 5-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code
(WBC) command. The POSTNET ZIP Code bar code is printed with a leading frame bar, the bar
encoded ZIP Code data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.
01
Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET ZIP+4 (9 digit) bar code symbol. The ZIP+4 code to be bar
encoded is defined as a 9-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code (WBC)
command. The POSTNET ZIP+4 bar code is printed with a leading frame bar, the bar encoded
ZIP+4 Code data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.
02
Print a U.S. Postal Service POSTNET Advanced Bar Code (ABC, 11 digit) bar code symbol. The
ABC code to be bar encoded is defined as an 11-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the
Write Bar Code (WBC) command. The POSTNET ABC bar code is printed with a leading frame
bar, the bar encoded ABC data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.
03
Print a variable length POSTNET bar code symbol. The code to be bar encoded is defined as a
n-digit, numeric (0-9), input data variable to the Write Bar Code (WBC) command. The printer
produces a bar code symbol without length checking; the symbol is not guaranteed to be
scannable or interpretable. The POSTNET variable-length bar code is printed with a leading frame
bar, the bar encoded data, a correction digit, and a trailing frame bar.
Write Bar Code (WBC)
Length
D681
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Write Bar Code command transmits data (code points) to output as a bar code symbol. This
command contains parameters that locate the symbol reference point within the bar code medium
presentation space. The WBC command also contains the variable bar code data for printing as bar/space
patterns and information about printing the code in human readable form.
A flag byte contains information as to whether a human readable interpretation (HRI) is to print, whether
the HRI is to be above or below the bar/space patterns, and for the 3 of 9 code, whether the HRI of the
start/stop character (a star or asterisk) is to print or not.
190
Programmer Manual
The HRI code prints in the OCR-A or the OCR-B font, depending on the bar code type. The following bar
codes print the HRI in OCR-A:
v Code 128
v Code 3 of 9
v MSI
v 2 of 5 Industrial
v 2 of 5 Matrix
v 2 of 5 Interleaved
v Codabar.
The following bar codes print the HRI in OCR-B:
v UPC-A
v UPC-E
v UPC Two Digit Add-On
v UPC Five Digit Add-On
v EAN-8
v EAN-13
v EAN Two Digit Add-On
v EAN Five Digit Add-On.
POSTNET bar codes have no HRI.
The DATA field for the WBC command has the following format:
Decimal
Hex
0
0
Content
Description
Flags
Bit 0
0 - Print Human Readable Code (HRI)
1 - Do Not Print HRI
Bit 1-2
00 - Printer Option
01 - Print HRI Below Symbol - Valid for Code 128, Codabar,
3 of 9, MSI, UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8, EAN-13, and All 2 of 5
Bar Codes.
10 - Print HRI Above Symbol - Not valid for UPC and EAN
without 2-Digit Supplemental and UPC and EAN 5-Digit
Supplemental.
11 - Invalid Combination
Bit 3
0 - Do Not Print Asterisk (*) with Bar Code 3 of 9
1 - Print Asterisk (*) with Bar Code 3 of 9
Bit 4-7
Reserved
1-2
1-2
1 - 7FFF
X Coordinate of Symbol Reference Point
3-4
3-4
1 - 7FFF
Y Coordinate of Symbol Reference Point
5-n
5-n
Bar Code Data (See Note 3)
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
191
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
Notes: If bar codes with human readable interpretation (HRI) are placed too close to the page edges, the human
readable characters may fall outside the physical medium boundaries. If the HRI falls outside the physical medium
boundaries, the characters may not print and a Position Check error, X'041100', may occur.
To ensure that the human-readable characters print, choose X and Y parameter values that allow sufficient space for
the characters to print. Some guidelines are:
1. For bar code types UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8, and EAN-13, choose X and Y coordinates that place the bar code at
least 3.88 mm (0.15 in.) from both the top and left edges of the page.
2. For bar code types UPC Two Digit Add-On and UPC Five Digit Add-On, choose a Y coordinate that places the
bar code at least 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) from the top edge of the page.
3. For Codabar bar codes, the data must include the START and STOP characters. For Code 128 bar codes, the
table on the following page should be used to determine the hex value of the desired character.
The symbol reference point must be inside the bar code medium presentation space and must lie within the logical
page.
Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC)
Table 7. Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC)
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
NUL
00
.
4B
i
89
I
C9
SOH
01
<
4C
FNC 1
8F
}
D0
STX
02
(
4D
j
91
J
D1
ETX
03
+
4E
k
92
K
D2
HT
05
|
4F
l
93
L
D3
VT
0B
&
50
m
94
M
D4
FF
0C
!
5A
n
95
N
D5
CR
0D
$
5B
o
96
O
D6
SO
0E
*
5C
p
97
P
D7
SI
0F
)
5D
q
98
Q
D8
DLE
10
;
5E
r
91
R
D9
DC1
11
_
60
~
A1
\
E0
DC2
12
/
61
s
A2
S
E2
DC3
13
,
6B
t
A3
T
E3
BS
16
%
6C
u
A4
U
E4
CAN
18
-
6D
v
A5
V
E5
EM
19
>
6E
w
A6
W
E6
GS
1D
?
6F
x
A7
X
E7
RS
1E
‘
79
y
A8
Y
E8
US
1F
:
7A
z
A9
Z
E9
FS
22
#
7B
^
BO
FNC 2
EA
LF
25
@
7C
[
BA
0
F0
ETB
26
’
7D
]
BB
1
F1
ESC
27
=
7E
FNC 4
BE
2
F2
192
Programmer Manual
Table 7. Code 128 Character Set (EBCDIC) (continued)
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
Character
Hex
ENQ
2D
"
7F
{
C0
3
F3
ACK
2E
a
81
A
C1
4
F4
BEL
2F
b
82
B
C2
5
F5
SYN
32
c
83
C
C3
6
F6
EOT
37
d
84
D
C4
7
F7
DC4
3C
e
85
E
C5
8
F8
NAK
3D
f
86
F
C6
9
F9
SUB
3F
g
87
G
C7
FNC3
FA
SP
40
h
88
H
C8
DEL
FF
Note: All START, STOP, SHIFT, and CODE characters are generated by the printer in order to produce
the shortest bar code possible from the given data.
Overlay Function Set Commands
The overlay function set contains the commands the printer uses to store, delete, and present information
in the overlay memory of the printer. These commands are independent of any specific data types used in
defining the overlay.
The overlay is contained between the Begin Overlay (BO) command and the End Page (EP) command
and cannot contain itself. Overlays can be nested; that is, overlays can contain other overlays. The depth
of the overlay nesting cannot exceed five levels.
Figure 29 shows an overlay nesting.
Figure 29. An Example of Overlay Nesting
The following commands are the overlay function set:
Command
Code
Description
BO
D6DF
Begin Overlay
DO
D6EF
Delete Overlay
IO
D67D
Include Overlay
The following pages describe the overlay function set commands.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
193
Begin Overlay (BO)
Length
D6DF
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Begin Overlay command causes the printer to leave the home state and enter the overlay state. This
command defines data that the printer saves for later use within an overlay. The printer later merges the
stored overlay with ordinary printed pages by using the Include Overlay command or the Load Copy
Control command. The current Load Page Description, Load Font Equivalence, and Load Equivalence
records, if any, become part of the definition of the overlay. The definition of the overlay terminates by an
End Page command. The overlay itself is between the Begin Overlay and the End Page commands.
The DATA field is one byte and it specifies the overlay ID. Valid values for this byte are decimal 1 through
254 (X'1' through X'FE''). If this value specifies an overlay identifier already loaded in the printer, an
exception occurs.
Note: Because overlays use more than the normal amount of printer storage, use overlays only when
data needs to be kept.
Delete Overlay (DO)
Length
D6EF
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Delete Overlay command deletes (clears) either a single overlay or all overlays from the printer
memory.
The DATA field is one byte in length and can be any value between 0 and 254 (X'00' to X'FE'). This value
is the overlay identifier, and it specifies the overlay to be deleted. If this value is zero, all overlays are
deleted.
Include Overlay (IO)
Length
D67D
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Include Overlay command causes a previously stored overlay to merge onto the current page at the
specified presentation position. Following the inclusion and processing of an overlay, the current print
position remains where it was prior to the overlay processing. The printer restores all page description
values, font and suppression equivalences, and text control values to the values that existed for each at
the time the overlay was processed.
The DATA field is 10 bytes in length, and contains the following:
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
0-1
0-1
0001 - 00FE
Overlay ID
2
00
Reserved
3-5
3-5
6
194
6
Programmer Manual
X Coordinate
000000 007FFF
Positive Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page
FF8000 FFFFFE
Negative Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page
FFFFFF
Use the Current Inline Text Position
00
Reserved
Decimal
Hex
7-9
7-9
Content
Description
Y Coordinate
000000 007FFF
Positive Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page
FF8000 FFFFFE
Negative Offset Value Relative to the Logical Page
FFFFFF
Use the Current Baseline Text Position
Note: Negative values must be specified in twos-complement form.
Page Segment Function Set Commands
The page segment function set contains the commands the printer uses to store, delete, and present
information in the page segment memory of the printer. These commands are independent of any specific
data types defining the page segment. The following commands are the page segment function set:
Command
Code
Description
BPS
D65F
Begin Page Segment
DPS
D66F
Deactivate Page Segment
IPS
D67F
Include Page Segment
The following pages describe the page segment function set commands.
Begin Page Segment (BPS)
Length
D65F
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Begin Page Segment command causes the printer to enter the page segment state. This command is
only valid in the home state. Receipt of an End Page command while in the page segment state causes
the printer to return to the home state.
The Page Segment command defines a segment of page data to save within the printer for later printing.
This printer later includes this segment when it receives the Include Page Segment command.
The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'01' and X'7F'. This value is the
page segment identifier. If this value specifies a page segment identifier already loaded in the printer, an
exception occurs.
Note: Because page segments use more than the normal amount of printer storage, use page segments
only when data needs to be kept.
Include Page Segment (IPS)
Length
D67F
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Include Page Segment command causes a previously stored set of commands to process in the input
data stream as though they were just received from the host. The printer places the segment at the
current presentation position and updates the presentation position as a result of this command.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
195
The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'01' and X'7F'. This value is the
page segment identifier, and it specifies the page segment to include. A value specifying a page segment
identifier that is not defined in the printer causes an exception to occur.
Deactivate Page Segment (DPS)
Length
D66F
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Deactivate Page Segment command deletes (clears) either a single page segment or all page
segments from the printer memory.
The DATA field is two bytes in length and can be any value between X'00' and X'7F'. This value is the
page segment identifier, and it specifies the page segment to delete. A value of zero deletes all segments.
Loaded Font Function Set Commands
The loaded font function set contains the commands the printer uses to download and delete font
information from the font storage of the printer. The following commands are the loaded font function set:
Command
Code
Description
LSS
D61E
Load Symbol Set
The following pages describe the loaded font function set commands.
Load Symbol Set (LSS)
Length
D61E
Flag
Correlation ID (Optional)
DATA
The Load Symbol Set command provides control and pattern information for code points of a font. This
command is only valid in the home state and does not result in a state transition. The DATA field contains
the following information:
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
0
0
90
FLAGS (Vertical Format Download - See Note 1)
1
1
00
Reserved
2
2
01-0F
Starting Code Point
3
3
00
Reserved
4
4
0D-FF
Additional Parameter Byte Length (This Value Is One More
Than the Number of Bytes Remaining)
5
5
60
No Self-Defining Fields Present
61
Self-Defining Fields Present
XX
Uniform Character Box Size X Dimension (See Note 2)
6
6
7
7
Uniform Character Box Size Y Dimension
DP and DP Text Quality
09
NLQ
12
8
8
00
Reserved
9
9
00
Reserved
196
Programmer Manual
Decimal
Hex
Content
Description
10
A
00
Reserved
11
B
01-FF
Ending Code Point
12
C
00
Reserved
13
D
00
Reserved
14
E
00
Reserved
15-16
F-10
0001 - 7EFF
Loaded Font Identifier (See Note 3)
17-x
11-x
00...00
Reserved (See Note 4)
(x+1) - xx
(x+1) - xx
02FF...XX
Self-Defining Fields
o-p
o-p
XX...XX
Character Raster Data
Notes:
1. Vertical format download refers to the method used to send the character patterns to the printer. The
bits are organized as a sequence of vertical cell slices. Each slice contains a number of bits equal to
the uniform box Y size (byte 7). Slices are contiguous (run together) in the raster pattern data. The last
slice of each character is padded with the minimum number of bits needed to reach a byte boundary.
Padded bits are always zeros. The number of vertical slices per character is equal to the uniform box
X size (byte 6).
The first vertical slice received by the printer is the left reference edge of the character box. The last
slice received is the right reference edge of the character box. The first received pel of each slice
makes up the top reference edge of each character box. The last received non-padding pel of each
slice makes up the bottom reference edge of each character box.
2. The meaning of this byte depends upon the font selected, as explained below.
3. An LFE entry must exist for this LFID prior to receiving the LSS command; otherwise an error occurs.
4. The value of byte 4 determines the number of bytes in this field.
5. Load symbol set into Fast Draft fonts is not allowed.
Character Box Size X Dimension (Byte 6): The meaning of byte 6 is as follows:
v Resident Fonts, except PSM
– 0A - DP Quality
– 14 - DP Text and NLQ Quality
v Resident PSM Fonts
– 01-FF - DP Text Quality
– 01-FF - NLQ Quality
v Non-Resident Fonts
– 01-FF - With Y Dimension (byte 7) equal to 09
– 01-FF - With Y Dimension (byte 7) equal to 12.
The print quality must be set appropriately (with the PQC command) before the LSS command is issued if
the font is present in the printer (specified by the LFE command).
Self-Defining Fields: If byte 5, bit 7, equals one, then the DATA field includes one or more self-defining
fields. The format of each field is:
L
T
Data
L and T are single byte values that specify the length and type of self-defining field. The only valid
self-defining field is the terminator field X'02FF', without any data. The character raster patterns
immediately follow this field. The printer ignores any other self-defining fields.
Chapter 4. IPDS Programming Information
197
Character Raster Patterns: Data in this field contains the actual code points (bit patterns) for the font
specified in bytes 0F and 10. If the font identifier matches an existing font ID, and one or more of the code
points specified in bytes 2 and 0B overlap previously specified code points, then the printer replaces the
character patterns of the previously specified code points, regardless of how they were originally loaded.
Note: We recommend that image data bits for the last vertical column of NLQ character patterns be all
zeros. The printer clips the graphics representation of the last vertical column if NLQ characters are
expanded for graphics printing (see “Set Character Cell Size” on page 166). Resident NLQ text
character patterns do not contain image data (dots) in the last column of the character box.
198
Programmer Manual
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
The following tables contain the exception reporting codes, which the printer sends to the host in the
NACK reply. These codes are in a three-byte format. The first byte, byte 0, is the error group. The
remaining two bytes, bytes 1 and 2, are the individual error identifiers. Table 8 shows the error group
meanings:
Table 8. Exception Reporting Group Codes
Byte 0
Error Type
80
“Command Reject - X'80'”
40
“Intervention Required - X'40'”
10
“Equipment Check - X'10'” on page 200
08
“Data Check - X'08'” on page 200
04
“Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04'” on page 200
03
“Specification Check-Graphics - X'03'” on page 202
02
“Specification Check-General - X'02'” on page 204
01
“Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01'” on page 213
Command Reject: Indicates that the printer cannot recognize a received command.
Intervention Required: Indicates that the printer requires operator intervention.
Equipment Check: Indicates that a hardware error has occurred. Data Check: Indicates that the printer
detects a data error when receiving a logical unit from the application program or that the printer detects a
data error while printing the page.
Specification Check: Indicates that the data parameters or values in a received command are invalid.
Condition Requiring Host Notification: Indicates that the printer has detected an error or condition that
should be reported to the host computer.
Command Reject - X'80'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a command reject condition:
X'800100'
Invalid IPDS Command Code
Explanation:
1. The command code is not recognized. A error length
on a previous command may have caused the
current data to be processed as a command.
X'800200'
Invalid IPDS Command Sequence
Explanation: The printer state is invalid for the
received command.
Alternate Exception Action: None
2. The command is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None
Intervention Required - X'40'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for an intervention required condition:
X'400000'
Printer Not Ready
Explanation: The printer needs operator intervention
to tear off a continuous forms paper source so paper
source switching can be done when in 4224 emulation
mode.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
199
X'400100'
Printer Out of Forms
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'401300'
Tear-Off Required
Explanation: The printer needs operator intervention
to tear off a continuous forms paper source so paper
source switching can be done.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'40E000'
Forms Jam
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'40E400'
Cancel Print Key Pressed
Explanation: The Cancel Print key was pressed while
the printer was receiving IPDS data.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'402000'
Incorrect Forms Module Selection
Equipment Check - X'10'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for an equipment check condition:
X'10F100'
Permanent Error
Explanation:
1. There was a permanent hardware error.
3. The microcode detected a condition that should not
have occurred.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
2. The microcode detected an irrecoverable logic error.
Data Check - X'08'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a data check condition:
X'082100'
Undefined Character
Explanation:
1. An undefined character code has been detected in
Write Text data.
2. An undefined overstrike character code has been
detected.
3. A character has been detected in Write Text
Command data which is undefined at the quality
level specified by the XOA-PQC command.
4. An undefined character code has been detected in
Write Bar Code data.
Alternate Exception Action: For reasons 1-3, print
the default character. For reason 4, there is no alternate
exception action.
X'08C100'
Position Check
Explanation: An attempt was made to print outside
the valid printable area.
Alternate Exception Action: All physical printing
outside the valid printable area is suppressed. All data
and controls continue processing. The printer continues
to print within the valid printable area to the greatest
possible extent. For text, this may mean truncating text
lines at the character boundary closest to the edge of
the intersection. For graphics, this may mean truncating
graphics pictures at the pel closest to the boundary. For
image, this may mean truncating scan lines at the pel
closest to the boundary, or alternatively, not printing any
of the image if any part of the image falls outside the
valid printable area.
Specification Check-Bar Code - X'04'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a bar code specification check condition:
X'040300'
Bar Code Type Requested Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The bar code type requested in the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'040400'
LCID Requested Is Not Supported
Explanation: The type style/font requested in the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.
200
Programmer Manual
Alternate Exception Action: Use printer default.
X'040500'
Bar Code Color Requested Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The color requested in the Write Bar
Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use printer default color.
X'040600'
Bar Code Color Requested Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The unit/module width specified in the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.
X'040E00'
Alternate Exception Action: Use closest smaller
width supported or the device default for those devices
with only one fixed default value.
Explanation: A first check digit calculation resulting in
a value of 10 is defined as an error in various of the
modifier options (byte 17 of the Bar Code Data
Descriptor structured field) for the MSI bar code.
X'040700'
Element Height Specified Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The element height specified in the Write
Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use closest height
supported.
X'040800'
Height Multiplier Specified Is Not
Supported
Explanation: The height multiplier specified in the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use closest multiplier
supported.
X'040900'
Wide/Narrow Ratio Is Not Supported
Explanation: The wide/narrow ratio specified in the
Write Bar Code Data Descriptor field is not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the printer default
wide element width. The default wide element width and
the specified or default unit/module width should be
such that a wide/narrow ratio of 2.50 or 3.00 results.
X'040A00'
Check Digit Calculation Error
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'041000'
HRI Location Not Supported
Explanation: HRI location specified in the FLAGS byte
of the WBC command is not a supported location.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'041100'
Attempt to Print Portion of Symbol
Outside Block or VPA
Explanation:
1. A portion of the bar code presentation space, as
mapped into the block, extends outside the bar code
block boundaries, or a portion of the bar code block
extends outside of the logical page (or current
overlay).
2. An attempt is made to print a bar code symbol or
HRI outside the physical page.
3. The symbol reference point lies outside the bar code
block, presentation space, or logical page (or current
overlay).
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Invalid Symbol Reference Point
Explanation: The symbol reference point given in the
Write Bar Code command is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'040B00'
Invalid Bar Code Modifier
Explanation: The bar code modifier, byte 17 of the
Bar Code Data Descriptor structured field, is not a valid
or supported value for the bar code type specified by
byte 16 of the same structured field.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'040C00'
Invalid Bar Code Data Length
Explanation: The length of the variable data (as given
in bytes 5-n of the Write Bar Code command) to be
bar-encoded/printed, plus any printer-generated check
digits to be coded/printed, is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
201
Specification Check-Graphics - X'03'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a graphics specification check condition:
X'030001'
Unallocated Graphic Order or
Command Code
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation:
1. An attempt was made to execute an unallocated
order code that is reserved for future use.
2. An attempt was made to execute an unallocated
command code that is reserved for future use.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'030002'
The end of a segment was reached without an End
Prologue order.
Reserved Byte Error or Invalid Default
Explanation:
1. A reserved byte in the graphic order is not set to
zero.
2. The Set Current Defaults instruction attempts, in
byte 2, to set an invalid or unsupported attribute.
3. An invalid default byte value was received in the
GDD.
X'03000E'
Unsupported Attribute Value
Explanation: An attribute value for a graphic order or
for a WGC Set Current Default instruction is not
supported.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard default
value for that attribute.
X'0300021'
Invalid Default
Explanation: The Set Current Defaults instruction sets
an invalid or unsupported default for an attribute.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'033400'
Character Angle Value Not Supported
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation: The specific character angle requested
is not supported.
X'030003'
Alternate Exception Action: Use the closest angle
supported by the printer.
Incorrect Drawing Order Length
Explanation: A drawing order length is invalid.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'033E00'
X'030004'
Invalid Attribute Value
Explanation: An attribute value for a graphic order or
for a WGC Set Current Default instruction is invalid.
Invalid End Prologue
Explanation: An End Prologue was found outside the
prologue section of a segment.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard default
value for that attribute.
X'036000'
X'030008'
Explanation: An End Area order has been executed
without a Begin Area order having previously been
executed.
Truncated Order Error
Explanation: An order has been requested that is not
a complete order. This order is one of the following:
Area Bracket Error
Alternate Exception Action: None.
1. A fixed 2-byte order and the second byte is not in
the segment.
X'038000'
2. A long order and the length byte is not in the
segment.
Explanation: Begin Area order received while Begin
Area is already in progress.
3. A long order and the number of bytes following the
byte containing the length count to the end of the
segment is less than the value of the length count.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'036801'
X'03000C'
Explanation: A Begin Area order has been executed
in a segment, and the end of the segment is reached
without an End Area order being executed. Area fill
implementation results are printer dependent.
Segment Prologue Error
Explanation: A supported order that is not valid within
a prologue was found in a prologue.
202
Programmer Manual
Begin Area Received Incorrectly
Area Truncation Error
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'036802'
Supported Order Invalid in Area
Explanation: A supported order is detected that is not
valid within an area.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'036803'
Pattern Symbol Set Not Available
Explanation: The symbol set identified by the current
Pattern Set is not available.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard default
pattern symbol set.
X'036804'
Undefined Pattern Symbol
Explanation: The current pattern symbol is undefined
in the pattern symbol set.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard default
pattern symbol.
X'037001'
Invalid Repeat/Append Bit
Explanation: The Begin Segment Repeat/Append bit
has a value of B'10' in chained immediate mode.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'037082'
Invalid Repeat/Append Bit
Explanation: The Begin Segment Repeat/Append bit
has a value of B'01'.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'0370C1'
Incorrect Number of Image Data Orders
Explanation: The number of Image Data orders
between the Begin Image and End Image orders is not
equal to the number of rows in the image (as given by
the value of height in the Begin Image order).
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'03C200'
Marker Symbol Set Not Available
Explanation: The symbol set identified by the current
Marker Set attribute is not available.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard default
marker symbol set.
X'03C201'
Undefined Marker Code
Explanation: A marker code point is undefined in the
current marker symbol set.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard default
marker symbol.
X'03C300'
Character Symbol Set Not Available
Explanation:
1. The symbol set identified by the current Character
Set is not available.
2. The current character set specified in the Set
Character Set order does not have the proper
attributes to be printed in graphics mode.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard default
character symbol set.
Invalid Begin Segment length
Explanation: The Begin Segment parameter length is
invalid.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'039200'
X'039301'
Graphic Image Order Sequence Error
X'03C301'
Undefined Graphics Character Code
Explanation: A code in a character string is undefined
in the current character symbol set.
Alternate Exception Action: Use the standard default
character symbol.
Explanation: A Begin Image order was not executed
before the Image Data order in this segment.
X'03D100'
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation: A Begin Image order has been executed
in a segment, and the end of the segment is reached
without an End Image order having been executed.
X'039201'
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Image Data Discrepancy
Explanation: There are insufficient or too many bytes
of data in the Image Data order.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'039300'
Graphic Image Bracket Error
Explanation: An End Image order is executed without
a Begin Image order having been previously executed.
X'03D101'
Truncated Graphic Image Error
Invalid Order in Graphic Image
Explanation: A Begin Image order has been executed
in a segment, and an order other than a Comment,
Image Data, or End Image order is executed.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
203
X'03D102'
Graphic Image Format Not Supported
Explanation: The value specified for the graphic
image format parameter is not supported.
Explanation: The Height value specified in the Begin
Image order exceeds the maximum image height
supported by the product.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: The image height is
truncated at the maximum height supported.
X'03D103'
X'03E100'
Image Width Greater Than Maximum
Supported
Explanation: The Width value specified in the Begin
Image order exceeds the maximum image width
supported by the product.
Relative Line Outside Coordinate
Space
Explanation: The relative line starts inside the drawing
order coordinate space but goes outside.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: The image width is
truncated at the maximum width supported.
X'03D104'
Image Height Greater Than Maximum
Supported
Specification Check-General - X'02'
The following exception codes are the valid codes for a general specification check condition:
X'020001'
Embedded Text Control Code Error
Explanation: Undefined text control code.
Alternate Exception Action: Ignore the control
sequence.
X'020201'
End Suppression Text Control Error
Explanation: The active Begin Suppression ID within
the current page, overlay, or page segment is not the
same as that specified in the ES control.
There is no active suppression ID.
X'020202'
Invalid IPDS Command Length
Explanation: The length for a command is not within
the allowed range.
The length of a Request Resource List entry is not a
valid or supported value.
The length specified for a Request Resource List entry
does not match the number of bytes received.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020205'
Invalid Data Structured Field Length
Explanation: A data structured field has been received
in a WGC or WBCC command that is less than the
minimum allowable length.
than 5 (or less than 7 if a correlation ID is included).
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020305'
Area Position Orientation is Not
Supported
Explanation: The orientation specified in the Area
Position structured field of the WGC or WBCC
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020401'
End Page Encountered During Active
Suppression
Explanation: The End Page control was encountered
before a text suppression ended.
Alternate Exception Action: Process the object as if
the corresponding End Suppression control sequence
appeared at the end of the object. That is, all of the
data following the Begin Suppression control sequence
in the object is processed and suppressed.
X'020402'
Acknowledge Reply Response
Continuation Request is Invalid
Explanation: The printer received a command whose
response continuation bit is on but there is no response
to continue.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020405'
X'020302'
IPDS Command Header Length too
Small
Explanation: The length value of a command is less
204
Programmer Manual
Area Position Reference System is Not
Supported
Explanation: The reference system specified in the
Area Position structured field of the WGC or WBCC
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020805'
X'020501'
Invalid Spanning Sequence
Explanation: A Write Text or Write Graphics command
is required to complete a partial order, control, or
double-byte character code and another command was
received other than an XOA command.
Invalid Mapping Option
Explanation: A mapping option specified in the Output
Control structured field of the WGC or WBCC command
is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020905'
X'020502'
Explanation: The axis offsets specified in the Output
Control structured field of the WGC or WBCC command
are not valid or supported values.
Unsupported Baseline Move
Explanation: Unsupported advancement of the
baseline coordinate toward the I-axis.
Invalid Axis Offsets
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020B05'
X'020505'
Structured Field Unit-Base Invalid
Explanation: The unit-base (measurement units)
specified in the Output Control or the Data Descriptor
structured field of the WGC or WBCC command is not a
valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020601'
Begin Suppression Error
Explanation: Begin Suppression encountered in the
same unit (page, segment or overlay) before previous
suppression in that unit ended.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020605'
Structured Field Units Invalid
Invalid Structured Field Identifier
Explanation: A two-byte structured field identifier in a
WGC or WBCC command is invalid or out of sequence.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'020F01'
Invalid Text Orientation
Explanation: Baseline or Inline orientation specified in
Set Text Orientation is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline orientation
of 0 degrees and a baseline orientation of 90 degrees.
X'021001'
Invalid Margin
Explanation: The margin position is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation:
1. The units specified in the Output Control or the Data
Descriptor structured field of the WGC or WBCC
command is not a valid or supported value.
2. The result of the calculation cannot be represented
in the printer. This may result from the WGC GDD
window limits being very close together.
X'021101'
Invalid Baseline Increment
Explanation: The value of the baseline increment is
not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
3. Coordinate overflow while scaling graphics. Possible
if scaling coordinates require multiplication by a
value greater than 1.
X'021201'
Alternate Exception Action: None.
1. The value of the intercharacter adjustment is not a
valid or supported value.
X'020705'
2. The intercharacter adjustment direction is not a valid
or supported value.
Structured Field Extents Not Supported
Explanation: The extents specified in the Output
Control or Data Descriptor structured field of the WGC
or WBCC command are not a valid or supported value.
The window values of the WGC GDD structured field
are not consistent; therefore, the value of XL is larger
than the value of XR or the value of YB is larger than
the value of YT.
Invalid Intercharacter Adjustment
Explanation:
Alternate Exception Action:
1. Ignore the control sequence and continue
presentation with the parameter values according to
the hierarchy (the hierarchy is the last valid value
received or if none received then use the LPD
value).
2. Use direction = zero.
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
205
Note: In an LPD command, no Alternate Exception
Action occurs.
X'021802'
Invalid Font ID
Explanation:
X'021202'
Font Storage is Full
Explanation: There is insufficient pattern storage to
store the font transmitted with the Load Symbol Set
command.
There is insufficient storage to load the data transmitted
with the Load Font Equivalence command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021301'
Invalid Absolute Move Baseline Value
Explanation: The Absolute Move Baseline parameter
value is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021401'
Invalid Absolute Move Inline Value
Explanation: The Absolute Move Inline parameter
value is not a valid or supported value.
1. The two-byte Font Identifier on a Load Symbol Set
or Load Font Equivalence command is not a valid or
supported value.
2. The one-byte Font Identifier value on the Load Font
Equivalence command is not a valid or supported
value.
3. A font is referenced on a Set Font control, a Logical
Page Description, a Load Symbol Set, a Write
Graphics, or Write Bar Code command, but the font
has not been previously identified by the Load Font
Equivalence command.
4. The font or symbol set referenced in a Logical Page
Description, Write Text, or Write Graphics command
is defined within the current Load Font Equivalence
but is not loaded in the printer.
Alternate Exception Action:
1. None.
2. None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
3. Substitute the active font for the specified local font
and continue processing.
X'021402'
4. Substitute the active coded font for the specified
local font and continue processing.
Font to be Deleted Not Found
Explanation: The single byte font specified by the
Deactivate Font command is not in the machine.
X'021901'
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation: The Repeat String target string length is
not a valid or supported value.
X'021403'
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation: Unsupported Baseline Move
X'021902'
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021502'
Invalid DF Font
Explanation: The Loaded Font Identifier field is
required in the Deactivate Font command; however, it is
not present or its value is not a valid or supported
value.
Repeat String Length Error
Multiple Occurrences of the Same LFE
Local ID
Explanation: Explanation: The one-byte Local
Identifier value in the Load Font Equivalence command
has been used more than once, making the Two-Byte
Font Identifier reference ambiguous.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021C01'
X'021701'
Explanation: A text control sequence contains a code
other than X'D3' following X'2B'.
Invalid Variable Space Increment
Explanation: The value of the variable space
increment as specified in a text control is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021702'
Invalid DF Deletion Type
Explanation: The Deletion Type on a Deactivate Font
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
206
Programmer Manual
Invalid Embedded Text Control
Sequence
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021D02'
Invalid LFE Identifier
Explanation: One or more of the following font
parameters listed in the LFE or their combination is not
valid or supported: Character Set ID, Code Page ID,
Uniform Character Increment, and Proportional
Increment Coefficient Table.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021E01'
Invalid Text Control Length
X'022802'
Explanation: The length of a text control is not valid.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021E02'
Mismatch Between Font and XOA Print
Quality Control
Explanation: The specified pattern download format in
LSS is either a reserved value or not supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'022902'
Explanation:
1. The combination of parameters specified in LFE are
not supported together with the quality indicated by
XOA Print Quality Control.
2. The Font (Style) ID specified in the LFE is invalid or
unsupported or is not valid with the other font
parameters.
LSS Pattern Download Format
Reserved or Not Supported
Invalid LSS Additional Parameter Byte
Length
Explanation: The additional parameter byte length
specified in the LSS command is outside the range
X'0D' through X'FF' or is not a supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: Choose “Best Fit” font.
X'023101'
Note: This error will be flagged when an attempt to
present the font is processed.
Explanation: The Number of Copies value specified
on the Load Copy Control command is not a valid or
supported value.
X'021F01'
Alternate Exception Action: Proceed as though the
number of copies field stated 1.
Repeat String Length Error
Explanation: Repeat String control on a Write Text
command has nonzero fill count but zero string length.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'021F02'
Mismatch of LFE Two-Byte Loaded
Font ID Parameters
Explanation: Two fonts have been assigned the same
two-byte Loaded Font ID by the LFE command, but one
or more of the following attributes differ: Character Set
ID, Code Page ID, Font (Style) ID, Uniform Character
Increment, Proportional Increment Coefficient Table.
X'023201'
Invalid LCC Number of Copies
Invalid LCC Number of Copies
Explanation: There is an invalid or unsupported Load
Copy Control keyword in the group entry.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'023401'
Invalid LCC Copy Group Byte Count
Explanation:
1. The number of bytes in Load Copy Control group is
not a multiple of two byte pairs.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
2. The number of bytes in Load Copy Control group is
not a valid or supported value.
X'022602'
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Invalid LSS X Box Size
Explanation: The Box X size, specified in Byte 6 of
the Load Symbol Set command, is not a valid or
supported value or is incompatible with the specified
font.
X'023601'
Invalid or Unsupported Load Copy
Control Simplex/Duplex Parameter
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation: The LCC command simplex/duplex
parameter is invalid or unsupported.
X'022702'
Alternate Exception Action: If invalid, none. If
unsupported, the printer prints simplex.
Invalid LSS Y Box Size
Explanation: The Box Y size, specified in Byte 7 of
the Load Symbol Set command, is not a valid or
supported value or is incompatible with the specified
font.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'023A02'
Maximum Number of Fonts Allowed by
the Printer Exceeded
Explanation: An attempt was made to download more
fonts than the printer can support.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
207
X'023F02'
Font Index Not Loaded
Explanation:
1. The font inline sequence in Load Font Equivalence
command is not supported or not supported with the
current Text Orientation.
2. The Font Index specified in a Load Font
Equivalence command called out by a Set Coded
Font Local text control is not loaded.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'024702'
Invalid LFE Font Inline Sequence
Explanation: The Font Inline Sequence parameter in
a Load Font Equivalence command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'024801'
X'024201'
Explanation: The Scan Line Direction parameter value
on the Write Image Control command is not a valid or
supported value.
WIC Pel Count < Minimum Required
Explanation: The Target or Source Pel Count value
on the Write Image Control command is less than 1.
Invalid WIC Scan Line Direction
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'024802'
X'024301'
WIC Pel Count > Maximum Allowed
Explanation: The Target or Source Pel Count value
on the Write Image Control command is greater than
the valid or supported maximum.
Invalid Font Section Number in LSS
command
Explanation: The section number specified in the LSS
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'024901'
X'024401'
WIC Scan Count < Minimum Required
Explanation: The Target or Source Scan Count value
on the Write Image Control command is less than 1.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Invalid WIC Scan Sequence Direction
Explanation: The Scan Line Sequence Direction value
specified on the Write Image Control command is not
plus ninety degrees from the Scan Line Direction value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Note: Plus ninety from 270, (X'8700') must be X'0000'.
X'024501'
WIC Scan Count > Maximum Allowed
Explanation: The Target or Source Scan Count value
on the Write Image Control command is greater than
the valid or supported maximum.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'024902'
Invalid Starting Code Point in LSS
command
Explanation: The Starting Code Point in the LSS
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'024601'
Invalid WIC Source Image Format
Explanation:
X'024A01'
1. The Compression Algorithm value (Byte 8) is not a
valid or supported value.
Explanation:
2. The (Pel) Data Format value (Byte 9) in the Write
Image Control command is not X'00'.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'024701'
Invalid WIC Scale Factor Value
Explanation:
1. The Pel Count Scale Factor value on the Write
Image Control command is not a valid or supported
value.
2. The Scan Count Scale Factor value on the Write
Image Control command does not equal the Pel
Count Scale Factor.
208
Programmer Manual
Invalid WIC Coordinate Specification
1. The Coordinate Definition value on the Write Image
Control command is not a valid or supported value.
2. The First Pel Location (X or I Direction) value on the
Write Image Control command is not a valid or
supported value.
3. The First Pel Location (Y or B Direction) value on
the Write Image Control command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'024A02'
Invalid WIC Coordinate Specification
Explanation: The Ending Code Point specified in the
LSS command is not a valid or supported value.
X'026102'
Invalid LPD Y Units/Unit-Base
Explanation:
Alternate Exception Action: None.
1. On the Logical Page Description command, the Y
units per unit-base value is not a valid or supported
value.
X'024B02'
2. On the Set Media Size command, the units per
unit-base value is not a valid or supported value.
Invalid Bit Values in Flag Bytes of LSS
Command
Explanation: One or more of the bits in the two Flags
bytes of the LSS command Extended Form,
Clear/Overstrike, Skip, APA/CB/OB, Use S. E. T. is not
a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'026202'
Invalid LPD X-Extent
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation: On the Logical Page Description
command, the X-Extent is not a valid or supported
value.
X'024C02'
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Invalid LSS Data Length
Explanation:
1. The LSS additional parameter byte length does not
correlate with the LSS data length.
2. An LSS self-identifying field length is not a valid or
supported value or does not correlate with the LSS
data length.
3. The amount of bit image data in the LSS command
does not correspond with the number of code
points, box size, and pattern download format.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'025301'
Invalid WIC Color Value
Explanation: The Color value of the WIC command is
not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: Use printer default
value.
X'025503'
Unsupported Color or Color Attribute
Invalid LPD Y-Extent
Explanation: On the Logical Page Description
command, the Y-Extent is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'026401'
Insufficient Control Storage for Image
Explanation: There is insufficient control storage to
print the image data transmitted with the Write Image
command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'026402'
Invalid LPD Unit-Base
Explanation: On the Logical Page Description
command, the unit-base is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation:
1. The text color is not a valid or supported value.
2. The text color precision is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: If the attribute value is
not valid, ignore the control and continue presentation
with the value that was in effect prior to this control
sequence. If the attribute value is valid but unsupported
for this printer, use the printer default color.
X'026002'
X'026302'
Invalid LPD X Units/Unit-Base
X'026802'
Invalid LPD Inline Direction
Explanation: On a Logical Page Description command
the Inline Sequence Direction value is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline sequence
direction of 0 degrees and a baseline sequence
direction of 90 degrees.
X'026902'
Invalid LPD Baseline Direction
Explanation: On the Logical Page Description
command, the X units per unit-base value is not a valid
or supported value.
Explanation: On a Logical Page Description command
the Baseline Sequence Direction value is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: Use an inline sequence
direction of 0 degrees and a baseline sequence
direction of 90 degrees.
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
209
X'026A01'
Insufficient Source Image Data
X'028101'
Insufficient Storage for Overlay or
Page Segment
Explanation: The number of source image bytes
received < the number implied in the Write Image
Control command.
Explanation: There is insufficient storage to process
an overlay or page segment.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'026A02'
X'028501'
Invalid LPD Initial Inline Coordinate
Explanation: On a Logical Page Description
command, the initial inline coordinate value is not a
valid or supported value.
Invalid DO Parameter Value
Explanation: The Overlay Identifier on the Deactivate
Overlay command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'028A01'
X'026B01'
Excess Source Image Data
Explanation: The number of source image bytes
received > the number implied in the Write Image
Control command.
Invalid DPS Parameter Value
Explanation: The Page Segment Identifier on the
Deactivate Page Segment command is not a valid or
supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'029001'
X'026B02'
Invalid LPD Initial Baseline Coordinate
Explanation: On a Logical Page Description
command, the initial baseline coordinate value is not a
valid or supported value.
Overlay Number Outside Valid Range
Explanation:
1. The Overlay Identifier on the Begin Overlay
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
2. The Overlay Identifier on the Include Overlay
command is not a valid or supported value.
X'027002'
3. The Overlay Identifier on a Load Copy Control
command is not a valid or supported value.
Invalid Units Value in an XOH SMS
Command
Explanation: The units value in an XOH SMS
command is invalid or unsupported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'027202'
Invalid SMS X-Extent
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'029101'
BO Overlay Number Already Loaded
Explanation: The host attempted to download an
overlay from the Begin Overlay command that already
exists in the printer.
Explanation: On the Set Media Size command, the
X-extent is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'029102'
X'027302'
Explanation:
Invalid SMS Y-Extent
Explanation: On the Set Media Size command, the
Y-extent is not a valid or supported value.
Invalid Request Resource List
Parameter
1. The Requested Ordering parameter of a Request
Resource List order is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
2. The Entry Index parameter of a Request Resource
List order is not a valid or supported value.
X'027402'
3. The Resource Qualifier parameter of a Request
Resource List order is not a valid or supported
value.
Invalid SMS Unit Base
Explanation: On the Set Media Size command, the
unit-base is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
4. The Resource Type parameter on the Request
Resource List order is not a valid or supported
value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
210
Programmer Manual
X'029201'
Overlay Number Not Loaded
Explanation: The overlay identified by the Overlay
Identifier on the Include Overlay, Deactivate Overlay or
LCC command was not loaded or was already deleted
prior to its attempted use.
X'029801'
Suppression Number Outside Valid
Range
Explanation:
1. On a Write Text command, the Begin Suppression
number value is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
2. In a LCC command, the suppression number value
is not a valid or supported value.
X'029202'
Alternate Exception Action:
Invalid Print Quality Control Parameter:
Explanation: The Print Quality Control parameter is
X'00', which is a reserved value.
1. Ignore the control sequence.
2. None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'029803'
X'029301'
Recursive Overlay Invocation:
Explanation: An infinite nesting loop has occurred
with the Include Overlay command (for example, an
overlay has included itself).
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'029401'
Recursive Overlay Invocation:
Explanation:
1. The Page Segment Identifier on the Include Page
Segment command is not a valid or supported
value.
2. The Page Segment Identifier on the Begin Page
Segment command is not a valid or supported
value.
Temporary Baseline Move Error
Explanation:
1. The temporary baseline increment is not a valid or
supported value.
2. The temporary baseline move direction is not a valid
or supported value.
3. The temporary baseline move precision is not a
valid or supported value.
4. Unsupported multiple offset temporary baseline
move.
5. Unable to support temporary baseline move by
printing full size characters.
Alternate Exception Action:
1. None for reasons 1 through 4.
2. For reason 5, present according to the substitution
method.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'02A401'
X'029501'
Page Segment Number Already Loaded
Explanation: The host attempted to download a page
segment that already exists in the printer.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Logical-page boundary in the
X-direction cannot be represented
Explanation: In either the page or page overlay, the
sum of the logical page origin and the logical page size
in the X direction exceeds the maximum supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'029601'
Page Segment Number Not Loaded
Explanation: The page segment identified by the
Page Segment Identifier on the Include Page Segment
or Deactivate Page Segment command was not loaded
or was already deleted prior to its attempted use.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'02A501'
Logical-page boundary in the
Y-direction cannot be represented
Explanation: In either the page or page overlay, the
sum of the logical page origin and the logical page size
in the Y direction exceeds the maximum supported.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'029701'
Overlay Nesting Limit Exceeded
Explanation: Depth of overlay nesting is greater than
the maximum depth.
X'02AC01'
Insufficient Storage to Print the Sheet
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Explanation: Page is too large for main storage.
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
211
X'02AD01'
Invalid Logical Page Position
Parameter
Explanation: The X Coordinate value on the Logical
Page Position command is not a valid or supported
value.
The Y Coordinate value on the Logical Page Position
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'02AE01'
Invalid Include Overlay Position
Parameter
Explanation:
1. The X-Coordinate value on the Include Overlay
command is not a valid or supported value.
2. The Y-Coordinate value on the Include Overlay
command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'02C101'
Maximum Number of Simplex
Keywords in an LCC Command
Explanation: More than one simplex operation
keyword has been specified in an LCC command copy
group.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'02C102'
Load Equivalence Internal Value Not
Unique
Explanation: The first two bytes of two or more list
entries on the Load Equivalence command are not
unique. Setting both external values to the same value
will not prevent the error.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'02C602'
Invalid Load Equivalence Mapping
Type
Explanation: The Mapping Type on the Load
Equivalence command is not X'0100'.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
X'02C801'
An unsupported Input Media Source ID
was Specified
Explanation: An unsupported Input Media Source ID
was specified in an XOH-SIMS command.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
212
Programmer Manual
X'02C802'
Invalid Internal/External Value on LE
Explanation: The Internal or External value on a Load
Equivalence command is not a valid or supported value.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Conditions Requiring Host Notification - X'01'
X'010100'
Media Size or Input Media Source ID
Changed
Explanation:
1. The size of the media in one or more of the installed
input media sources was changed.
2. The input media source ID of one or more of the
installed input media sources was changed.
Alternate Exception Action: None.
Note: Not reported in 4224 Emulation Mode.
Chapter 5. IPDS Exception Reporting Codes
213
214
Programmer Manual
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
The following pages contain examples of the printing capabilities of the 4247 Printer and one IPDS coding
example.
Text Print Samples
Various print styles are available with
this printer. The data stream sent by
the host computer determines the print
style, characters per inch,
and character set.
There are four print qualities available:
This is Fast Draft Mode
(model Z03 only),
This is DP mode,
printed in the Gothic font,
This is DP Text mode,
printed in the Courier font.
This is NLQ mode,
printed in the Courier font.
Pitches include:
10 characters per inch,
12 characters per inch,
15 characters per inch
16.7 characters per inch
in DP quality
Printer can also be Underscored to emphasize important points.
215
Bar Codes
The following are sample bar code labels printed with the 4247 Printer:
216
Programmer Manual
Graphics Patterns
The following example shows the area fill patterns, line widths, line types, and marker symbols available
with this printer.
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
217
Graphics Example
The following drawing is an example of the graphics capabilities of the 4247 Printer. The actual IPDS
graphics data stream commands necessary to draw this graphic follow the example.
Data Stream for Graphics Example
********* BEGIN PAGE
0009D6AF0000000000
********* Write Graphics Control
003CD68400000BAC6B000000000000A0
0010A66B0038403DE030001000000000
001CA6BB00003840384000000000DB0010001000F000
000000000000
********* Write Graphics Command Header
037FD68500
********* Begin Segment
700C000000000000036C00000000
********* Set Character Cell Size
3304010E021C
********* Character String
C31DF32B0E10
********* String Data - EXPENITURE BY DEPARTMENT
C5E7D7C5D5C4C9E3E4D9C540C2E840C4C5D7C1D9E3D4C5D5E3
********* Character String
C313F8710BF4
********* String Data - FIRST HALF 1979
C6C9D9E2E340C8C1D3C640F1F9F7F9
********* Key Circles, Set Line Type979
1800
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2806
218
Programmer Manual
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Full Arc
C706ED680A8CF000
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2803
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Full Arc
C706F6DC0A8CF000
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
280D
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Full Arc
C706FFB00A8CF000
********* End Area
6000
********* COlor
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
280D
********* Set Line Type
1800
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB80654F1F00492F6280924
FA6000654FE98008702D00438070800FA
OB4002760CA8FF1F0F78010E
********* Set Line Type
1803
********* Line At Current Position
810C0F78FB14EDBBFB14EDB80654
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A08
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2800
********* Set Line Type
1800
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB8021CF1F00087F628
0384FA6001C2FE98FE3E02D0
00B40708FE110B40FFA60CA8
FD8A0F78FCD6
********* Set Line Type
1808
********* Line At Current Position
810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB8021C
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2803
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
219
Set Line Type
1800
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB8021CF1F00087F628
0384FA6001C2FE98FE3E02D0
00B40708FE110B40FFA60CA8FD8A0F78FCD6
********* Set Line Type
1808
********* Line
810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB8021C
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A08
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2800
********* Set Line Type
1800
********* Begin Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB8FE3EF1F0FD8AF628
FEC5FA60FE3EFE98FC7C02D
FE3E0708FBC80B40FCD6
0CA8FC220F78FBC8
********* Set Line Type
1808
********* Line At Current Position
810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB801C2
********* End Area
6000
********* Color
0A00
********* Set Pattern Symbol
2806
********* Set Line Type
1800
********* Begine Area
6840
********* Fillet
C528EDB8FE3EF1F0FD8AF628
FEC5FA60FE3EFE98FC7C02D0FE3E0708FBC80B40FCD6
0CA8FC220F78FBC8
********* Set Line Type
1808
********* Line At Current Position
810C0F78FB14EDB8FB14EDB801C2
********* End Area
6000
********* Axes and Tic Marks, Set Line Type
1800
********* Set Line Width
1902
********* Color
0A00
********* Line
C108EDB8FB14EDB80951
********* Line
C108EDB8FB140F78FB14
********* Line
C108EDB8FB14ED04FB14
********* Line
C108EDB8FCD6ED04FCD6
********* Line
C108EDB8FE98ED04FE98
220
Programmer Manual
********* Line
C108EDB8005AED04005A
********* Line
C108EDB8021CED04021C
********* Line
C108EDB803DEED0403DE
********* Line
C108EDB805A0ED0405A0
********* Line
C108EDB80762ED040762
********* Line
C108EDB80924ED040924
********* Line
C108EDB8FBF5ED5EFBF5
********* Line
C108EDB8FDB7ED5EFDB7
********* Line
C108EDB8FF79ED5EFF79
********* Line
C108EDB8013BED5E013B
********* Line
C108EDB802FDED5E02FD
********* Line
C108EDB804BFED5E04BF
********* Line
C108EDB80681ED5E0681
********* Line
C108EDB80843ED5E0843
********* Line
C108F358FB14F358FA8D
********* Line
C108FA60FB14FA60FA8D
********* Line
C1080168FB140168FA8D
********* Line
C1080870FB140870FA8D
********* Line
C1080F78FB140F78FA8D
********* Letters and Numbers, Set Character Cell
330400000000
********* Character String, DEPT. A
C30BEEC60A32
C4C5D7E34B40C1
********* Character String, DEPT. B
C30BF7EA0A32
C4C5D7E34B40C2
********* Character String, DEPT. C
C30B00E10A32
C4C5D7E34B40C3
********* Character String, 5
C305F2FEF9AC
F5
********* Character String, 10
C306F9ACF9AC
F1F0
********* Character String, 15
C30600BAF9AC
F1F5
********* Character String, 20
C30607BCF9AC
F2F0
********* Character String, 25
C3060EC4F9AC
F2F5
********* Character String, WEEKS
C309FD30F844
E6C5C5D2E2
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
221
********* Character
C306EB4208ca
F8F0
********* Character
C306EB420708
F7F0
********* Character
C306EB420546
F6F0
********* Character
C306EB420384
F5F0
********* Character
C306EB4201C2
F4F0
********* Character
C306EB420000
F3F
********* Character
C306EB42FE3E
F2F0
********* Character
C306EB42FC7C
F1F0
********* Character
C305EBF6FABA
F0
String, 80
String, 70
String, 60
String, 50
String, 40
String, 30
String, 20
String, 10
String, 0
********* Character Angle
3404000005A0
********* Character String, 1000
C308EAE800B4
F1F0F0F0
********* END
0005D65D00
********* END PAGE
0005D6BF00
222
Programmer Manual
IPDS Coding Example
The 4247 Printer produced this example of text, bar codes, and block graphic characters printing on the
front continuous forms paper source. The code used to print the example appears in Figure 30.
Figure 30. Print Sample from an IPDS Application Program
The following chart is an example of an IPDS application program that prints the block graphic characters,
two bar codes, and text information shown in Table 9, printing on the front continuous forms paper source.
The first column (IPDS Commands) contains abbreviations of the IPDS instructions that are coded in
column 2. Column 2 (Hexadecimal Code) contains the hexadecimal code that produces the characters, bar
codes, and text pictured in Table 9. Column 3 (Code Explanation) explains each command element.
When the application is actually coded, the hexadecimal code of each command may be entered in one
stream. The IPDS command abbreviations in the first column and the explanation of each part of the
command in the last column, are comments.
Table 9. IPDS Coding Example
IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code
Code Explanation
********
Printer Initialization
SHS
0005
Control Length
—
D697
Set Home State
—
00
Flag Byte
X0A(EHC)
000A
Control Length
—
D633
Execute Order Any State
—
00
Flag Byte
—
F600
Exception Handling Order
—
C1
Report All Exceptions
—
01
Do Not Take Alternate Action
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
223
Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code
Code Explanation
—
01
Print All Data and Exit
XOA(DBD)
0007
Control Length
—
D633
Execute Order Any Style
—
00
Flag Byte
—
F200
Discard Buffer Data
LPD
0030
Control Length
—
D6CF
Load Page Descriptor
—
00
Flag Byte
—
00
Units Base Value equals (10 in.)
—
00
Reserved
—
3840
X Units per Base Value
—
3840
Y Units per Base Value
—
00
Reserved
—
003570
Width of Page (Units)
—
00
Reserved
—
001EF0
Length of Page (Units)
—
00
Reserved
—
00
No Ordered Page
—
0000
Reserved
—
00000000
Reserved
—
0000
Reserved
—
0000
X-Axis Orientation (0 degrees)
—
2D00
Y-Axis Orientation (90 degrees)
—
0000
Initial X Displacement
—
0000
Initial Y Displacement
—
0000
Initial Left Margin
—
0000
Intercharacter Increment
—
0000
Reserved
—
FFFF
Baseline Increment (Use Default)
—
FF
Local Font ID (Use Default)
—
FFFF
Text Color (Use Default)
LPP
000F
Control Length
—
D66D
Load Page Position
—
00
Flag Byte
—
00
Reserved
—
000000
X Displacement
—
00
Reserved
—
000000
Y Displacement
—
0000
Reserved
XOH(SMS)
000E
Control Length
224
Programmer Manual
Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code
Code Explanation
—
D68F
Execute Order Home State
—
00
Flag Byte
—
1700
Set Media Size (SMS)
—
00
Units Base Value equals (10 in.)
—
3840
Units per Base Value
—
3570
X-Extent of Physical Medium
—
1EF0
Y-Extent of Physical Medium
LFE
0015
Control Length
—
D63F
Load Font Equivalence
—
00
Flag Byte
—
07
Local ID
—
0007
Loaded Font ID
—
0000
Character Rotation (0 degrees)
—
0000
Reserved
—
0025
Code Page ID (USA)
—
000B
Font Style ID (10 CPI, Courier)
—
0000
Reserved
—
00
Reserved
—
80
Font Attribute (In printer)
—
00
Reserved
XOA(PQC)
0008
Control Length
—
D633
Execute Order Any State
—
00
Flag Byte
—
F800
Print Quality Control
—
AB
Select NLQ
XOH(SIMS)
0008
Control Length
—
D68F
Execute Order Home State
—
00
Flag Byte
—
1500
Select Input Media Source
—
00
Front Paper Source
********
Begin Page
BP
0009
Control Length
—
D6AF
Begin Page
—
00
Flag Byte
—
00000000
Data ** Ignored
********
Write Text Data
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
225
Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code
Code Explanation
WT
0014
Control Length
—
262D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
03F107
Set Coded Font Local
—
04C709D8
Absolute Move Inline
—
04D20F78
Absolute Move Baseline
—
F2F8
Data '28'
WT
0011
Control Length
—
D62D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
04C61194
Absolute Move Inline
—
F1F2F3F4F5F6F
Data '123456'
WT
000D
Control Length
—
D62D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
04C62058
Absolute Move Inline
—
F9F9
Data '99'
WT
0013
Control Length
—
D62D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
04C709D8
Absolute Move Inline
—
04D21248
Absolute Move Baseline
—
F6F5F2F3
Data '6523'
WT
000E
Control Length
—
D62D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
04C613B0
Absolute Move Inline
—
F8F0F0
Data '800'
WT
0011
Control Length
—
D62D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
04C62058
Absolute Move Inline
—
F1F4FFC5C5C5
Data '14 EEE'
WT
0014
Control Length
226
Programmer Manual
Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code
Code Explanation
—
D62D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
04C70E10
Absolute Move Inline
—
04D21518
Absolute Move Baseline
—
F7F3F2F4F5
Data '73245'
WT
000E
Control Length
—
D62D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
04C61AB8
Absolute Move Inline
—
F0F9F9
Data '099'
WT
0013
Control Length
—
D62D
Write Text
—
00
Flag Byte
—
2BD3
Escape Sequence
—
04C628C8
Absolute Move Inline
—
F1F262F1F661F8F6
Data '12/16/86'
********
Write Graphics Control
WGC
002C
Control Length
—
D684
Write Graphics Control
—
00
Flag Byte
(GAP)
000B
Field Length
—
AC6B
Graphics Area Position Control
—
0000
Inline (X) Coordinate Position
—
0000
Baseline (Y) Coordinate Position
—
0000
Orientation (0 degrees)
—
A0
Absolute X, Absolute Y
(GDD)
001C
Field Length
—
A6BB
Graphics Data Descriptor
—
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
—
00
Reserved
—
3840
X Units/Unit Base
—
3840
Y Units/Unit Base
—
00000000
Reserved
—
0000
X Left Limit of Window
—
3570
X Right Limit of Window
—
1EF0
Y Top Limit of Window
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
227
Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code
Code Explanation
—
0000
Y Bottom Limit of Window
—
00000000
Reserved
—
0000
Graphics Flags ** Ignored
********
Write Graphics
WG
003D
Control Length
—
D685
Write Graphics
—
00
Flag Byte
(BSI)
70
Begin Segment Introducer
—
0C
Length of Following Parameter
—
00000000
Reserved
—
00
Flags
—
06
Append Segment
—
002A
Length of Segment
—
00000000
Reserved
(SCCS)
33
Set Character Cell Size
—
04
Length of Data
—
021C
Width of Cell
—
02D0
Height of Cell
(SCS)
38
Set Character String
—
07
Local Character Set ID
(CS)
05
Character String
—
C3
Field String
—
0BF4
X Coordinate (Units)
—
1734
Y Coordinate (Units)
—
D4
Data 'M'
(CS)
C3
Character String
—
10
Field Length
—
1680
X Coordinate (Units)
—
1734
Y Coordinate (Units)
—
F6F3CAF3F0F3CA
Data '63-303-498-8'
—
F4F9F8CAF8
(CS)
C3
Character String
—
07
Field Length
—
21C0
X Coordinate (Units)
—
1248
Y Coordinate (Units)
—
C5F4F8
Data 'E48'
END
0005
Control Length
—
D65D
End (Graphics)
228
Programmer Manual
Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code
Code Explanation
—
00
Flag Byte
********
Write Bar Code Control
WBCC
002B
Control Length
—
D680
Write Bar Code Control (BC)
—
00
Flag Byte
(BCAP)
000B
Field Length
—
AC6B
BC Area Position Control
—
0000
X Coordinate of BC Area
—
0000
Y Coordinate of BC Area
—
0000
Orientation of Bar Code (0 Degrees)
—
A0
Absolute X, Absolute Y
(BCDD)
001B
Field Length
—
A6EB
Bar Code Data Descriptor
—
00
Unit Base (10 in.)
—
00
Reserved
—
3840
X Units/Unit Base
—
3840
Y Units/Unit Base
—
3840
X Extent of Block (Width)
—
2FD0
Y Extent of Block (Height)
—
0000
Reserved
—
0C
Bar Code Type (2 of 5 Interleaved)
—
01
No Check Digit
—
FF
User Printer Default LFID
—
0000
Select Color (Black)
—
0E
Unit Module Width (.014 in.)
—
02D0
Element Height (720 Units)
—
01
Height Multiplier
—
0019
Wide/Narrow Ratio
********
Write Bar Codes
WBC
0013
Control Length
—
D681
Write Bar Code
—
00
Flag Byte
—
20
Bar Code Flag
—
2544
X Coordinate
—
0168
Y Coordinate
—
F2F8F6F5F1F3F8F1F0
Data '286523810'
Chapter 6. Print Samples and IPDS Coding Example
229
Table 9. IPDS Coding Example (continued)
IPDS Command Hexadecimal Code
Code Explanation
WBC
00E
Control Length
—
D681
Write Bar Code
—
00
Flag Byte
—
20
Bar Code Flag
—
28C8
X Coordinate
—
0D5C
Y Coordinate
—
F7F3F2F4
Data '7324'
END
0005
Control Length
—
D65D
End (Bar Code)
—
00
Flag Byte
********
End of Page
EP
0005
Control Length
—
D6BF
End Page
—
00
Flag Byte
230
Programmer Manual
Appendix A. Code Pages
The EBCDIC code charts page 231 contains information about the code pages that the 4247 Model
X03/Z03 Printers use on the Ethernet IPDS attachments. See the “ASCII Code Pages” on page 277 for
information about the code pages for Ethernet ASCII attachments. You can use the following charts to
determine the actual character printed for any code page and font combination.
EBCDIC Code Pages
The table below lists the EBCDIC code pages used by the 4247 Printer, and also provides page
references so you can determine what code page contains the characters you want to use.
Code
Page
Character Set Name
Page
37
USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual
233
260
Canadian French
234
273
Austrian/German
235
274
Belgian Old
236
275
Brazilian
237
277
Danish/Norwegian
238
278
Finnish/Swedish
239
280
Italian
240
281
Japanese English
241
282
Portuguese
242
284
Spanish/Spanish Speaking
243
285
English (UK)/Ireland
244
290
Japanese Katakana
245
297
French/French Azerty
246
420
Arabic
247
423
Greek (Old)
248
424
Hebrew Bulletin
249
500
International 5/Swiss/Belgian
250
813
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro
251
833
Korean
252
838
Thai
253
870
Latin 2/ROECE
254
871
Icelandic
255
875
Greek New + euro
256
880
Cyrillic
257
890
Yugoslav (Old)
258
892
OCR-A
259
893
OCR-B
260
924
Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro
261
1025
Cyrillic Multilingual
262
231
Code
Page
Character Set Name
Page
1026
Latin-5 Turkey
263
1097
Farsi
264
1112
Baltic Multilingual
265
1122
Estonian
266
1140
USA/Canada + euro
267
1141
Austrian/German + euro
268
1142
Danish/Norwegian + euro
269
1143
Finnish/Swedish + euro
270
1144
Italian + euro
271
1145
Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro
272
1146
English/UK + euro
273
1147
French + euro
274
1148
International 5/Belgian New + euro
275
1149
Icelandic + euro
276
232
Programmer Manual
USA/Canada/Canadian Bilingual
Appendix A. Code Pages
233
Canadian French
234
Programmer Manual
Austrian/German
Appendix A. Code Pages
235
Belgian Old
236
Programmer Manual
Brazilian
Appendix A. Code Pages
237
Danish/Norwegian
238
Programmer Manual
Finnish/Swedish
Appendix A. Code Pages
239
Italian
240
Programmer Manual
Japanese English
Appendix A. Code Pages
241
Portuguese
242
Programmer Manual
Spanish/Spanish Speaking
Appendix A. Code Pages
243
English (UK)/Ireland
244
Programmer Manual
Japanese Katakana
Appendix A. Code Pages
245
French/French Azerty
246
Programmer Manual
Arabic
Appendix A. Code Pages
247
Greek (Old)
248
Programmer Manual
Hebrew Bulletin
Appendix A. Code Pages
249
International 5/Swiss/Belgian
250
Programmer Manual
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7) + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
251
Korean
252
Programmer Manual
Thai
Appendix A. Code Pages
253
Latin 2/ROECE
254
Programmer Manual
Icelandic
Appendix A. Code Pages
255
Greek New + euro
256
Programmer Manual
Cyrillic
Appendix A. Code Pages
257
Yugoslav (Old)
258
Programmer Manual
OCR-A
Appendix A. Code Pages
259
OCR-B
260
Programmer Manual
Latin 9 (ISO 8859) + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
261
Cyrillic Multilingual
262
Programmer Manual
Latin-5 Turkey
Appendix A. Code Pages
263
Farsi
264
Programmer Manual
Baltic Multilingual
Appendix A. Code Pages
265
Estonian
266
Programmer Manual
USA/Canada + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
267
Austrian/German + euro
268
Programmer Manual
Danish/Norwegian + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
269
Finnish/Swedish + euro
270
Programmer Manual
Italian + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
271
Spanish/Spanish Speaking + euro
272
Programmer Manual
English/UK + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
273
French + euro
274
Programmer Manual
International 5/Belgian New + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
275
Icelandic + euro
276
Programmer Manual
ASCII Code Pages
The table below lists the ASCII code pages used by the 4247 Printer, and also provides page references
so you can determine what code page contains the characters you want to use.
Code
Page
Character Set Name
Page
437
USA (Personal Computer) A-54
278
737
Greek (MS DOS)
279
813
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)
280
819
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)
281
850
PC Multilingual
282
851
Old Greek
283
852
Latin 2/ROECE
284
853
Latin 3 (PC)
285
855
Cyrillic (PC)
286
857
Latin 5-Turkey + euro
287
858
PC Multilingual + euro
288
860
Portuguese
289
861
Icelandic
290
862
Hebrew
291
863
Canadian French
292
864
Arabic
293
865
Danish/Norwegian
294
866
PC Data, Cyrillic, Russian
295
869
Greek New + euro
296
874
Thai
297
876
OCR-A
298
877
OCR-B
299
912
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)
300
913
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)
301
914
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)
302
915
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)
303
916
Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)
304
920
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)
305
921
Baltic Multilingual
306
922
Estonian
307
923
Latin 9 (ISO 8859-15) + euro
308
1006
Urdu
309
1046
Arabic Extended
310
1089
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)
311
1098
Farsi (Personal Computer)
312
1116
Estonian (Personal Computer)
313
Appendix A. Code Pages
277
Code
Page
Character Set Name
Page
1117
Latvian (Personal Computer)
314
1118
Lithuanian (Personal Computer)
315
1250
Central Europe Latin 2
316
1251
Cyrillic Windows + euro
317
Extended Graphics Character Table
318
Italic Character Table
319
Epson Extended Character Variables
320
USA (Personal Computer) A-54
278
Programmer Manual
Greek (MS DOS)
Appendix A. Code Pages
279
Greek/Latin (ISO 8859-7)
280
Programmer Manual
Latin 1 (ISO 8859-1)
Appendix A. Code Pages
281
PC Multilingual
282
Programmer Manual
Old Greek
Appendix A. Code Pages
283
Latin 2/ROECE
284
Programmer Manual
Latin 3 (PC)
Appendix A. Code Pages
285
Cyrillic (PC)
286
Programmer Manual
Latin 5-Turkey + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
287
PC Multilingual + euro
288
Programmer Manual
Portuguese
Appendix A. Code Pages
289
Icelandic
290
Programmer Manual
Hebrew
Appendix A. Code Pages
291
Canadian French
292
Programmer Manual
Arabic
Appendix A. Code Pages
293
Danish/Norwegian
294
Programmer Manual
PC Data, Cyrillic, Russian
Appendix A. Code Pages
295
Greek New + euro
296
Programmer Manual
Thai
Appendix A. Code Pages
297
OCR-A
298
Programmer Manual
OCR-B
Appendix A. Code Pages
299
Latin 2 (ISO 8859-2)
300
Programmer Manual
Latin 3 (ISO 8859-3)
Appendix A. Code Pages
301
Latin 4 (ISO 8859-4)
302
Programmer Manual
Cyrillic (ISO 8859-5)
Appendix A. Code Pages
303
Latin 8 (ISO 8859-8)
304
Programmer Manual
Latin 5 (ISO 8859-9)
Appendix A. Code Pages
305
Baltic Multilingual
306
Programmer Manual
Estonian
Appendix A. Code Pages
307
Latin 9 (ISO 8859-15) + euro
308
Programmer Manual
Urdu
Appendix A. Code Pages
309
Arabic Extended
310
Programmer Manual
Latin 6 (ISO 8859-6)
Appendix A. Code Pages
311
Farsi (Personal Computer)
312
Programmer Manual
Estonian (Personal Computer)
Appendix A. Code Pages
313
Latvian (Personal Computer)
314
Programmer Manual
Lithuanian (Personal Computer)
Appendix A. Code Pages
315
Central Europe Latin 2
316
Programmer Manual
Cyrillic Windows + euro
Appendix A. Code Pages
317
Epson FX-series Code Pages
The following Epson code charts provide information on the character tables available for Epson FX-series
emulation mode.
Extended Graphics Character Table
Table 10.
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
sp
0
@
P
‘
p
Ç
É
á
└
╨
α
≡
1
1
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
í
┴
╤
β
±
2
"
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
┬
╥
Γ
≥
3
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
│
├
╙
π
≤
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
┤
─
╘
Σ
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
╡
┼
╒
σ
û
a
╢
╞
╓
µ
÷
╖
╟
╫
τ
~
6
1
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
7
'
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
o
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
╕
╚
╪
Φ
°
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
=
╣
╔
┘
Θ
*
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
║
╩
┌
^
v
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
╗
╦
j{
δ
'
C
,
<
L
\
l
¦
î
£
¼
╝
╠

∞
n
D
-
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
╜
═
{
φ
²
E
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
!
╛
╬
j
ε
"
F
/
?
O
_
o
Å
ƒ
@
┐
╧
‰
𢋠
Ø
318
Programmer Manual
Italic Character Table
Appendix A. Code Pages
319
Epson Extended Character Variables
The following table shows characters that vary, by language, from the Epson Extended Character Graphics
set.
The code points shown are the only ones that vary. For example, in the United Kingdom, only code point
X'23' is different from the basic Epson table, shown on page 304.
Code Point (in hexadecimal)
Country
23
24
40
5B
5C
5D
5E
60
7B
7C
7D
7E
USA
#
$
@
[
\
]
^
'
{
¦
}
~
France
à
°
ç
§
é
ù
è
}
Germany
§
Ä
Ö
Ü
ä
ö
ü
ß
Æ
Ø
Å
æ
ø
å
Ä
Ö
Å
é
ä
ö
å
ü
°
\
é
ù
à
ò
è
ì
¡
Ñ
¿
}
ñ
UK
£
Denmark - 1
$
Sweden
¤
É
Italy
Spain - 1
Japan
Ü
¥
Norway
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
ø
ü
Denmark - 2
É
Æ
Ø
Å
Ü
é
æ
ø
ø
ü
Spain - 2
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
í
ñ
ó
ú
Latin America I
á
¡
Ñ
¿
é
ü
í
ñ
ó
ú
French Canadian
á
â
ç
ê
î
ô
é
ù
è
û
ú
í
ó
á
é
ü
Latin America II
320
Programmer Manual
¤
Ñ
Appendix B. Application Paper Source Selection
Application-controlled paper-source selection
This section describes the identifiers to use in selecting the various available paper sources on the 4247
printer for key IPDS applications. These selections will cause the appropriate forms path selection
commands to be sent to the printer from the host applications.
PSF usage - z/OS and System i
In the z/OS® PSF's (PSF/MVS, PSF/VSE, and PSF/VM), the desired paper source is identified in the
FORMDEF, using the appropriate Media ID number as defined in the following sections. The FORMDEF
can also be used in System i® PSF and uses these same Media ID numbers.
Paper source identification (media IDs)
Continuous forms or combination forms feeding: “Continuous Forms Feeding” uses either the front
forms path or the rear forms path. The front path uses the forms that are fed into the front of the printer,
and utilize the forms tractor installed in the standard (default) Front Push configuration when the optional
second tractor is not installed. The standard (default) tractor becomes the rear tractor only when the
optional second tractor is installed. In this condition the optional second tractor becomes the front tractor.
“Combination Forms Feeding” applies to the dual continuous forms (both front push and rear push path in
use) printer configuration.
This is the common usage mode for the 4247. These identifiers should be used in all configurations.
In this configuration, the 4247 paper sources are identified by the host application as follows:
Front Media ID = 1
Rear Media ID = 2
The 4247 may be run in native (4247) mode or in an emulation mode (something other than 4247).
Creating form definitions (FORMDEFs)
In z/OS and AIX: Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA) can be used to create Form Definitions in the z/OS
and AIX® environments.
In System i: System i supports user specification of a Form Definition with the PRTAFPDTA command
and DEVTYPE=*AFPDS. Support for user named Form Definitions in the Printer File is included in System
i V3R2 and V3R7 or later releases.
System i media selection (other than FORMDEF)
In System i, selecting the input media source requires a combination of two Printer File parameters, Form
Feed (FORMFEED) and Source Drawer (DRAWER). The following selection parameters should be used
whether the printer is configured in 4247 or emulation (4230/42x4) mode:
Front CF:
FORMFEED (*CONT)
(See notes 1 & 2)
Rear CF:
FORMFEED (2)
(See notes 1 & 2)
Note: The combination of settings with Automatic Eject = Enabled and Automatic Restore = Disabled is not
recommended.
Notes:
1. In OS/400® Version 3 Release 2 and Version 3 Release 7, the FORMFEED parameter has been
enhanced to support explicit selection of the rear continuous form input source as follows:
321
Rear CF:
FORMFEED (*CONT2)
In this case, the AS/400® is aware that the Rear Continuous Forms is in fact a continuous form feed.
Therefore a drawer parameter is not required and the Forms Alignment message can be issued.
2. When you are switching from one continuous forms path to the other, printed output must be manually
torn off and removed from the printer before the first forms path can be parked. For this reason, you
may want to use the FORM keyword in the AS/400 Printer File to alert the operator to remove any
printer output before a job using a different forms path is sent.
Use of 'FORMS' parameters - z/OS and System i
For continuous forms printers with only a single continuous forms paper source, forms were specified
using FORMS parameters in JCL or, for the AS/400, the FORMTYPE parameter. This method can still be
used to have the operator change to the correct forms for the job. But it cannot be used to cause the
printer to switch between the Front and Rear continuous forms sources.
Using 4247 with System i Host Print Transform
AS/400 Host Print Transform (HPT) provides two objects that allow you to use the multiple paper sources
available on the 4247 printer.
The first is *IBM4247DUAL. This object provides support for the two tractor feeds, with DRAWER (1)
meaning the front tractor feed and DRAWER (2) meaning the rear tractor feed.
Front Continuous Forms:
DRAWER (2)
Rear Continuous Forms:
DRAWER (4)
Support that includes this enhancement to the HPT objects can also be added to V4R1 or V4R2 by
applying a PTF. For information, see the Euro I Info APAR, number II1523.
322
Programmer Manual
Appendix C. 4247 Bar Code and OCR Printing Options
This appendix contains information about the options that are available for printing bar codes and Optical
Character Recognition (OCR) characters. The bar code charts detail the element (bar/space) width
options, the wide-to-narrow element ratios, the magnification percentages, and the characters printed per
inch plus whether the bar codes can be printed in low-contrast or high-contrast modes. Low-contrast mode
provides the best throughput, while high-contrast mode results in the best bar code printing quality.
The OCR section contains the Optical Character Recognition symbol subsets that can be printed.
Bar Code Printing Options Charts
Keep the following statements in mind when printing bar codes.
v All bar codes printed by the 4247 Printer can print in high-contrast mode. Not all of them, however, can
print in low-contrast mode. If you specify low-contrast mode for a bar code that is not supported in that
mode, the printer will not return an error but will default to high-contrast mode instead.
v Vertically-rotated bar codes may not consistently meet bar/space width specifications. Users should test
for application suitability.
v Bar codes printed in low-contrast mode may not consistently meet specifications. Users should test for
application suitability.
Table 11. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes
Narrow
Element Width
Options (mils)
Wide-to-Narrow
Element Ratio
Low-Contrast
Mode Horzontal
Low-Contrast
Mode - Vertical
Bar Code Char.
Per Inch (CPI)
Code 3 of 9
13.9
13.9
13.9
16.7
16.7
16.7
20.8
20.8
20.8
27.8
27.8
27.8
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5.54
4.97
4.5
6.65
5.95
5.4
3.69
3.2
3.0
2.77
2.48
2.25
Interleaved 2 of 5
13.9
13.9
13.9
16.7
16.7
16.7
20.8
20.8
20.8
27.8
27.8
27.8
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10.29
9.0
8.0
12.35
10.8
9.6
6.86
5.76
5.33
5.14
4.5
4.0
Bar Code Type
323
Table 11. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes (continued)
Narrow
Element Width
Options (mils)
Wide-to-Narrow
Element Ratio
Low-Contrast
Mode Horzontal
Low-Contrast
Mode - Vertical
Bar Code Char.
Per Inch (CPI)
Industrial 2 of 5
13.9
13.9
13.9
16.7
16.7
16.7
20.8
20.8
20.8
27.8
27.8
27.8
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6.0
5.54
5.14
7.2
6.65
6.17
4.0
3.6
3.43
3.0
2.77
2.57
Matrix 2 of 5
13.9
13.9
13.9
16.7
16.7
16.7
20.8
20.8
20.8
27.8
27.8
27.8
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9.0
8.0
7.2
10.8
9.6
8.64
6.0
5.14
4.8
4.5
4.0
3.6
MSI
13.9
13.9
13.9
16.7
16.7
16.7
20.8
20.8
20.8
27.8
27.8
27.8
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6.0
5.14
4.5
7.6
6.17
5.4
4.0
3.27
3.0
3.0
2.57
2.25
Codabar
13.9
13.9
13.9
16.7
16.7
16.7
20.8
20.8
20.8
27.8
27.8
27.8
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
2:1
2.5:1
3:1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6.55 - 7.2
5.76 - 6.55
5.14 - 6.0
7.86 - 8.64
6.91 - 7.86
6.17 - 7.2
4.36 - 4.8
4.00 - 4.5
3.43 - 4.0
3.27 - 3.6
2.88 - 3.27
2.57 - 3.0
Code 128
13.9
16.7
20.8
27.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
6.55
7.86
4.36
3.27
(See Note)
Bar Code Type
324
Programmer Manual
Table 11. Bar Code Printing Options for Non-UPC Family Bar Codes (continued)
Bar Code Type
POSTNET
Narrow
Element Width
Options (mils)
Wide-to-Narrow
Element Ratio
Low-Contrast
Mode Horzontal
Low-Contrast
Mode - Vertical
Bar Code Char.
Per Inch (CPI)
21.2
N/A
Yes
Yes
4.3
Note: The CPI shown for Code 128 is for code sets A or B. The CPI for code set C is approximately double the
values shown.
Table 12. Bar Code Printing Options for UPC Family Bar Codes
Narrow
Element Width
Options (mils)
Wide-to-Narrow
Element Ratio
Low-Contrast
Mode Horzontal
Low-Contrast
Mode - Vertical
Bar Code Char.
Per Inch (CPI)
UPC A
13.9
16.7
1.07
1.07
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10.29
12.35
UPC E
13.9
16.7
1.07
1.07
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10.29
12.35
UPC/EAN-2
13.9
16.7
1.07
1.07
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10.29
12.35
UPC/EAN-5
13.9
16.7
1.07
1.07
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10.29
12.35
EAN 8
13.9
16.7
1.07
1.07
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10.29
12.35
EAN-13
13.9
16.7
1.07
1.07
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10.29
12.35
Bar Code Type
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Printing
OCR Symbols
The 4247 prints a comprehensive set of OCR-A and OCR-B characters derived from standards developed
by the International Standards Organization (ISO) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
All OCR character shapes produced by the 4247 Printer are not identical with the shapes defined in these
standards. Users should test OCR printing with their scanning equipment to verify satisfactory
performance.
Appendix C. 4247 Bar Code and OCR Printing Options
325
OCR Scanning
We have tested the following OCR symbol subsets for readability:
Table 13. OCR Symbol Subsets
OCR-A
OCR-A
OCR-A
OCR-A
OCR-B
OCR-B
NRMA
Data Entry
Eurobanking
Money Transfer
ECMA
Money Transfer
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
M
N
P
R
U
X
Y
>
/
"
326
Programmer Manual
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
M
N
P
R
U
X
Y
>
/
+
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C
P
R
U
X
Z
/
+
#
hook
fork
chair
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
hook
fork
chair
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C
E
N
S
T
V
X
Z
>
<
+
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
>
+
<
Appendix D. Configuration Menu Lockout
Configuration Menu Lockout should be used by the application programmer or printer operator to lock the
Configuration Menu when you want to prevent a casual operator from changing parameter values that
have been set for print jobs.
To set Configuration Menu Lockout:
1. Press STOP if the READY indicator is on. The printer goes to the NOT READY state.
2. In the NOT READY state, press and hold TEST, then press START. Release both keys. The printer
displays
Press STOP
Note: Do not press STOP. Press SET TOP OF FORM. The Configuration Menu is now locked.
327
328
Programmer Manual
Appendix E. Interfaces
This section provides technical information for the parallel and serial interfaces.
The Parallel Interface
The parallel interface of this printer fully supports the Centronics protocol plus the specific features
requested by the EPSON and IBM printer connection in monodirectional mode and the Compatibility and
Nibbles modes in bidirectional mode, plus the negotiation phases and the device identifier (as IEEE
P1284).
The parallel interface is available on a specific 36 contact connector type AMPHENOL 57-40360- 12-D56
or equivalent connector for 1284 Type B.
v Drive Capability
Up to 15 feet (5 m) on AWG26 min. wire size of twisted conductors on TTL receiver. The max.
reachable distance is conditioned by the host drive capability and by the noise level along the interface
cable path.
v Printer Connector Type
36 pins, 1284 Type B
v Cable Connector
25 pin, 1284 A Type
Signals Description
According to the IEEE - P1284 Standard, the pins assume different meanings and are identified by
different names depending on the actual handshaking mode as follows:
v Compatibility mode (Centronics)
This is the lower level mode provides an asynchronous, byte-wide forward (host-to-peripheral) channel
with data and status lines used according to their original definitions. The interfaces power up in the
compatibility Mode Idle phase.
v Nibble Mode
This mode provides an asynchronous, reverse (peripheral-to-host) channel, under control of the host. In
this mode, peripheral device to host data bytes are sent as two sequential, four-bit nibbles using the
four peripheral-to-host status lines. These two modes cannot be active simultaneously.
v Byte Mode
This mode provides an asynchronous, byte-wide reverse (peripheral-to host) channel based on eight
data lines of the interface for data and the control/status lines for handshaking. Byte mode is under host
control and it cannot be simultaneously active with compatibility mode.
Operating Phases
The link protocol is mainly based on the following three phases:
v Negotiation Phase
This phase is activated always by the host, only when in compatibility mode, and defines:
– whether a bidirectional link protocol can be established.
– the handshaking mode as well as the communications mode to be used.
– the device identification, if supported.
v Communication Phase
This phase is based on well defined handshaking rules which depend upon the selected link mode.
v Termination Phase
329
This phase is initiated by the host and returns the interface to the compatibility mode.
Parallel Interface Signals
Description of the signals in monodirectional link:
Signal Name
Pin N°
Source
STROBE
1
HOST
Clock signal which controls data transmission with its falling edge.
ACK
10
PRINTER
Negative pulsed signal indicating that the printer has received data
and is ready to accept the next set of data. Also sent when the
printer is switched from off-line to on-line and at the end of the
initialization time. The BUSY line is always active.
DATA BIT 1
2
DATA BIT 2
3
PRINTER /
HOST
Data 8 is the most significant bit. These are the data lines used by
host or printer to transfer control code or ASCII codes.
DATA BIT 3
4
DATA BIT 4
5
DATA BIT 5
6
DATA BIT 6
7
DATA BIT 7
8
DATA BIT 8
9
BUSY
11
PRINTER
When high, this signal indicates that the printer cannot accept data or
control codes. This signal goes high during data processing, in test
and program modes, during initialization, when the buffer is full, and
when a paper jam, paper end or paper size error occurs, in case of a
power-on reset, the reception of a STROBE signal, while the register
was not yet read, or when the INIT line is still active.
PE
12
PRINTER
When high, this signal indicates that the automatic input bin is out of
paper and paper cannot be loaded from an other bin.
SELECT
13
PRINTER
When high, this signal indicates that the printer is on-line. It is put to
low state in case of initialization or test and program mode. In IBM
Proprinter emulation in low condition this signal signals a off-line
request from the operator panel, paper jam, paper end or paper size
errors.
AUTOFEEDXT
14
HOST
GND
16
–
Logical ground level (0V).
CHASSIS GND
17
–
Frame ground.
+5 VDC
18
PRINTER
19-30
–
INIT
31
HOST
Active low level signal. Indicates, that the printer is initializing. The
BUSY signal is forced high.
ERROR
32
PRINTER
When low, this signal indicates that the printer is offline, there is an
offline request from the operator panel, or the printer is in an error
state because of: paper jam, paper end or paper size error, engine
error, output bin full or cover open condition.
+5V
35
PRINTER
Pulled up to signal.
SELECTIN
36
HOST
SIGNAL GND
330
Programmer Manual
Description
Active low level signal. Indicates whether a LF is performed after a
CR or not.
Is the DC voltage supplied by a component that limits the driven
capability up to 100 mA.
Signal ground.
Active low level signal. Enables the printer.
The pins 1 to 14 of the printer are connected to the pins with the same number of the parallel port of the
host.
The pins 19 to 30 of the printer are connected to the pins 18 to 25 of the parallel port of the host.
The pins 31, 32 and 36 of the printer are connected respectively to the pins 16, 15 and 17 of the parallel port
of the host.
1284 Mode signal names are shown with their Compatibility mode (Centronics) names in parenthesis ( ) for
the bidirectional link.
Pin N° for
Signal Wire
Pin N° for
Return Wire
HostClk (nStrobe)
1
19
HOST
AD1 (Data 1)
2
20
HOST in Compatibility mode and negotiation phase.
AD2 (Data 2)
3
21
AD3 (Data 3)
4
22
AD4 (Data 4)
5
23
AD5 (Data 5)
6
24
AD6 (Data 6)
7
25
AD7 (Data 7)
8
26
AD8 (Data 8)
9
27
PrtClk (nAck)
10
28
PRINTER
PrtBusy (Busy)
11
29
PRINTER
AckDataReq (PError)
13
28
PRINTER
Xflag (Select)
14
28
PRINTER
HostBusy (nAutofd)
15
30
HOST
Peripheral Logic High
(+5 V)
18
n.a. (nInit)
31
30
HOST
nDataAvail (NFault)
32
29
PRINTER
1284 Active (NSelectIn)
36
30
Signal Name
Common Logic Ground
Source
NOT USED in Nibble mode.
BIDIRECTIONAL in Byte mode.
PRINTER
16 and Return Wires
Chassis Ground
17
Parallel Interface Signals Behaviour
HostClk /nWrite (nStrobe)
Compatibility Mode:
Set Active low to transfer data into printer input latch. Data is valid while nStrobe is low.
Negotiation Phase:
Set active low to transfer extendibility request value into printer input latch. Data is valid
on the falling edge of HostClk.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Set high during Nibble Mode transfer to avoid latching data into printer. Pulsed low
during Byte Mode transfers to acknowledge transfer of data from the printer. The printer
shall ensure that this pulse does not transfer a new data into the printer input latch.
AD1 ... AD8 (Data 1 ... Data 8)
Compatibility Mode:
Forward channel data.
Appendix E. Interfaces
331
AD1 ... AD8 (Data 1 ... Data 8)
Negotiation Phase:
Extendibility request value.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Nibble Mode:
NOT USED.
Byte Mode:
Reverse channel data.
PrtClk (nAck)
Compatibility Mode:
Pulsed low by the printer to acknowledge the transfer of a data from the host.
Negotiation Phase:
Set low to acknowledge 1284 support, then set high to indicate that the Xflag (Select)
and data available flags may be read.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Used in both Nibble and Byte Modes to qualify data being sent to the host.
PrtBusy (Busy)
Compatibility Mode:
Driven high to indicate that the printer is not ready to receive data.
Negotiation Phase:
Reflects the present state of the printer's forward channel.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Nibble Mode:
Data bits 3 then 7, then forward channel busy status
Byte Mode:
Forward channel busy status.
Reverse Idle phase:
Forward channel busy status.
AckDataReq (PError)
Compatibility Mode:
Driven high to indicate that the printer has encountered an error in the paper path. The
printer shall set nFault low whenever it sets PError high.
Negotiation Phase:
Set high to indicate 1284 support, then follows nDataAvail (nFault).
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Nibble Mode:
Data bits then 6.
Byte Mode:
same as nDataAvail (nFault)
Reverse Idle phase:
Set high until host requests data transfer, then follows nDataAvail (nFault).
Xflag (Select)
Compatibility Mode:
Set high to indicate that the printer in on-line.
Negotiation Phase:
The Xflag refers to extendibility flag. Used by the printer to reply to the requested
extendibility byte sent by the host during the negotiation phase. The signal level is low for
Nibble Mode, high for Byte Mode.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Nibble Mode:
Data bits 1 then 5.
Byte Mode:
Same as negotiation phase.
Reverse Idle phase:
Same as negotiation phase.
Xflag (Select)
Compatibility Mode:
Set low by host to put the printer into auto-line feed mode.
Negotiation Phase:
Set low in conjunction with 1284 Active (NSelectIn) being set high to request a 1284
mode.
Then set high after printer sets PtrClk (nAck) low.
332
Programmer Manual
Xflag (Select)
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Reverse Idle phase:
Nibble Mode:
Set low to indicate that host can receive printer-to-host data then set
high to acknowledge receipts of that nibble.
Byte Mode:
Same as Nibble Mode to request and acknowledge bytes. Following a
reverse channel transfer the interface transitions to idle phase when
HostBusy (nAutoFd) is set low and printer‘s no data available.
Set high in response to PtrClk (nAck) low pulse to re-enter reverse data transfer phase.
Is set high with 1284 Active (nSelectIn) being set low, the 1284 idle phase is being
aborted and the interface returns to Compatibility Mode.
Peripheral Logic High (+ 5V)
Set high to indicate that all other signals sourced by the printer are in valid state. Set low to indicate the printer is off.
n.a. (nInit)
Compatibility Mode:
Pulsed low in conjunction with 1284 Active low to reset the interface and force to return
to Compatibility Mode idle phase.
Negotiation Phase:
Set HIGH.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Set HIGH.
nDataAvail (NFault)
Compatibility Mode:
Set low to indicate that an internal printer error has occurred.
Negotiation Phase:
Set high to acknowledge 1284 compatibility. In Nibble or Byte Mode it is then set low to
indicate printer-to-host data is available following host setting HostBusy (nAutoFd) high.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Nibble Mode:
Set low to indicate that printer is ready to send to host. Then used to
send data bits 0 then 4.
Byte Mode:
Used to indicate that data is available.
Reverse Idle phase:
Used to indicate that data is available.
nDataAvail (NFault)
Compatibility Mode:
Set low to indicate that an internal printer error has occurred.
Negotiation Phase:
Set high to acknowledge 1284 compatibility. In Nibble or Byte Mode it is then set low to
indicate printer-to-host data is available following host setting HostBusy (nAutoFd) high.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Nibble Mode:
Set low to indicate that printer is ready to send to host. Then used to
send data bits 0 then 4.
Byte Mode:
Used to indicate that data is available.
Reverse Idle phase:
Used to indicate that data is available.
1284 Active (NSelectIn)
Compatibility Mode:
Set low by host to select printer.
Negotiation Phase:
Set high in conjunction with Host Busy being set low to request a 1284 mode.
Reverse Data Transfer
Phase:
Set high to indicate that bus direction is printer to host. Set low to terminate 1284 mode
and set bus direction host to printer.
Reverse Idle Phase:
Same as Reverse Data Transfer phase.
Appendix E. Interfaces
333
Interface Timing
Timing and Handshaking depend upon the connection mode.
DATA
/STROBE
/ACK
BUSY
Figure 31. Mode Centronics
Our Centronics mode supports the BUSY-WHILE-STROBE busy signal timing and ACK-INBUSY as
BUSY-ACK relationship.
Legend
Time interval
A
Data Setup Time
1.0
B
Strobe pulse width
1.0
C
Data hold time
1.0
t
Busy while Strobe
0.25
1.0
a
Ack in Busy
0
2.5
334
Programmer Manual
Min.
Max.
500
all times in µs
Mode IEEE 1284
Figure 32. Mode IEEE 1284
The Serial Interface
This printer provides the RS-232/C serial interfaces. The interface mode is selected via menu.
v Transmission Type
Data is sent and received in start/stop (asynchronous) transmission.
v Character Format
Each character is transmitted in the following format:
1 START BIT + 8 DATA BITS + 1 PARITY BIT + 1 STOP BIT
The least significant bit of the data bits is sent first after the start bit. The number of data bits is selected
via menu. The parity bit, when present, follows the data bits. The start bit is a logical “0” and the stop bit
is a logical “1”. The start and stop bits are used as character framing bits.
v Printer Connector
Male DB9 or equivalent connector.
v Drive Capability
Max. 50 feet (15 m) for all supported data rates. The RS-422/A interface is effective up to 1200 m.
Appendix E. Interfaces
335
Serial Interface Signals
The following table lists the RS-232/C serial interface signals:
Pin Number
Local
Connect.
Source
Remote
Connect.
Source
SIGNAL
GROUND
5
–
–
TXD
3
Printer
Printer
RXD
2
Host
Data Set
RTS
7
Printer
Printer
Request to Send Signal (an output from printer). Active
HIGH level signal. It is HIGH until the printer is
powered off, then an indeterminate state is present .
CTS
8
Data Set
Active HIGH level signal indicates that the host or data
set is ready to receive data from the printer.
DSR
6
Data Set
Active HIGH level signal. Indicates that the host or data
set is ready to be connected to the printer and is ready
for data transfer.
DCD
1
Data Set
Active HIGH level signal. Indicates that the host is
transmitting or the data set is receiving the Data Carrier
signal.
2nd RTS
9
Printer
DTR
4
Printer
Signal Name
Description
Always connected to the 0 Volts of the Power Supply
Transmitted Data Signal (an output from printer). A
MARK condition is held during IDLE communication
state. An indeterminate state is present when printer is
powered off.
Received data signal (an input to printer).
Functionally equivalent to the DTR signal.
Printer
Data Terminal Ready. Normally HIGH (ON). Indicates
that the printer is ready to initiate a connection.
LAN Interface Port
LAN Interface Port
1. Ethernet 10/100BaseT Connector
2. Green 10/100Mbit/sec. Transmission Speed LED
3. Yellow Traffic LED
LED Indicators
The LED indicator modes are described in the following table:
LED
Yellow LED
Green LED
Status
Description
Unlit
Transmission speed at 10Mbit/sec.
Lit
Transmission speed at 100Mbit/sec.
Blinks
Transmitting or receiving packets from the network.
USB Interface Port
USB 2.0 full speed 12/Mbit/sec. interface.
336
Programmer Manual
Appendix F. Network Interface Technical Reference
4247 Network Configuration Parameters
IP Address Assignment
Fixed: Assigns the static or fixed IP address.
DHCP: Assigns the dynamic IP address (DHCP protocol).
Default value is Fixed.
Fixed and DHCP assignments of IP addresses are supported. On most networks, you will want to assign a permanent
IP address and disable DHCP.
IP Address
These values set the IP Address. The address is represented by a decimal notation where the decimal values are
divided by points in four fields.
Each field ranges between 0 and 255.
Default is 127.000.000.000.
Subnet Mask
These values set the Subnet Mask number. This number is represented by a decimal notation where the decimal
values are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.
Default is 255.255.254.000.
Default Gateway
These values set the Default Gateway address. This address is represented by a decimal notation where the decimal
values are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.
Default is 000.000.000.000.
The gateway address tells the printer which router or gateway to use to access other subnets or hosts. Simply add
your router's IP address as the default gateway. All packets destined for other subnets will be forwarded to the default
gateway for delivery to the destination host.
Host Name
The host is identified by a name in the NetBIOS protocol over TCP/IP. This function allows creating the name of the
host using a 14-character string.
Default is 4247_xxxxxx where xxxxxx are the last 6-digits of the MAC address...
Workgroup Name
The workgroup is identified by a name in the NetBIOS protocol over TCP/IP in Windows. This function allows creating
the name of the workgroup using a 14-character string.
Default is Workgroup.
337
SMTP Service
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) allows a mail server address to be entered into the printer configuration to send
automated e-mail notifications with printer alert conditions.
Disabled: Disables the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) service, that is disables the reception/transfer/error
service of the e-mail.
Enabled: Enables the SMTP service, that is it enables the reception/transfer/error service of the e-mail.
Default is Disabled.
Below is a list of SMTP display error messages:
1. SERVICE REQUESTED. Technical personnel intervention is required.
The display can show:
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
089
MACHINE CHECK
MACHINE CHECK
MACHINE CHECK
MACHINE CHECK
MACHINE CHECK
MACHINE CHECK
MACHINE CHECK
RIBBON JAM
(S/W ERROR)
(S/W ERROR)
(S/W ERROR)
(ENGINE ERROR)
(LAN ERROR)
(AFTA ERROR)
(PRINT ERROR)
2. COVER OPEN. The display shows:
096 COVER OPEN
3. NO PAPER. The display shows:
001 END OF FORMS
4. PAPER JAM. The display can show:
002 FORMS JAMMED FRONT
020 FORMS JAMMED REAR
099 FORMS JAMMED
Mail Server Address
These values set the mail server address. This number is represented by a decimal notation where the decimal values
are divided by points in four fields. Each field ranges between 0 and 255.
Default is 000.000.000.000.
Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.
E-mail Address (Receiver)
This function allows writing the e-mail address where you can notify the failures using a 48-character string. Default is
an empty string.
Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.
E-mail Address (Sender)
This function allows to write the sender e-mail address using a 48-character string.
Default is an empty string.
Note: Item selection on the printer menu allowed only if the “SMTP Service” function choice is Enabled.
Location
You can enter the physical location of the printer into this field.
Contact
You can enter a network support contact’s name and phone number into this field.
338
Programmer Manual
Managing a Single Printer Configuration Using the 4247 Internal
Webpage
Configuration Password
The 4247's configuration settings can be protected by a password to keep unauthorized users from
making changes. When you try to submit any 4247 configuration change, you will be asked for your user
name and password. At the prompt, enter the default user name = root and default password = root,
unless you have setup another user name and password with root privileges.
Storing and Saving Settings
When settings are configured on the 4247 and the SUBMIT button on the related page has been pressed,
you will be reminded to Reboot the printer to ensure the latest settings are in use. To reset the 4247, go to
the Home page, enter the Power On Reset page, and Click on the REBOOT PRINTER button.
Managing Multiple Printers Using the 4247 Remote Printer
Management Utility
The Remote Printer Management Utility (RPMU) is a software tool for network administrator’s that allows
the configuration and control of 4247 printers remotely over a LAN. With this tool the installed printers can
be controlled, configured and organized easily. The main features are:
Device Discovery - Searches for the devices within a range of IP addresses.
Printer Organization - Printers connected to the network can be organized into logical groups in a
hierarchically structured tree.
Printer Status Report - Checks the printer's status and reports alarms.
Printer Configuration - Printers may be configured as needed from the administrator's workstation.
Change the configuration of single printers, or simultaneously change the configuration of multiple
printers in your enterprise, anywhere, and anytime.
Firmware Updating - Provides a firmware download function to upgrade the printer's firmware.
Remote Operator Panel Management - Provides a virtual operator panel for the remotely connected
printer at the administrator's workstation that allows performing all functions normally achieved pressing
the operator panel keys. The RPMU also provides the basic status management for third-party printers
compliant to the standard MIB objects. Visit our website to download this free software utility program.
4247 Network Interface Summary
INSTALLATION INTEGRATION
Network speed / connection
10/100 BASET
Auto-detection 10/100 network speed
Yes
Manual network speed selection
No
Parallel interface free
Yes
Network configuration through printer operator panel
Yes
Web page network setting configuration
Yes
Web page login password protection
Yes
Web page default user-id and default password
Root, Root
Windows Port Monitor and Drivers
Yes
NIC configuration printout
Yes
DHCP
Yes
Appendix F. Network Interface Technical Reference
339
WINS
Yes
DDNS
Yes
SYSTEM / OS
IBM System i OS 400
®
Yes
IBM pSeries AIX
Yes
Sun Solaris
Yes
Unix
Yes
Linux
®
Yes
Windows 95,98,2000,NT,XP, 2003 Server
Yes
NETBIOS over TCP
Yes
NETBEUI
No
Novell Netware
No
OS2
No
MacIntosh / Apple EtherTalk
No
PRINTING METHODS
Raw Port 9100
Yes
LPD/LPR Port 515
Yes
LPR print queue name
Any name (PR1, d1PRN, etc.) can be used.
IPDS Port 5100
Yes (with IPDS option on some models)
Interleaved multi-protocol communications
Yes
Hot Interface switching
Yes between Parallel and LAN interfaces
Hot Port switching
Yes between Raw 9100, LPR/LPD 515, and IPDS 5100
(with IPDS option installed on some models)
Multiple internal print server queues
No
String substitutions
No
String before/after job
No
DATASTREAMS
4247 ASCII native
Yes
ASCII text and single byte escapes
Yes
IBM Proprinter XL24 / XL24 AGM emulation
Yes (on some models)
IBM Personal Printer 2391 emulation
Yes (on some models)
IBM Proprinter III XL emulation
Yes (on some models)
IBM Personal Printer 2381 emulation
Yes (on some models)
Epson LQ series emulation
Yes (on some models)
Epson - FX emulation
Yes (on some models)
Epson LQ1600K with GB18030 character set emulation
Yes (with DBCS option on some models)
IPDS
Yes (with IPDS option on some models. See Chapter 3,
“Intelligent Printer Data Stream,” on page 75 for
application program compatibility considerations)
PRINTER SERVER FACILITIES SUPPORT
PSF AIX
Yes
PSF OS400
PSF MVS
340
™
Programmer Manual
Yes
Yes
PSF VSE
Yes
PSF VM
Yes
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
4247 Remote Printer Management Utility
Yes
IBM NPM
Yes (generic printer)
HP JetAdmin
Yes (generic printer)
E-mail SMTP
Yes
Internal Web page
Yes
PRINTER STATUS AND ERROR REPORTING
Ready
Yes
Not ready
Yes
Paper out
Yes
Paper jam
Yes
Cover open
Yes
Machine check (carriage fault, ribbon blocked...)
Yes
NETWORK CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (see above)
LINK LAYER
Ethernet II
Yes
802.2
Yes
802.3
Yes
2/SNAP
Yes
Link disconnect (no data timeout)
15 second fixed setting
PROTOCOLS
IP
Yes
TCP
Yes
UDP
Yes
ARP
Yes
RARP
Yes
SMP
Yes
Telnet
Yes
DHCP
Yes
DDNS
Yes
WINS
Yes
BOOTP
Yes
FTP
Yes
TFTP
Yes
ICMP
Yes
LPR/LPD
Yes
DHCP
Yes
SNMP
Yes
SMTP
Yes
Direct Socket Printing
Yes
Appendix F. Network Interface Technical Reference
341
HTTP
Yes
PING
Yes
SNMP
Yes
MIB II (RFC 1514)
Yes (see note)
Host Resource MIB (RFC 1514)
Yes
Printer MIB (RFC1759)
Yes
4247 Private MIB
Yes
Reverse Telnet
No
PROS
No
IPP
No
SLPv2
No
HARDWARE
RISC processor
Yes
Flash memory
4MB
RAM
16MB
Attachment connector type
RJ-45
Network traffic led
Yes (green)
Network speed led
Yes (yellow)
FIRMWARE UPGRADE
Firmware upgrade over network
Yes
Firmware upgrade through parallel interface
Yes
Note: All relevant parts of MIB-II (RFC1231) required to support HP JetAdmin are implemented.
v - The following IP table group OIDs are not implemented: ipForwarding, ipDefaultTTL , ipInReceives
,ipInHdrErrors,ipInAddrErrors, ipForwDatagrams, ipInUnknownProtos, ipInDiscards, ipInDelivers, ipOutRequests,
ipOutDiscards, ipOutNoRoutes, ipReasmTimeout ,ipReasmReqds, ipReasmOKs,ipReasmFails,ipFragOKs,
ipFragFails, ipFragCreates
v The ipRouteTable OIDs are not implemented.
v The ipNetToMediaTable OIDs are not implemented.
v The icmp group OIDs are not implemented.
v The tcp group OIDs are not implemented.
v The udp group OIDs are not implemented.
v The snmp group OIDs are not implemented.
IBM systems - LAN printing technical support documents on the
world-wide-web
The following AS/400 iSeries® documents and many others can be found by selecting the "Technical
databases" link at the System i Technical Support area of the IBM website.
32815, Configuring a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description
This document contains information on configuring *LAN 3812 SNMP device descriptions for LAN attached
ASCII printers. The term SNMP refers to Simple Network Management Protocol. SNMP allows for two-way
communication with the printer when attached to the LAN using a print server that also supports SNMP.
Support for the SNMP print driver is available in the base code for R450 IBM OS/400 and above, and is
being added to R430 and R440 OS/400 through PTFs. This is an alternative to using Remote Output
Queues (RMTOUTQs).
342
Programmer Manual
19934440, Recommended SNMP Port Number Values for *LAN 3812
SNMP Device Descriptions
This document contains a list of recommended SNMP Port Number Values for *LAN 3812 SNMP printer
device descriptions, depending on the type of network interface or print server being used with your
printer. The Port number (PORT) parameter specifies which TCP/IP port to use when printing operating
system spooled files from an IBM System i family of servers system through a *LAN 3812 SNMP device
description to a printer on a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN). Therefore, the
specified TCP/IP port must be open on any firewalls, routers or SOCK servers used between the iSeries
family system and the printer. If the specified TCP/IP port is closed, the printer writer for the *LAN 3812
SNMP device description will be unable to open a connection with the printer and will therefore not be able
to print to that printer.
8983237, Configuring a Remote Output Queue (RMTOUTQ)
This document contains information on configuring and using a Remote Output Queue (RMTOUTQ) for
sending IBM OS/400 or IBM i5/OS® spooled files to an output queue on another IBM System i family of
servers, or to print OS/400 or i5/OS spooled files to printers that are attached to the LAN/WAN using a
print server, a PC, or a Unix server. Requirements include a TCP/IP interface configured in the OS/400 or
i5/OS, a TCP/IP address on the printer side, and a Line Print Daemon (LPD) TCP/IP process running on
the print server, PC or Unix server.
18762910, Configuring a *LAN 3812 Device Description that Uses the
LPR Print Driver (TSPLPRD) Exit Program
The LPR Print Driver (TSPLPRD) exit program is an unsupported utility that provides the function of
sending spooled files from an output queue to an ASCII printer which is attached to an LPD server. This is
a similar function to what is provided using remote output queues in IBM OS/400 or IBM i5/OS, but differs
because this driver exit program is specified on a printer device description. Thus, it can make use of
information specified about the printer in the device description which is not available on a remote output
queue. Also, because it uses LPR within a printer writer, it supports page ranges that can be used with
any printer that currently uses a remote output queue – including dot matrix and line printers.
This exit program also serves the purpose of providing an example of a Print Driver Exit, as it is written to
the Print Driver Exit interface as documented in the AS/400 System API Reference manual. This exit
program was introduced in the R440 version of QUSRTOOL, but will work with R410 and later versions of
OS/400. This tool is supplied as is without support. Therefore, any assistance with configuring or using a
printer device description that uses an LPR print driver exit program must be done through Consult
Line/400.
IPDS Services Facility (PSF) printing
Print Services Facility™ (PSF) serves as the print manager for Advanced Function Printing™ (AFP™) on the
IBM zSeries®. and iSeries system platforms. PSF helps you to support complex document requirements,
manage all of the elements required in each document and dynamically deliver the pages to the printer.
The 4247 printer is supported by the following (PSF) software facilities.
v Print Services Facility for z/OS
v Print Services Facility for i/OS
v Print Services Facility for VSE
v Print Services Facility for VM
Notes:
1. In PSF z/OS the 4247 is only supported in 4247 native and 4224 emulation modes.
2. In PSF z/OS the 4230 printer was supported in 4224 emulation mode only and not in native mode.
PSF support documents can be found by selecting the “Software” link at the IBM website.
Appendix F. Network Interface Technical Reference
343
The following documents and many others can be found by selecting the “Technical databases” link at the
System i Technical Support area of the IBM website.
Configuring a *LAN IPDS Device Description
This document contains information on configuring *LAN IPDS device descriptions for LAN attached IPDS
printers. Support for *LAN IPDS device descriptions is available in the base code for R410 OS/400 and
above, as well as R370 OS/400 (which is no longer supported).
Note: Print Services Facility/400 (PSF/400) must be installed and licensed in order to print to LAN
attached IPDS printers.
24475739, Recommended IBM IPDS Port Number Values for *LAN IPDS Device
Descriptions
This document contains a list of recommended IBM® IPDS™ Port Number Values for *LAN IPDS printer
device descriptions, depending on the type of network interface or print server being used with your
printer. The Port number (PORT) parameter specifies which TCP/IP port to use when printing operating
system spooled files from an IBM System i system through a *LAN IPDS device description to a printer on
a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN). Therefore, the specified TCP/IP port must be
open on any firewalls, routers, or SOCK servers used between the System i system and the printer. If the
specified TCP/IP port is closed, the printer writer for the *LAN IPDS device description will not be able to
open a connection with the printer and will, therefore, not be able to print to that printer.
The following publications can be found by searching the publication number (for example, S550-0427) at
the “Support” link at the following IBM website.
www.ibm.com
G544-3877, PSF: AIX for PSF Users
This publication provides AFP and PSF information for AIX users interested in installing and using PSF for
AIX for printing in the AIX environment. Topics include: an overview of PSF; how PSF for AIX fits in with
the existing AIX print processes; benefits of PSF for AIX; hardware and software prerequisites; migration
considerations, and administration and usage considerations.
344
Programmer Manual
Appendix G. LAN Interface MIB Support
Table 14. SYSTEM GROUP - RFC 1213
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
sysDescr.0
1.2.6.1.2.1.1.1.0
(octet string)
sysObjectID.0
1.2.6.1.2.1.1.2.0
(object identifier)
sysUpTime.0
1.2.6.1.2.1.1.3.0
(timeticks)
sysContact.0
1.2.6.1.2.1.1.4.0
(octet string)
sysName.0
1.2.6.1.2.1.1.5.0
(octet string)
sysLocation.0
1.2.6.1.2.1.1.6.0
(octet string)
sysServices.0
1.2.6.1.2.1.1.7.0
(integer)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
ifNumber.0
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0
(integer)
ifIndex.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.1
(integer)
ifDescr.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.1.2.1
(octet string)
ifType.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3.1
(integer)
ifMtu.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.4.1
(integer)
ifSpeed.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5.1
(gauge)
ifPhysAddress.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.6.1
(octet string)
ifAdminStatus.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.7.1
(integer)
ifOperStatus.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.8.1
(integer)
ifLastChange.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.9.1
(timeticks)
ifInOctets.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1
(counter)
ifInUcastPkts.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.1
(counter)
ifInNUcastPkts.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.1
(counter)
ifInDicards.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.13.1
(counter)
ifInErrors.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.1
(counter)
ifInUnknownProtos.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.15.1
(counter)
ifOutOctets.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.1
(counter)
ifOutUcastPkts.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.1
(counter)
ifOutNUcastPkts.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18.1
(counter)
ifOutDiscatds.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19.1
(counter)
ifOutErrors.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20.1
(counter)
ifOutQLen.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.21.1
(gauge)
ifSpecific.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.22.1
(object identifier)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
IpAdEntAddr.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.1
(ipaddress)
IpAdEntIfIndex.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.2
(integer)
Table 15. INTERFACE GROUP - RFC 1213
Table 16. ADDRESS GROUP - RFC 1213
345
Table 16. ADDRESS GROUP - RFC 1213 (continued)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
IpAdEntNetMask.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.3
(ipaddress)
IpAdEntBcastAddr.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.4
(integer)
IpAdEntReasmMaxSize.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.5
(integer)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
hrSystemUptime.0
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.1.1.0
(timeticks)
hrStorageIndex.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.1.1
(integer)
hrStorageIndex.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.1.2
(integer)
hrStorageIndex.3
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.1.3
(integer)
hrStorageIndex.4
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.1.4
(integer)
hrStorageType.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.2.1
(object identifier)
hrStorageType.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.2.2
(object identifier)
hrStorageType.3
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.2.3
(object identifier)
hrStorageType.4
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.2.4
(object identifier)
hrStorageDescr.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.3.1
(octet string)
hrStorageDescr.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.3.2
(octet string)
hrStorageDescr.3
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.3.3
(octet string)
hrStorageDescr.4
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.3.4
(octet string)
hrStorageAllocationUnits.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.4.1
(integer)
hrStorageAllocationUnits.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.4.2
(integer)
hrStorageAllocationUnits.3
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.4.3
(integer)
hrStorageAllocationUnits.4
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.4.4
(integer)
hrStorageSize.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.5.1
(integer)
hrStorageSize.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.5.2
(integer)
hrStorageSize.3
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.5.3
(integer)
hrStorageSize.4
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.5.4
(integer)
hrStorageUsed.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.6.1
(integer)
hrStorageUsed.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.6.2
(integer)
hrStorageUsed.3
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.6.3
(integer)
hrStorageUsed.4
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.6.4
(integer)
hrStorageAllocationFailures.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.7.1
(counter)
hrStorageAllocationFailures.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.7.2
(counter)
hrStorageAllocationFailures.3
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.7.3
(counter)
hrStorageAllocationFailures.4
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.2.3.1.7.4
(counter)
hrDeviceIndex.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.1.1
(integer)
hrDeviceIndex.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.1.2
(integer)
hrDeviceType.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.2.1
(object identifier)
hrDeviceType.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.2.2
(object identifier)
hrDeviceDescr.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.3.1
(octet string)
Table 17. HOST RESOURCES - RFC 1213
346
Programmer Manual
Table 17. HOST RESOURCES - RFC 1213 (continued)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
hrDeviceDescr.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.3.2
(octet string)
hrDeviceID.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.4.1
(object identifier)
hrDeviceID.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.4.2
(object identifier)
hrDeviceStatus.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.5.1
(integer)
hrDeviceStatus.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.5.2
(integer)
hrDeviceErrors.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.6.1
(counter)
hrDeviceErrors.2
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.2.1.6.2
(counter)
hrPrinterStatus.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.5.1.1.1
(integer)
hrPrinterDetectedErrorState.1
1.3.6.1.3.1.25.3.5.1.2.1
(octet string)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
prtGeneralConfigChanges.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.1.1
(counter)
prtGeneralCurrentLocalization.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.2.1
(integer)
prtGeneralReset.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.3.1
(integer)
prtGeneralCurrentOperator.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.4.1
(integer)
prtGeneralServicePerson.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.5.1
(integer)
prtInputDefaultIndex.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.6.1
(integer)
prtOutputDefaultIndex
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.7.1
(integer)
prtMarkerDefaultIndex.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.8.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathDefaultIndex.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.9.1
(integer)
prtConsoleLocalization.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.10.1
(integer)
prtConsoleNumberOfDisplayLines.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.11.1
(integer)
prtConsoleNumberOfDisplayChars.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.12.1
(integer)
prtCcnsoleDisable.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.13.1
(integer)
prtCoverDescription.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.6.1.1.2.1.1
(octet string)
prtCoverStatus.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.6.1.1.3.1.1
(integer)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.1
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.2
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.3
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.4
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.5
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.6
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.7
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.7.
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.8
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.8
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.9
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.9
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.10
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.10
(octet string)
prtLocalizationLanguage.1.11
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.2.1.11
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.1
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.2
(octet string)
Table 18. PRINTER - RFC 1759
Appendix G. LAN Interface MIB Support
347
Table 18. PRINTER - RFC 1759 (continued)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
prtLocalizationCountry.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.3
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.4
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.5
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.6
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.7
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.7
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.8
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.8
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.9
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.9
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.10
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.10
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCountry.1.11
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.3.1.11
(octet string)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.1
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.2
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.3
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.4
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.5
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.6
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.7
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.7
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.8
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.8
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.9
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.9
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.10
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.10
(integer)
prtLocalizationCharacterSet.1.11
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.7.1.1.4.1.11
(integer)
prtInputType.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.2.1.1
(integer)
prtInputType.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.2.1.2
(integer)
prtInputDimUnit.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.3.1.1
(integer)
prtInputDimUnit.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.3.1.2
(integer)
prtInputMediaDimFeedDirDeclared.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.4.1.1
(integer)
prtInputMediaDimFeedDirDeclared.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.4.1.2
(integer)
prtInputMediaDimXFeedDirDeclared.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.5.1.1
(integer)
prtInputMediaDimXFeedDirDeclared.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.5.1.2
(integer)
prtInputMediaDimFeedDirChosen.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.6.1.1
(integer)
prtInputMediaDimFeedDirChosen.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.6.1.2
(integer)
prtInputMediaDimXFeedDirChosen.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.7.1.1
(integer)
prtInputMediaDimXFeedDirChosen.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.7.1.2
(integer)
prtInputCapacityUnit.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.8.1.1
(integer)
prtInputCapacityUnit.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.8.1.2
(integer)
prtInputMaxCapacity.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.9.1.1
(integer)
prtInputMaxCapacity.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.9.1.2
(integer)
prtInputCurrentLevel.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.10.1.1
(integer)
prtInputCurrentLevel.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.10.1.2
(integer)
prtInputStatus.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.11.1.1
(integer)
prtInputStatus.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.11.1.2
(integer)
348
Programmer Manual
Table 18. PRINTER - RFC 1759 (continued)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
prtInputMediaName.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.12.1.1
(octet string)
prtInputMediaName.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.12.1.2
(octet string)
prtInputName.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.13.1.1
(octet string)
prtInputName.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.13.1.2
(octet string)
prtInputVendorName.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.14.1.1
(octet string)
prtInputVendorName.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.14.1.2
(octet string)
prtInputModel.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.15.1.1
(octet string)
prtInputModel.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.15.1.2
(octet string)
prtInputVersion.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.16.1.1
(octet string)
prtInputVersion.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.16.1.2
(octet string)
prtInputSerialNumber.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.17.1.1
(octet string)
prtInputSerialNumber.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.17.1.2
(octet string)
prtInputDescription.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.18.1.1
(octet string)
prtInputDescription.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.18.1.2
(octet string)
prtInputMediaType.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.21.1.1
(octet string)
prtInputMediaType.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.21.1.2
(octet string)
prtOutputType.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.9.2.1.2.1.1.1
(integer)
prtOutputCapacityUnit.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.9.2.1.3.1.1.1
(integer)
prtOutputMaxCapacity.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.9.2.1.4.1.1.1
(integer)
prtOutputRemaining.Capacity.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.9.2.1.5.1.1.1
(integer)
prtOutputStatus.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.9.2.1.6.1.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerMarkTech.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.2.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerCounterUnit.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.3.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerLifeCount.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.4.1.1
(counter)
prtMarkerPowerOnCount.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.5.1.1
(counter)
prtMarkerProcessColorants.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.6.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerSpotColorants.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.7.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerAddressabilityUnit.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.8.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerAddressabilityFeedDir.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.9.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerAddressabilityXFeedDir.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.10.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerNorthMargin.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.11.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerSouthMargin.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.12.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerWestMargin.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.13.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerEasatMargin.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.14.1.1
(integer)
prtMarkerStatus.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.10.2.1.15.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathMaxSpeedPrintUnit.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.2.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathMaxSpeedPrintUnit.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.2.1.2
(integer)
prtMediaPathMediaSizeUnit.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.3.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathPathMediaSizeUnit.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.3.1.2
(integer)
prtMediaPathMaxSpeed.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.4.1.1
(integer)
Appendix G. LAN Interface MIB Support
349
Table 18. PRINTER - RFC 1759 (continued)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
prtMediaPathMaxSpeed.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.4.1.2
(integer)
prtMediaPathMaxMediaFeedDir.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.5.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathMaxMediaFeedDir.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.5.1.2
(integer)
prtMediaPathMaxMediaXFeedDir.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.6.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathMaxMediaXFeedDir.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.6.1.2
(integer)
prtMediaPathMinMediaFeedDir.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.7.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathMinMediaFeedDir.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.7.1.2
(integer)
prtMediaPathMinMediaXFeedDir.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.8.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathMinMediaXFeedDir.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.8.1.2
(integer)
prtMediaPathType1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.9.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathType.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.9.1.2
(integer)
prtMediaPathDescription.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.10.1.1
(octet string)
prtMediaPathDescription.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.10.1.2
(octet string)
prtMediaPathStatus.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.11.1.1
(integer)
prtMediaPathStatus.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.13.4.1.11.1.2
(integer)
prtChannelType.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.2.1.1
(integer)
prtChannelType.1,2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.2.1.2
(integer)
prtChannelType.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.2.1.3
(integer)
prtChannelType.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.2.1.4
(integer)
prtChannelType.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.2.1.5
(integer)
prtChannelState.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.6.1.1
(integer)
prtChannelState.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.6.1.2
(integer)
prtChannelState.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.6.1.3
(integer)
prtChannelState.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.6.1.4
(integer)
prtChannelState.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.6.1.5
(integer)
prtChannelIfIndex.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.7.1.1
(integer)
prtChannelIfIndex.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.7.1.2
(integer)
prtChannelIfIndex.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.7.1.3
(integer)
prtChannelIfIndex.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.7.1.4
(integer)
prtChannelIfIndex.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.14.1.1.7.1.5
(integer)
prtInterpreterLangFamily.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.2.1.1
(integer)
prtInterpreterLangFamily.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.2.1.2
(integer)
prtInterpreterLangFamily.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.2.1.3
(integer)
prtInterpreterLangFamily.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.2.1.4
(integer)
prtInterpreterLangLevel.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.3.1.1
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangLevel.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.3.1.2
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangLevel.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.3.1.3
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangLevel.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.3.1.4
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangVersion.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.4.1.1
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangVersion.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.4.1.2
(octet string)
350
Programmer Manual
Table 18. PRINTER - RFC 1759 (continued)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
prtInterpreterLangVersion.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.4.1.3
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangVersion.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.4.1.4
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangVersion.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.5.1.1
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangVersion.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.5.1.2
(octet string)
prtInterpreterLangVersion.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.5.1.3
(octet string)
prtInterpreterDescription.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.5.1.4
(octet string)
prtInterpreterVersion.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.6.1.1
(octet string)
prtInterpreterVersion.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.6.1.2
(octet string)
prtInterpreterVersion.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.6.1.3
(octet string)
prtInterpreterVersion.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.6.1.4
(octet string)
prtInterpreterDefaultOrientation.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.7.1.1
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultOrientation.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.7.1.2
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultOrientation.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.7.1.3
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultOrientation.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.7.1.4
(integer)
prtInterpreterFeedAddressability.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.8.1.1
(integer)
prtInterpreterFeedAddressability.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.8.1.2
(integer)
prtInterpreterFeedAddressability.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.8.1.3
(integer)
prtInterpreterFeedAddressability.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.8.1.4
(integer)
prtInterpreterXFeedAddressability.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.9.1.1
(integer)
prtInterpreterXFeedAddressability.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.9.1.2
(integer)
prtInterpreterXFeedAddressability.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.9.1.3
(integer)
prtInterpreterXFeedAddressability.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.9.1.4
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultCharSetIn.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.10.1.1
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultCharSetIn.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.10.1.2
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultCharSetIn.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.10.1.3
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultCharSetIn.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.10.1.4
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultCharSetOut.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.11.1.1
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultCharSetOut.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.11.1.2
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultCharSetOut.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.11.1.3
(integer)
prtInterpreterDefaultCharSetOut.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.11.1.4
(integer)
prtInterpreterTwoWay.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.12.1.1
(integer)
prtInterpreterTwoWay.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.12.1.2
(integer)
prtInterpreterTwoWay.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.12.1.3
(integer)
prtInterpreterTwoWay.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.15.1.1.12.1.4
(integer)
prtConsoleDisplayBufferText.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.16.5.1.2.1.1
(octet string)
prtConsoleDisplayBufferText.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.16.5.1.2.1.2
(octet string)
prtConsoleOnTime.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.2.1.1
(integer)
prtConsoleOnTime.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.2.1.2
(integer)
prtConsoleOnTime.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.2.1.3
(integer)
prtConsoleOnTime.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.2.1.4
(integer)
Appendix G. LAN Interface MIB Support
351
Table 18. PRINTER - RFC 1759 (continued)
OBJECT ID
MIB
TYPE
prtConsoleOnTime.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.2.1.5
(integer)
prtConsoleOnTime.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.2.1.6
(integer)
prtConsoleOffTime.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.3.1.1
(integer)
prtConsoleOffTime.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.3.1.2
(integer)
prtConsoleOffTime.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.3.1.3
(integer)
prtConsoleOffTime.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.3.1.4
(integer)
prtConsoleOffTime.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.3.1.5
(integer)
prtConsoleOffTime.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.3.1.6
(integer)
prtConsoleColor.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.4.1.1
(integer)
prtConsoleColor.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.4.1.2
(integer)
prtConsoleColor.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.4.1.3
(integer)
prtConsoleColor.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.4.1.4
(integer)
prtConsoleColor.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.4.1.5
(integer)
prtConsoleColor.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.4.1.6
(integer)
prtConsoleDescription.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.5.1.1
(octet string)
prtConsoleDescription.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.5.1.2
(octet string)
prtConsoleDescription.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.5.1.3
(octet string)
prtConsoleDescription.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.5.1.4
(octet string)
prtConsoleDescription.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.5.1.5
(octet string)
prtConsoleDescription.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.17.6.1.5.1.6
(octet string)
prtAlertSeverityLevel.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.2.1.1
(integer)
prtAlertTrainingLevel.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.3.1.1
(integer)
prtAlertGroup.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.4.1.1
(integer)
prtAlertGroupIndex.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.5.1.1
(integer)
prtAlertLocation.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.6.1.1
(integer)
prtAlertCOde.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.7.1.1
(integer)
prtAlertDescription.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.8.1.1
(octet string)
prtAlertTime
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.9.1.1
(timeticks)
prtAlertTable
prtAlertIndex.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.1.1.1
not accessible
Interger32
prtAlertSeverityLevel.1.1
read only
INTEGER
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.2.1.1
This MIB can assume the following values:
3 (critical)
in paper jam, ribbon jam, afta error, print error, or machine check
condition.
4 (warning)
in paper out or cover open condition.
1 (other)
in all other conditions.
prtAlertTrainingLevel.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.3.1.1
352
Programmer Manual
read only
INTEGER
prtAlertTable
This MIB can assume the following values:
3 (untrained)
in paper jam or cover open condition.
1 (other)
in all other conditions
prtAlertGroup.1.1
read only
INTEGER
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.4.1.1
This MIB can assume the following values:
6 (cover)
in cover open condition.
9 (output)
in ribbon jam condition.
13 (mediapath)
in paper jam condition.
5 (generalPrinter)
in all other conditions.
prtAlertGroupIndex.1.1
read only
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.5.1.1
This MIB can assume the following values:
0 (generalPrinter index)
1 (marker index)
2 (cover index)
3 (mediaPath index)
Integer32
prtAlertLocation.1.1
read only
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.6.1
This MIB always assumes the value of 1.
Integer32
prtAlertCode.1.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.7.1.1
1 (other)
3 (coverOpen)
8 (jam)
503 (powerUp)
INTEGER
read only
in
in
in
in
ribbon jam condition.
cover open condition.
paper jam condition.
all other conditions.
prtAlertDescription.1.1
read only
OCTET STRING
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.8.1.1
This MIB can assume the following values:
"Ribbon Lock"
in ribbon jam condition.
"Cover Open"
in cover open condition.
"Jam"
in paper jam condition.
"PowerUp"
in all other condtions.
prtAlertTime.1.1
read only
TimeTicks
1.3.6.1.2.1.43.18.1.1.9.1.1
This MIB always assumes the value of 0, that is:
0 days 00h:00m:00s:00th
Appendix G. LAN Interface MIB Support
353
354
Programmer Manual
Appendix H. The Remote Printer Management Utility
The Remote Printer Management Utility is a software tool for network administrators that allows the
configuration and control of printers remotely connected to the Ethernet LAN.
With this tool the installed printers may be controlled, configured and organized easily.
The main features are:
Device Discovery
Searches for the devices within a range of IP addresses.
Printer Organization
The printers connected to the network can be organized into logical
groups in a hierarchically structured tree.
Printer Status Report
Checks the printer's status and reports alarms.
Printer Configuration
The remotely connected printers may be configured as needed from the
administrator's workstation.
Firmware Updating
Provides a firmware downloading function to upgrade both the base and
the LAN card firmware.
Remote Operator Panel Management
Provides a virtual operator panel for the remotely connected printer at the
administrator's workstation that allows to perform all functions normally
achieved pressing the operator panel keys.
The Remote Printer Management Utility also provides the basic status management for third-party printers
compliant to the standard MIB objects.
Operating System Compatibility
The Remote Printer Management Utility is a Java™ based application and can be run on any platform
supporting the Java Run Time Environment version 1.6 or newer.
Software Installation and Documentation
The Remote Printer Management Utility software and User's Guide.
355
356
Programmer Manual
Notices
Thanks for choosing the 4247 printer.
Your printer is a reliable working equipment that will be very useful in your daily job.
Our printers have been designed to be compact and respectful of the work environment. They offer
a wide range of features and multiple functions that confirm the high technological level reached by
the printers with Compuprint brand.
To maintain these printing performances unchanged in the long run, Compuprint has developed
specific consumables for each printer type that assure an excellent operation with high
printing quality level reliability.
Compuprint srl recommends to use only its original consumables with original packaging
(identified by its holographic label).
In this way, a proper use of the printer at quality level stated in the product characteristics can be
assured.
All typical usage problems related to not certified consumables may be avoided, such as an
overall quality print level degradation and, often, the reduction of the product life due to the fact
that the proper working conditions for the print heads and other printer parts are not assured.
Moreover, Compuprint does not only certify its consumables in terms of working conditions but
also carefully controls their compliance with the international standard rules concerning:
•
•
•
no cancerous materials;
no flammability of the plastic materials;
other standards
Compuprint advises the customers not to use products for which the compliance to this safety rules
are not warranted. Finally seek your dealer or contact a Compuprint office and be sure that are
provided you the original consumables.
FFC Notes
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission
limits. Compuprint is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other
than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
357
European Union (EU) Conformity Statement
Compuprint srl declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 2006/95/EC, 2004/108/EC.
Per the applicable requirements of EU directive 98/37/EC (“machines”) sound pressure of the above
product (measured according to EN27779) does not exceed 70dBA.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information
Technology Equipment according to European standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment
were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against
interference with licensed communication devices. Important This is a Class A product. In a
domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential
for causing
interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment.
Compuprint srl cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors.
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Statement for CISPR 22 Edition 2 Compliance
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
User Information according to European Directive 2002/95/EC and 2003/108/EC
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations.
The symbol shown on the left, applied to the product or on its packing,
indicates that, at end of life, the product is not to be thrown away, or disposed
as unsorted municipal waste, but separately collected.
Compuprint srl encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment
to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed.
Customer that needs to dispose this equipment must contact the produce and
follow the collection framework available locally for the return, recycling and
recovery of WEEE.
Customer participation to the separate collection is important to minimize any potential effects on
the environment and human health, due to the potential presence of hazardous substances in the
equipment, and aids the reuse and recycle of the materials by which the equipment is made.
Uncorrect disposal of the product by the customer will be punished according to the local
regulations and Laws.
358
Programmer Manual
MAN10299.00.00
Printed in Italy
MAN10299.00.00
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising